Home

User Manual go2DECODE 3.4 - hik

Contents

1. 2 order frequency shift keying with Demodulator matched filter demodulator modulation Symbol rate index gt 1 E 13 333 Bd I SR tolerance 0 050 Bd Shift 6 667 Hz 3 Shift tolerance 3 000 Hz gt Modem type Min burst length Max burst length Min pause length 0 1805 5 Figure 155 FSK2 matched Parameters D Symbol table Frequency 1 lowest 1 2 highest o C do etre Deft Figure 156 Frequency to Symbol Conversion Table Note Similar tables are available with all FSK modems FSK 2 3 4 discr Control Demod Decod Extras Audio Frequency Shift Keying 2 order 3 TET order or 4 order frequency shift keying I MOS with discriminator FM demodulation Symbol rate 50 000 Bd modulation index 0 5 1 EE 2 000 ba El cin et Shift 300 000 Hz gt Shift tolerance 12 000 Hz Min burst length 0 210 s E Max burst length 0 260 s Min pause length 0 060 s H Figure 157 FSK 2 3 4 discr Parameters User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters e 143 S go2DECODE Demodulator Additional Settings FSK 2 3 autoshift Guter Demod Extras Audio Demodulator FSK 2 3 autoshift hal Symbol rate 5 000 Bd pa SR tolerance B Modulation order Shift 2 500 Hz 2 Shift tolerance 3 000 Hz Modem type Min burst length 0 600 s Max burst length 0 260 s K Min pause length
2. 1000 DUU 600 400 200 0 00 400 600 au 1000 Hz Figure 215 AUTOSPEC Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd SH tolerance Bd Shit a Shift tolerance Hz Table 134 AUTOSPEC Demodulator Settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 199 S go2DECODE Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Recognition yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment yes Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 135 AUTOSPEC Features Baudot async General Information The asynchronous Baudot mode is a means to transfer printable characters over a communication chan nel Synchronisation in this case is achieved by the use of a Start Bit which has the polarity reverse to the Stop Bit and the Idle State Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Shit He Bandwidth Hz Symbol rate Bd Table 136 Baudot async Characteristics 200 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE 15 04 46 000 15 04 46 500 15 04 49 000 15 04 49 500 15 04 50 000 k d dBFS 0 50 100 mt 1000 a00 600 400 200 200 400 600 DUU 1000 Hz Figure 216 Baudot async Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Symbol rate Bd 50 SR tolerance B 5 Shift Hz 450 10 f
3. 104 Control Tab on Property heet 106 Spectrum Vile An 107 Display of Overmodulated Gugnal 107 opectrum Sonagram Parameters Tab on Display Property heet 108 Corrected MP c 108 Cursor Tab on Display Property Gheet 109 Two Cursors Positioned Around the Relevant Spectrum Area 109 The Enlarged Spectrum has a Low Resolution oooooonnccnnncccccnnonnccnnnnconononanennnnnnnononananennns 109 Increased Spectrum Hesoluton 110 Spectrum Display with Peak Hold Curve coccccccconncccnncccconononncnnnnncnnonononenonnnononnnannnnnnnnnonononans 110 Zoom nof the SPEL OA BE 111 Cursor Tab on the Display Property Gheet 111 Frequency Response Characteristics with Grid Overlay 1nnnn0nnn00nnnnnannnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 112 Spectrum over the Envelope Curve Difference Magnitude of the FSK Signal 113 Eye Pattern Display via Difference Magnitude rrrnnnnrnnnnnnnvnrnnnnenrnnnnrnvnnnnnennnnerennnnnnrnnnnnnnen 113 EEG DE EEE EEE 114 Eye Pattern Display with Filtered Difference Magnitude ccccooncnccconconccnoncncononcnnononcnnconanenoss 115 Bit Display of Demodulated Bits occcccccocnncnnccnononcnnncnnnancnnnononancnnnononancnnnononanennnononanennnoss 115 Eug bie 116 The Decoded Text is shown in the Result Display 116 Overview of Decoder Creation 117 Load Decoder Editor WE 118 Decoder Etre EE 119 A 119 nn e 120 A 120 FUNN APP A 121 Ao o 1
4. Narrowband FM SelCal system in the VHF UHF frequency range Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation Multitone Coding Character coding Table 336 Euro Characteristics 15 07 32 500 15 07 33 000 15 07 33 500 15 07 34 000 2000 1750 1500 1250 1000 750 500 250 0 250 500 750 1000 13250 1500 1750 2000 Hz Figure 283 Euro Spectrogram Demodulator Settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 295 go2DECODE Parameter Default Tone duration ms TD tolerance ms Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s Min burst SNR dB Table 337 Euro Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal s frequency range Status Feature Status Table 338 Euro Features FLEX General Information FLEX is a high speed pager protocol developed by Motorola Two Messaging Systems are currently de fined the FLEX one way data messaging protocol and the ReFLEX two way data messaging protocol Usage Broadcast paging on VHF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FFSK 2 FFSK 4 Symbol rate Bd 1600 3200 Data rate bps 1600 3200 6400 BCHET 2T Alphabet ITA 5 Table 339 FLEX Characteristics 296 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SS go2DECODE 15 07 34 500 15 07 35 000 15 07 35 500 15 07 36 000 4 m t 0 0000000 dBFS 1 2000 10000 50
5. 500 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Hz Figure 266 SITOR A Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd SR tolerance Bd Shit a Shift tolerance Hz User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 271 go2DECODE Parameter Default Min burst length s 0 065 Max burst length s 0 290 Min pause length s 0 200 VER file name sitor a_170hz ver Table 286 SITOR A Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment yes Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 287 SITOR A Features SITOR B General Information SImplex Teletype Over Radio SITOR is a mode for maritime communications to exchange teletype data over a radio channel in a robust way SITOR B is the FEC variant Usage Basic maritime data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones Shift Hz 170 400 Bandwidth Hz Symbol rate Bd Table 288 SITOR B Characteristics 272 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE 15 07 29 000 15 07 29 500 15 07 30 000 15 07 30 500 15 07 31 000 dBF5 o 50 100 H m t S500 450 400 350 300 250 z200 150 100 50 20 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Hz
6. Combination with other modems modem list y n Table 266 POL ARQ Features PSK10 General Information PSK10 is a modem type developed by radio amateurs PSK10 emissions are very narrow band and ro bust against fading effects 262 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 D go2DECODE Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation DBPSK Symbol rate Bd Coding Huffman coding Table 267 PSK10 Characteristics dBFS 0 50 100 15 06 50 000 15 06 50 500 15 06 51 000 15 06 51 500 15 06 52 000 4 pun 200 175 150 125 100 75 50 25 0 25 sa To 100 125 150 175 200 Hz Figure 260 PSK10 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Symbol rate Bd Bd Table 268 PSK10 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Recognition User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 263 S go2DECODE Feature Status Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 269 PSK10 Features PSK10 AM General Information PSK10 AM is a modem type developed by radio amateurs PSK10 AM emissions are very narrow band and robust against fading effects Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation DBPSK Symbol ra
7. Figure 230 Codan 3012 Data Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator MDPSK 2 4 8 16 A B Symbol rate Bd SR tolerance Bd Version No of channels 32 Channel position type Channel distance User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 221 ai go2DECODE Parameter Default Table 177 Codan 3012 ALE Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Symbol rate Bd 75 SR tolerance Bd 2 Modulation order 4 Version A No of channels 16 Channel position type Channel distance Channel distance Hz 112 5 H H Max burst length s 12 000 Min pause length s 0 070 VER file name codan3212 16channel psk ver Table 178 Codan 3012 Data Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Demodulator MDPSK 2 4 8 16 A B Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 179 Codan 3012 Features Codan Selcal General Information Codan SelCall FSK is a radio standard developed by CODAN PTY Australia Usage Selcall and status message transfer over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK 222 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Parameter Value Shit Hz Bandwidth Hz Symbol rate 8d Table 180 Codan Selcal ALE Characteristics 15 05 15 000 15 05 15 500 15 05 16 00
8. File name arq 6 90 plnk T av File wav h Figure 102 Add or Remove Files In this dialog window first select the file type and then one or several files New files are added to the ex isting Play List 98 e DANA Digital Analogue Audio Interface User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 D go2 DECODE C Program Files x86 go25IGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo alis plnk C Program Files x86 go 25IGNALS fgo 2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq 6 90 pink E Cr Program Files x86 go 25IGNALS go 2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq amp e3 cyc8 plnk Re gt C Program Files x86 go25IGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arg_e_cyc4 plink C Program Files x86 go25IGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq e cyc8 plnk C Program Files x86 go25IGMALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq m2 242 4 plnk C Program Files x86 go 25IGNALS go 2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq m2 342 4 plnk bs C Program Files x86 go25IGMALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq m 242 plnk C Program Files x86 go25IGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq m 342 pink P 4 Tm t Start SRin 11025 00 Hz SRout 11025 00 Hz Sink connected T go2 SIGNALS Figure 103 DANA Play List Files highlighted via single mouse click can be moved or removed using the buttons to the right of the Play List Di Remove all Figure 104 DANA Move List Parameter Description Move selected file upward by one position Move selected file downward by one position Remove the selected file Remove all files in the list T
9. Hell display Parameters Cursor Extras ianmniel n mper 4l TT PT A a Input signal No signal vi Circulation time 500 000 ms Brightness 50 0 Contrast 100 0 Pause Figure 79 Hell Display Parameters Tab User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 81 go2 DECODE The following parameters are available Parameter Function Channel number There are signals which consist of several signal parts e g the input signal Channel in an MFSK2 modem By using the channel number the channels of such signals can be selected as the input signal Use this parameter to select the input signal of the display If the automatic production is ac tive you can only select the input IF While setting the parameters of the demodulator it may occur that a previously selected input signal is no longer available In this case the selection no signal will be displayed Circulation time Defines the time required to draw a row By using this parameter you can set the skew of a symbol pattern in that way that the frames are positioned vertically The display range of the pattern can be doubled or halved by doubling or halving the circulation time If the skew is positioned vertically the symbol rate can be defined 1000 duration of one column of the frame to be measured using X cursors and M Harmonic Brightness Sets the brightness of the display The lower the brightness the dark
10. Table 23 Demodulator Types MDPSK2 4 A B Multi channel differentially phase shift keyed signal MPSK2 4 8 A B Multi channel absolutely phase shift keyed signal LINK 11 Bursted multi tone and differentially phase shift keyed signal Various parameters are available for every demodulator type Some demodulators allow for changes in their symbol tables i e modification of the symbol values produced by the demodulator in question D Symbol table Frequency 1 lowest 2 highest Undo Figure 47 Demodulator Table of Symbols Decoder Selection The results of the demodulation process are symbols These symbols can be decoded using an appropri ate decoder To do so select the appropriate decoder from the list of decoders in the tab lt Decod gt Addi tionally decoders can be edited by means of the decoder editor 46 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2 DECODE Abbreviation Decoder type Local Figure 48 Parameters for Decoder Selection The following table explains the parameters of the decoder selection Parameter Function Decoder name Specifies the name of the applied decoder Activate the button lt Decoder Name gt to open the dialog for selection of a decoder from a list of decoders Decoder channel Decoder Channel A B is only available if the demodulator type is set to F6 F7B AIB Channel A refers to the F6 F7B channel By choosing the F7B mode Morse D
11. Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 156 CIS 14 Features 210 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2 DECODE CIS 36 General Information CIS 36 is a modem used by the Soviet military and diplomatic services This modem system is also known as CROWD 36 Usage Data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation MFSK Number of tones 36 Tone spacing Hz 40 Bandwidth Hz 2000 Symbol rate Baud 40 Encryption Table 157 CIS 36 Characteristics 15 05 35 500 15 05 36 000 15 05 36 500 15 05 37 000 15 05 37 500 dBFS o 50 100 1500 1250 1000 750 500 250 250 sad 750 1000 1750 1500 Hz Figure 223 CIS 36 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Multitone MFSK TD tolerance ms Tone position type Tone distance Hz VER file name Table 158 CIS 36 Demodulator Settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 211 S go2DECODE Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 159 CIS 36 Features CIS 36 50 General Information CIS 36 50 is a modem used by the Soviet navy This modem system is also known as BEE or T600 Usage Data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Number of tones Shif
12. Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 332 EEA Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 293 SS go2DECODE EIA General Information The EEA SelCal standard was defined by the Electronics Industries Association USA Usage Narrowband FM SelCal system in the VHF UHF frequency range Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation Multitone Table 333 EIA Characteristics 15 07 30 500 15 07 51 000 15 07 31 500 50 I AE nU TINO D VEG ETER A A eaten NER ies ae hat uut uon e zs j A Sa BN Acc oM a PE e 2000 175 1500 1250 1000 7o50 500 250 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 000 Hz Figure 282 EIA Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Analogue Selcall Tone duration ms Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s Min burst SNR dB 0 Table 334 EIA Demodulator Settings 294 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SN go2DECODE Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal s frequency range Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 335 ElA Features Euro General Information Euro is an SelCal supplement to the analog voice transmission capability which enables an operator to address his call to single subscribers or groups Usage
13. Demod Decod Extras Audio Se symbol rate 13 333 Bd SR tolerance 0 050 Bd E vost order Min burst length 0 600 s Max burst length 0 260 s 5 Min pause length 0 180 s 5 Figure 168 PSK data aided Parameters Demodulator Symbol rate 13 333 Bd B SR tolerance 0 050 Bd 2 ane No of channels 1 S aere poston npe Channel distance 6 667 Hz gt Adaptive equaliser El l 8 Min burst length 0 600 s Max burst length 0 260 s Figure 169 MDSPK 2 4 A B Parameters ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters e 147 S go2DECODE Demodulator MPSK 2 4 8 16 A B Multi PSK 2 4 8 or 16 order multi channel absolute phase shift keying OQPSK Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying ASK2PSK8 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation same parameters as with ASK4PSK8 QAM 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 16valent quadrature amplitude modulation 148 e ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters Additional Settings Control Demod Decod Extras Audio Symbol rate 13 333 Bd SR tolerance 0 050 Bd 5 odon order de Mo of channels L e cam poston pe Channel distance 6 667 Hz H Adaptive equaliser El Min burst length 0 600 s Max burst length 0 2505 E Figure 170 MSPK 2 4 8 A B Parameters contol Demod Symbol rate 13 333 Bd I SR tolerance 0 050 Bd Figure 171 OQPSK Parameters contol ened Demodulator ASK2PSKE Symbol
14. Figure 42 SDA Control Parameter Tab E EE Exras Edt addtional parameters in the active modem o Audio Parameters of the demodulator and gain control used by Audio Oupa Table 21 SDA Tabs The functions of these tabs are explained below Modem List Apart from the result display the modem list is the other way to display all modems It includes all mo dems that can be used in automatic production to identify the modem of a new signal To call the modem list activate the box Modem in the dropdown list Modem Baudot 2 Stopbit 50Bd 450Hz ARQ M4 242 192Bd 173Hz 0 ARQ M4 342 192Bd 400Hz ARO N ASCII 7 Bit 100Bd 173Bd ASCII 8 Bit 180Bd 500Hz AUTOSPEC Signal a Baudot sync 200Bd 850Hz Baudot async 50Bd 450Hz Baudot 2 Stopbit 50Bd 450Hz BULG ASCII 75Bd 510Hz Search range 500 Hz IF recording Signal Memory Start time 00 01 01 00 00 00 000 End time 00 01 01 00 00 00 000 5 Figure 43 Dropdown List Box Modem with Modem List Once the dropdown list is activated a text cursor will appear so that the name of the active modem can be edited On pressing the down control on the right the dropdown list will open showing the list of modems If the list includes a great number of modems a scrollbar will appear on the right Grab the slider of this scrollbar with your mouse cursor and slide downward to see the remaining part of the modem list Click the desired modem
15. Hz Y Detection Nominal frequency Hill Result display ola mm 2 B Es 7 Detection quali Centre frequency No Name Detection QDet QSig QSR Decod ES ty EE 009 ARQ M2 242 96Bd 430Hz none 50 99 0 amp no sync V Signal quality Offset 010 ARQ M2 342 96Bd 400Hz none 0 44 0 no sync E 011 ARQ M4 242 192Bd 173Hz none 7 88 05 SR quality Burst length 012 ARQ M4 342 192Bd 400Hz none OS 44 OS ees 013 ARQ N none 0 44 0 amp no sync Wight decodes EE 014 ASCII 7 Bit 100Bd 173Bd none 0 42 O no sync Y Decoder F Pitch le m H Decoder modified Dash dot ratio THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 E THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 V Symbol rate Y Start time THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 v Delete SM 2012 10 01 3 31 32 13 32 35 1800Hz SSS go2SIGNALS 4 n p Ready Status Bar Display Parameter Figure 38 Typical SDA Interface 38 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SN go2DECODE The SDA interface consists of four sections The left section contains all display windows currently open The right section features property sheets to view and edit the various parameters Each sheet consists of several tabs On the upper right is a sheet which serves to control the A
16. Point to point communication between stations in CIS Commonwealth of Independent States region Mode Properties Parameter Modulation FSK 00 EN Number oftones 2 EN 2 eum e Table 163 CIS 405 3915 Characteristics 15 05 01 000 15 05 01 500 15 08 02 000 15 05 02 500 15 05 03 000 100 2 1000 800 600 400 200 200 400 600 800 1000 Hz Figure 225 CIS 405 3915 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd Shift Hz 500 Shift tolerance Hz 214 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 T go2DECODE Parameter Default VER file name cis 405 3915 ver Table 164 CIS 405 3915 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 165 CIS 405 3915 Features CIS 8181 General Information CIS 8181 is a modem used by the Sovjet navy There is also a variant called CIS 8129 Usage Data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Modulation Number of tones Shift Hz Bandwidth Hz Symbol rate Baud Encryption Table 166 CIS 8181 Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 215 go2DECODE 15 05 02 000 15 05 02 500 15 05 03 000 15 05 03 500 15 05 04 000 emm leg t dBF5 o 50 100 10
17. Relative factor 2E Pause Autorange Peak hold Figure 57 Spectrum Sonagram Display Extras Tab Apart from the common color scheme options the lt Extras gt tab features the checkbox M Audio output freg This box is ticked by default to insert a cursor in the Spectrum Sonagram Display Drag this cursor to the desired frequency for audio output The current frequency value is displayed above the cursor 0 0 pn 4000 2000 oF e000 4000 4000 2000 O 2000 4000 Figure 58 Cursor for Selection of Audio Output Frequency Activate or deactivate this checkbox as required When reinserted the cursor appears at its previous posi tion To reset the frequency value to zero or any other value use the spin box Nominal frequency on the lt Audio gt tab of the property sheet Additionally the Extras tab has a group box Spectrum which is inactive unless the Z cursors are ena bled Specify whether you wish to display The spectrum usually averaged exponentially Normal he spectrum exactly at the position of Cursor1 At Cursor 1 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 63 SS go2DECODE The spectrum averaged between the two cursors Average value Cur 1 2 The group box Peak Hold is disabled until the button lt Peak Hold gt is selected The checkbox M Pause serves to freeze the current display after the period entered in the spin box Tim
18. The modem list includes all modems currently available as well as various additional parameters In detail these are 34 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 D go2 DECODE Search strategy Signal position Result threshold IF Saving mode Recording SNR The following functions are available to facilitate your work with modem lists Menu Item Function New modem list Create a new list with one modem as an example Load modem list Load one of the modem lists previously saved to a data medium dialog window is displayed for selection of a modem list Once the loading process has been completed the former modem list will be replaced by the new one Save modem list Save the current modem list to a data medium Save modem list as Save the current modem list to a data medium A dialog window is displayed where the file name for the modem list can be entered Import modem list Import a modem list as well as decoder files previously exported to a data medium A dialog window is displayed for selection of the modem list cma The modem list is loaded and the decoder files are copied to the folder code respectively Export modem list Export the modem list to a data medium The respective decoder files txt bin for all modems included in the modem list are exported as well Table 11 Modem List Menu ltems Window Menu ETT Help E Position all F4 HE Position all and
19. t dBF5 o 50 100 1000 500 600 400 200 00 400 600 aun 1000 Hz Figure 257 Piccolo MK6 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Multitone MFSK No oftones Je Tone position type Equidistant frequencies VER file name piccolo mk6 ver Table 259 Piccolo MK6 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 260 Piccolo MK6 Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 259 Q go2 DECODE Piccolo MK12 General Information The Piccolo modes were developed in the UK for communications between Great Britain and its embas sies and military stations all over the world They are similar to the French Coquelet modes Usage Transfer of textual information mostly encrypted over HF Mode Properties 15 06 37 500 15 06 35 000 15 06 36 500 15 06 39 000 15 06 39 500 dBF5 D 50 100 Demodulator Settings 260 e Standard Decoders HF Parameter Value Modulation Shift Hz Number of tones 20 300 20 Ex Bandwidth Hz 300 E Hz Symbol rate Bd Alphabet ITA 5 Table 261 Piccolo MK12 Characteristics 300 250 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Hz Figure 258 Piccolo MK12 Spectrogram Parameter Demodulator Tone duration ms
20. 0123456 e i ERAN Pause Autorange Peak hold Ready yg SM 2012 10 01 13 31 32 13 32 35 1800 Hz SD go2SIGNALS Figure 188 DANA SDA and APC with Signals from wav Files Calling go2DECODE DEMO will start three applications Use the options specific to your operating system to switch from one application to the other DANA Filtering and conversion of the input signal into digital IF APC Automatic recognition of modems whose parameters have been previously entered into the knowledge base SDA Result display for APC and user interface for monitoring and manual analysis of the digital IF On the next pages you will find 2 examples Example 1 Morse Signal by SOMO subject to the delivered version A Morse signal with a centre frequency of 4500 Hz is generated and played using the software modulation generator SOMO 158 e ANNEX 5 Examples User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 iil SOMO Spectrum Sonagram 08 30 38 500 08 30 39 000 08 30 39 500 08 30 40 000 08 30 40 500 08 30 41 000 08 30 41 500 08 30 42 000 08 30 42 500 na 3n 43 nnn dBFS ze 50 75 100 125 10000 20000 Hz c tu peat mee O Morse e ASKn Morse A Parameters Code Text Extras i Channel Left and Right v Level 20 00 dB Nominal frequency 4500 00 Keying Rate 200 00 et Nominal Frequency 3 4
21. 3 5 wm 45 5 5 60 65 70 75 8 e a 35 Hz Figure 125 Spectrum over the Envelope Curve Difference Magnitude of the FSK Signal The measuring accuracy can be increased by selecting a greater FFT length and by zooming in the range around 50 Hz using the X cursor Further you may select another procedure alternatively Enter 50 Hz as the Centre frequency and 80 Hz as the Frequency range on the Parameters tab The spectrum will display the frequency range between 10 Hz and 90 Hz Determine Symbol Rate by Measurement in Time Signal Another method is to measure the time interval between the symbols This requires a demodulation of the signal i e the appropriate modulation type must be known The symbol rate can be roughly estimated but the parameter value entered must be equal to or greater than the actual value oelect the demodulator to FSK 2 matched enter the measured shift and a symbol rate of 200 Bd inten tionally a greater value Select the display type Eye pattern display on the Display menu or the toolbar and the input signal Diff Magnitude Difference magnitude is an intermediate step in demodulation where the signal is demodulated still with out knowing the symbol rate However the individual data bits are visible as a result Therefore a rough pre selection of the symbol rate is required to prevent the demodulator from selecting too low a bandwidth for filtering and too low a scanning rate for the signal With stron
22. Extras Modem Moder List UM Spectrum Ctrl P EI Spectrum Sonagram Ctrl M BB Constellation display Ctrl I D i Eve pattern display Ctrl E Fan Time display Chrl 6 E Analysis display Ctrl D 999 Hell display Ctrl H 2 Bit display Ctrl B BM Result display Ctrl T w Toolbar v Displays v Control Figure 31 Display Menu 28 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Extras Menu Modem Modem List Windows Help Start Ctrl Enter Stop Ctrl 5pace b HV d Modem recognition Je Production Record demodulator output 6 De Audio out Signal source k L d Options Decoder Debugger DANA SOMO PMO Figure 32 Extras Menu This menu provides various control functions and settings Menu Item Function S 1l110 LLLI 3 Starts the signal processing mode of APC Additionally SDA receives the signal data from APC Step Stops the signal processing and the incoming signals from the APC Modem Starts and stops the automatic production mode of APC toggle function recognition Start the signal processing mode of APC by means of Start to view the production output in the Automat result display Once the automatic production mode has been started the control and modem parameters cannot be edited When the Automat is switched on and Start is activated the search of a modem from the mo dem lists is started i e the system searches for a modem that matc
23. Feature Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment yes Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 311 AlS Features CCIR General Information These SelCal standards are based on the CCIR Recommendations now ITU CCIR 1 CCIR 2 CCIR 7 and PCCIR CCIR 1 and CCIR 2 vary in the nominal tone duration Usage Narrowband FM SelCal system in the VHF UHF frequency range Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation Multitone Table 312 CCIR Characteristics 284 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SN go2DECODE 15 07 24 500 15 07 25 000 15 07 25 500 15 07 26 000 15 07 26 500 dBF5 Hz Figure 275 CCIR Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Tone duration ms TD tolerance ms Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s Min burst SNR dB Table 313 CCIR Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal s frequency range Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 314 CCIR Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 285 S go2 DECODE CCITT General Information This SelCal standards is based on an CCITT Recommendation now ITU for tone based selective calling Usage Narrowband FM SelCal system in the VHF UHF frequency range Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation Mult
24. Figure 18 Configuration and Installation src 16 Figure 19 Application Installation ati 16 Figure 20 Installation ComplellOl ai 17 Figure 21 Start UIST E Le E 18 Figure 22 Uninstallation Confirmation cccccccccsssseceeceeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeseeeceeessaaseeeeesseaeeeeeessageeeeeeeas 18 Figure 29 Status MCSSAG redene 18 Figure 24 Signal SUT ES aa iii 19 Figure 25 Sian DEP een 21 Figure 26 SDA User Interface with DANA 23 Figure 27 Modem Parameter Setting lessen nennen nnne nnns nna nnn nnn 25 Figure 28 SDA M nu sage eters scenic cet enenu ane SE ee sneaeiciescnss seein EEAS EEEN EE EEE EAEE EENAA ERASE 27 FOUE IER MO EE 27 a p Ed MSN scada o da 28 FJ DER Mont ee 28 FONE SOE EEE oa 29 AE MN 34 Figure 34 Modem List Menu rerrrnnnnnrnnrrnnnnrrnnrnnnnnrevnnnnnnnrvnnnnnnsnsennnnnnsnsnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnssennnnnnssennnnnnsnnennnnnnsnssnn 34 Figure 35 Window MEN M EEE 35 FOUS C AoD EEN 36 Figure RR Ee e EE 36 Figure 38 Typical SDA Interface nnnoannenennnneannnonnnnnsannnsrnrrrsnnrrsrnrrrsnrennnnrrrsnrrrsnnrrrsnrrestntrrsnrrennnrernnnnnn ne 38 Figure 39 APC RAUL DENN andara need 39 Figure 40 SDA Selection of Result Production sees 40 Figure 41 SPA Dialog Extras EE 42 Figure 42 SDA Control Parameter ccccnccccoccnnnccnnnccononononennnnnononononnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrennnnnnnonnnans 43 Figure 43 Dropdown List Box Modem with Modem ei 43 User Man
25. Finish to complete Setup Figure 13 WibuKey Installation Completion In this last dialog specify whether or not you wish to read the help file now by means of the check box and click lt Finish gt Setup is finished Welcome to the WibuKey User Help Runtime Kit Version Figure 14 Help Manual with Installation Complete Now select lt OK gt to close the setup On the next dialog box specify the target directory in which to install go2DECODE and indicate whether to install the demo signals provided recommended 14 e Installation of the Program User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Select installation folder To install in the folder chosen please dick Next To choose another installation folder please dick Browse Location C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Copy demo signals Demo signals 300 MB The installation can take a long time Cs mete Leg Figure 15 Choose the Location for the Installation Strike lt Next gt to continue The following dialog box is shown The Setup Assistant is ready to begin the installation Click Install to begin the installation If you want to review or change any of your installation settings dick Back Click Cancel to exit the Setup Assistant Create shortcuts Desktop shortcut Quick launch Figure 16 Setup Assistant Ready The check boxes are set to their default values and can be deactivated if de
26. OP 208 GE E 209 Bt TEE 211 CIS 36 50 SA 212 CIS 405 3915 A 214 SEE ME 215 ENVER 216 Clover 2000 218 aa cen rer 220 Codan SOIC WEE 222 TH PP en 224 SA 225 OC ONO Meme A 227 DO PO SG 228 o OPA 229 DUP AR SG 231 FEN 232 PS 400 500 E 233 Globe Wireless Ek 235 Globe Wireless Dh 236 Cape e 238 gig MT NoBo9a 239 elle EEN 241 MM 242 jjszisp 243 MEN 244 MFR 246 Miel RR ER 247 ME 248 SEE ES EE 250 PRETO a seas 251 PACTORIFE a m 253 PRETO Misa 254 PASTORILEES 2 255 PAC TOR II e m 257 PER EE 258 Peck 2 on ciao re m 260 POLAR tao olaaa 261 PM 262 FRAM 264 Pk lue 265 RUM FEC EE 266 A oT 268 p mm B ERREUR 269 STORA E 271 TORP ele 272 vl AE 274 SPREAD SL 275 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE VE e NEE 276 TPWINPEE 4 278 il p E 279 Standard Decoders VHF UHF 281 VEN 281 Available DSC OC CUS Lee 281 ACARS VHF EN 281 LEE 283 ON 284 7 H PE EE PH 286 Ee decades 287 Bm 288 OPNP ERREUR 290 Bo PME 291 EE 292 Elte 294 E Oa ee 295 FE Le 296 ENS Bs 298 GOla Fagel redet 299 MPTI dd 301 NATE adds 302 A EE 304 Pl 305 KAN 306 Terapi T
27. The display shows the time on the X axis The time 0 is the start of the signal section Depending on the input signal selected either the amplitude the phase or the frequency Hz will be displayed on the Y axis The eye pattern display provides an overview of the course of the signal during the time curve and serves to monitor the signal symbol rate which is reconstructed by the demodulator The values of time ampli tude phase and frequency can be measured using cursors If several signal sections are drawn in synchronization one above the other by the symbol rate generated in the demodulator eyes will be formed The opening in the interior of the eye pattern indicates the quali ty of the demodulators or of the signal Parameter Setting The parameters of the eye pattern display can be displayed by activating the tab lt Parameters gt Eye pattern display Parameters Cursor Extras Channel number 1 Input signal Filtered diff mag Start time 0 000 ms Time period 10 000 ms Max amplitude 1 00000 Min amplitude 1 00000 4 Centre frequent 0 000 Hz Freque ange 25000 000 Hz ax phase 180 000 phase 180 000 Display type Eye pattern display Number of vectors 205 Pause Figure 67 Eye Pattern Display Parameters Tab The following parameters are available 70 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 OD go2DECODE Parameter
28. and provided the search is carried out with the Auto mat nominal frequency or search range note that the shift will in addition to the demodulator measure ment be measured automatically if the tolerance value entered is greater than half the shift value or greater than 1 2 symbol rate The measuring result is sent to the demodulator si Result display Pe Dee eee foe erm Tur Jones om sn nee te sient vete pas E nome 86 3 3 59 sno smc No 31 8 B otm bi man ieSPa UUHs meme 20 38 4 0 mo sync Mo 169 2 Bd 480 7 Ha 152m bu sry mem aen 29 4 3 mo aye e 95 7 Bd 246 0 Hs 07m bas lerrora zooan meme og 4 nome e 4 vom oom bs forame sr mma og 4 e 4 90H oo Rs bs swea ane 10088740082 mone Li 100 4 0 sao sync Me 190 0 Ed 48 0 Hs 0 1 mm 053 Katie 115 170 515 mone o J me sync e oon oom Figure 127 Result Display The Measuring Values of the Demodulator are shown in this table The measuring values of the active demodulator are highlighted in green in the result display Display menu or toolbar The symbol rate and shift values can be read out directly from this table To be on the safe side verify the quality of the signal QSig and the symbol rate QSR Values of less than 50 indicate either a severe distortion of the signal selection of an inappropriate demodulator or in adequate parameter settings all of which may cause a bad result Another method to verify whether the demodulator
29. go2DECODE Spectrum Sonagram 1 Cursor X Cursor CH Y Cursor El Cursor een sp X Cursor Y Cursor Cursor1 12 000 00 Hz 120 00 dB Cursor2 12 000 00 Hz 120 00 dB Difference 2 000 00 Hz 0 00 dB Inv diff 0 04167 ms Cursor Cursor 1 Cursor2 00 00 00 000 Difference Inv diff Figure 117 Cursor Tab on Display Property Sheet Two cursors red and green will appear in the sonagram Both can be freely positioned using the mouse Position one cursor each on either side of the signal next press the button In on the Extras tab to obtain an enlarged view of the section delimited by the cursors Repeat this process until the spectrum ar ea displayed is satisfactory 200 OG 1500 001 lt 3102 272 gt 1602 272 Figure 118 Two Cursors Positioned Around the Relevant Spectrum Area The spectrum sonagram now should resemble the display in the following figure 12 45 08 000 12 45 08 500 12 45 09 000 12 45 09 500 12 45 10 000 dBFS ge em 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 0 500 om em 200 250 3000 A 3597 1 5958 2 3361 22 Figure 119 The Enlarged Spectrum has a Low Resolution FFT Length 512 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Manual Analysis of Unknown Signals e 109 D go2DECODE To improve the frequency resolution increase the FFT length on the lt Parameters gt tab exemplary val ues 2048 4096 or 8192 As expected this is a
30. 000 15 06 47 500 15 06 48 000 15 06 48 500 15 06 49 000 k dBFS 50 100 4 LJ 1000 800 600 400 200 200 400 600 800 1000 Hz Figure 242 G TOR Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Symbol rate Bd 5 2 SR tolerance Bd BR Modulation order 2 Shit He Shift tolerance Hz Min burst length s 238 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Parameter Default Max burst length s 2 000 Min pause length s 0 080 VER file name g tor_300bd_180hz ver Table 214 G TOR Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 215 G TOR Features HFDL General Information The High Frequency Data Link HFDL ARINC Report 635 3 is used in civil long distance aircraft commu nications between aircrafts and a cluster of ground stations Usage Aeronautical information exchange over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Bandwidth Hz 400 Symbol rate Bd 1800 ARO Data rate bps 300 600 1200 1800 Table 216 HFDL Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 239 D go2 DECODE 15 05 43 000 15 05 43 500 15 05 49 000 15 05 49 500 15 05 50 000 dEF5 D 50 100 2000 1
31. 248 MENN 249 Packet 300 SPE 00 E 250 PARTANE 252 PAGTOR I FEG JANNE 253 FARS OM EE LTEM 255 PAGTOR I PEG Sel AII ss rta 256 PAG TOR Ill eege E mE 257 Piccolo MK6 Spectrogram ooccccccccooccnncccconcconcnononcnnnnnononnnnnnnonannnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnonnnrnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnanennnns 259 PICCOLO MK12 Spectrogram ocio ra di atari E UR GA Rd 260 POL ARQ SCC NO QIN m 262 ge geet ee MT 263 PSK10 AM Spectrogram ccccccscesseccccccceeneeessccseeeeesccuensceesscusneeeesscuseneeeseceseesenscceseesenses 264 PIT 266 RUE SN 267 EE 268 Sl PES NNN 270 METT 271 Pie B SCC HOC EEE EEE EE 273 SP14 Spectrogram m caccaccsessanshnareescdsagsdasenedcencsesadansbeesdetedasasdasdeadeetedesndeatbneticeaedeauchessecdeceuee 274 SPREAD 51 Seco iia UU T 276 SWED ARQ Spectrogram ccccccccssssesecceeeeeeeeesseeceeeeeseeaueeeeeeeeesseeeuseeeceeeesseuaaaseeeeeeesssaaaaeees 277 TWINPLEX Spectrogram EE 278 Vissel SpectograM TERT 280 ACARS VHF Spec in mm 282 MN 283 aio A AP T i 285 List of Figures e 329 SS Figure 276 Figure 277 Figure 278 Figure 279 Figure 280 Figure 281 Figure 282 Figure 283 Figure 284 Figure 285 Figure 286 Figure 287 Figure 288 Figure 289 Figure 290 Figure 291 Figure 292 Figure 293 Figure 294 Figure 295 go2DECODE TANNER 286 CEOS Pe EO PP A 287 Bi PP EE EE AE 289 TEEN 290 BE GR let ee MR TT TT 291 FEN
32. 266 Figure 267 Figure 268 Figure 269 Figure 270 Figure 271 Figure 272 Figure 273 Figure 274 Figure 275 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE FS NN 204 GOE 6510 1010 A EE A 205 e esee ci PE A 207 rd accen ee enu tende Doe EEE A 208 GE 0 de OI EE 210 o EE 211 eN ie AA o 213 aio ecos AAA A er 214 ENN CWO OMe A o an 216 TOV CFT SOC dee EEE EE 217 Clover 2000 Spectrogram nnnnnsaennneosennnnesranrrnorrnrrrrsrnrtreosnnrrrrrnrrrrosnntrrrsnnnrressnnrrrrnnnnerenne 219 Godan 3012 ALE Spectrogram ccccccccsseecceccceseeecescceseeeeesccsseceeescossneeeesccseeeessccseeeesssccess 221 Codan 3012 Data Spectrogram cccccccsssscccccceeseeeeecseeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeseuaeeeeesauaueeeeesaaageeeeesaaaaes 221 Codan Selcal Spectrogram cccccsssscccccceeeeeccecceeneeccecceeeeececeeeegeeeeessuaeeeeesseaueeeeesseneeeeeseaaaass 223 Coquelet 8 Gpechogram 224 Coquelet 13 Gpechogram AEN TTNA EA OA RENESA Ania 226 Coquelet 80 Gpechogram 227 DEP STN 228 SG PR Nene 230 B O A EE 231 FE NNN 233 FSK 400 500 Spectrogram ccccccessecceccccseeecesscceeseeescceseeecesscaeeceecccaseneeeseceseneeesccedeesenses 234 Globe Wireless FSK Spectrogram lessen nnne nnns 235 Globe Wireless PSK Gpechrogram 237 TR PQ 238 PEDE SPECTO IEEE TETTE 240 ANG FEG o A o 241 MD674 Gpechogram 242 aso pio a 244 MFSK8 Spectrogram MM 245 MFSK16 SpectiogramM EE 246 Morse e dee Lu
33. 308 AD a 309 VOL Z IO A IS 310 ATA e E 312 A SS 313 Appendix 315 E O SE e POC o m 315 ollo d Le OO Tm e PO E E 316 Conditions Of Sala EEE EE 316 Glossary of Terms 319 List of Figures 325 List of Tables 331 Index 338 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Contents e vii SS go2DECODE General Welcome to go2DECODE go2DECODE is an extremely efficient software product whose major functions are to recognize modems and to analyze signals in various fields of reconnaissance Modems as combinations of demodulator and decoder are the central items in the automatic recognition process The analysts knowledge and experience are employed to compile modems and modem lists for automat ic recognition i e the system is knowledge based software Go2DECODE provides numerous functions such as Modem identification Demodulation and decoding of detected modems Technical analysis of communication signals Receiving and recording of emissions Monitoring of specific frequencies Monitoring of communication networks This wide range of functions makes it a powerful tool for a great variety of applications Since this ap proach is based on profound knowledge go2DECODE allows for fully automated identification and pro duction of modems which are included into the system by the user only once This provides optimum relief to the operator in the daily routine with minimum initial effort The close link betw
34. 36 93 121 Training 129 Tuning 178 180 181 183 184 186 188 189 191 192 194 195 197 198 200 201 203 204 206 207 209 210 212 213 215 216 218 219 222 223 225 226 228 229 230 232 233 234 236 237 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 OD go2DECODE 239 240 242 243 244 245 247 248 249 251 252 254 255 256 258 259 261 262 263 265 266 267 269 270 2 2 273 2 5 276 277 279 280 282 284 285 287 288 289 292 293 295 296 297 299 300 302 303 304 306 307 309 310 311 313 314 TWINPLEX 278 U UHF 321 Uninstallation 18 Using Receivers of the IZT R3000 Family 154 Using Rohde amp Schwarz ESMB Receivers 153 V VDEW 309 VDL 2 310 VDL 3 312 Version History 177 281 VHF 322 Visel 279 Vocoder 289 W Welcome to go2DECODE 1 Window Menu 35 X XSLT 322 Z ZVEI 313 Index e 341
35. 400 Bandwidth Hz 600 800 Symbol rate Bd 96 200 Alphabet ITA 3 Table 115 ARQ M2 342 Characteristics 15 05 27 500 15 05 25 000 15 05 26 500 15 05 29 000 15 05 29 500 4 F dBFS 0 50 100 n 1000 DU 600 400 200 200 400 600 DUU 1000 He Figure 209 ARQ M2 342 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Symbol rate Bd SR tolerance Bd Shift Hz Shift tolerance Hz ES VER file name arq m2 342 96bd_400hz ver Table 116 ARQ M2 342 Demodulator Settings 190 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 117 ARQ M2 342 Features ARQ M4 242 General Information ARQ M4 242 is a synchronous full duplex time division multiplex system designed for low error rate ex change of textual data between two stations of governmental authorities Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones Shit a Bandwidth Hz 400 Symbol rate Bd Alphabet ITA 3 Table 118 ARQ M4 242 Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 191 goe DECODE 15 05 45 000 15 05 45 500 15 05 46 000 15 05 46 500 15 05 47 000 d aT F deFS a 50 100 1000 DU 600 400 200 00 400 60
36. 500 15 05 07 000 dBF5 100 Demodulator Settings Tuning D go2 DECODE 400 200 n 200 400 600 800 1000 Hz Figure 220 CIS 11 Spectrogram Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 3 4 discr Symbol rate Bd SH tolerance Bd 5 Modulation order Shift Hz Shift tolerance Hz 10 Table 149 CIS 11 Demodulator Settings The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 150 CIS 11 Features Standard Decoders HF e 207 SS go2DECODE CIS 12 General Information CIS 12 is a Soviet military multi channel modem It features scrambled voice or data communication at a maximum data rate of 4800 bits sec This modem system is also known as MS5 and FIRE Usage Data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation Multi channel PSK2 PSK4 Number of channels 2 Channel spacing Hz 200 Symbol rate Baud 120 Pilot tone Hz 3300 Table 151 CIS 12 Characteristics 15 05 30 500 15 05 31 000 15 05 31 500 15 05 32 000 15 05 32 500 dBF5 i co S E AE ett Set Sr eret ed AL LA Ae Pac mW E 100 3 2000 1750 1500 1250 i000 750 500 250 0 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 Hz Figure 221 CIS 12 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demod
37. AMD Pentium 4 or Intel Core 2 Duo or equivalent AMD Clock rate gt 2 8 GHZ gt 1 8 GHZ Hard disk space for programs 700 MBytes 50 MBytes Hard disk space for IF storage gt 4 GBytes 4 GBytes Sound device Full duplex 16 bit sound Card with 16 bit sound card sample rate gt 96 kHz with Stereo with sample rate gt 44 1 kHz Mixer input 1600 x 1200 with 24 or 32 bits 1280 x 1024 with 16 bits Table 3 System Requirements Copy Protection go2DECODE is secured by a copy protection This protection is either linked directly to a specific comput er or it is based on a dongle In the latter case which is the standard a license file is required which en ables certain features depending on the functionality chosen for the system Installation varies slightly depending on the version you install and the Setup Assistant will guide you through the respective steps Dongle Version In the dongle version of go2DECODE the software will not run until a dongle USB WIBU Key is con nected to the port and the respective hardware drivers have been installed The dongle is supplied with the software User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Installation of the Program e 9 S goaDECODE Figure 2 Dongle Version Installation Make sure the WIBU Key is not yet connected to the USB port of your computer Subsequently insert go2DECODE CD into the CD ROM drive Setup will start automatically otherwise start the file setup exe from th
38. Autorange analyzes approx 12 spectral lines The display is adapted on every change of the range On pressing lt Autorange gt again this process will be deactivated toggle lt Peak hold gt On activation of Peak Hold the maximum energies in the spectrum are recorded and dis played as a red curve Table 38 Spectrum Display Parameters Parameters Cursor Setting The cursor parameters are displayed by activating the lt Cursor gt tab of the respective display You can thus insert cursors into the display which serve to select or clarify specific display sections or measure the signal data The lt Cursor gt tab shows the coordinates of the individual cursor positions in editable spin boxes User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 67 go2DECODE spectrum E X Cursor E Cursor Harmonic Delta Number X Cursor Y Cursor Cursor 1 12 000 00 Hz gt 40 00 dB Cursor2 12 000 00 Hz 100 00 dB Differenc 24 000 00 Hz 60 00 dB Inv diff Zoom in Zoom out n Peak hold Figure 63 Spectrum Display Cursor Tab The following parameters are available Parameter Function The cursors are activated deactivated in X direction They are used to measure values of time Y X Y Cursors The cursors are activated deactivated in Y direction They are used to measure the values on the Y axis which vary from display to display i e phase frequency etc wl Harmo
39. Bd 100 per channel Coding Convolutional FEC code Table 255 PACTOR III Characteristics dBFS D 50 100 11 19 42 500 11 19 43 000 11 19 43 500 11 19 44 000 11 19 44 San 4 b 1000 a00 600 400 200 200 400 DUU DUU 1000 He Figure 256 PACTOR III Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Pactor Ill Min burst length s 0 300 Max burst length s 3 400 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 257 go2DECODE Parameter Default Min pause length s 0 035 Min burst SNR dB 0 Table 256 PACTOR II Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Recognition Automatic Polarity Adjustment yes Combination with other modems modem list es Table 257 PACTOR III Features Piccolo MK6 General Information The Piccolo modes were developed in the UK for communications between Great Britain and its embas sies and military stations all over the world They are similar to the French Coquelet modes Usage Transfer of textual information mostly encrypted over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones e Shift Hz Bandwidth Hz Table 258 Piccolo MK6 Characteristics 258 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 goaDECODE 15 06 19 500 15 06 20 000 15 06 20 500 15 06 21 000 15 06 21 500 4
40. Bd 1200 SR tolerance Bd Shift Hz Modulation order Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 291 go2DECODE Parameter Default Shift tolerance Hz Min burst length s 0 300 Max burst length s 0 600 Min pause length s 0 100 Table 328 DSC VHF Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment VHF yes Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 329 DSC Features EEA General Information The EEA SelCal standard was defined by the Electronic Engineering Association UK Usage Narrowband FM SelCal system in the VHF UHF frequency range Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation Multitone Table 330 EEA Characteristics 292 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SS go2DECODE 15 07 32 000 15 07 32 500 15 07 33 000 15 07 35 500 15 07 34 000 deFs O wm 2000 1500 1250 1000 750 500 250 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 Hz 1750 Figure 281 EEA Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Tone duration ms TD tolerance ms Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s Min burst SNR dB 0 Table 331 EEA Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal s frequency range Status Feature Status Demodulation
41. Characherstce CIS 11 Demodulator Settings ETF CGIG 12Characherstce CIS 12 Demodulator Settings CIS 12 FO AUTOS acarrean CIG 214Characherstce CIS 14 Demodulator Settings CIS 14 FeatureS oooccconononononononanononaronnararonarnononoso CIS 36 Characteristics ccooonccncoonnnncooonnnnnonnnnnos CIS 36 Demodulator Settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE List of Tables e 333 SS Table 159 Table 160 Table 161 Table 162 Table 163 Table 164 Table 165 Table 166 Table 167 Table 168 Table 169 Table 170 Table 171 Table 172 Table 173 Table 174 Table 175 Table 176 Table 177 Table 178 Table 179 Table 180 Table 181 Table 182 Table 183 Table 184 Table 185 Table 186 Table 187 Table 188 Table 189 Table 190 Table 191 Table 192 Table 193 Table 194 Table 195 Table 196 Table 197 Table 198 Table 199 Table 200 Table 201 Table 202 Table 203 Table 204 Table 205 Table 206 Table 207 Table 208 Table 209 Table 210 Table 211 Table 212 Table 213 Table 214 Table 215 go2DECODE GS EEE EE EE EE ET 212 8 ei 212 CIS 36 50 Demodulator Settings cccccceseeccescceseeceecccseeeeesccesenecessceseeeeescceseeeeesecseeesenses 213 A A A 213 15 405 3915 NNN 214 CIS 405 3915 Demodulator Settings 00nnnn000nnnnnneannnnonennnennnnnnrennnnnnensrnrrresnnrereosrnrrrrsenrerenne 215 GN FE dU 1 ene e E EE 215 PNAN 215 CIS 8181 Demodulator
42. Cursor 01 01 00 00 00 00 000 01 01 00 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 000 100 000 000 000 Hz Figure 123 Cursor Tab on the Display Property Sheet The distance between two adjacent cursors is 0 020 s Drag these cursors to create a grid on the frequency changes The distance between two cursors must exactly coincide with the shortest recognizable time as shown in the following figure User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Manual Analysis of Unknown Signals e 111 S go2 DECODE Figure 124 Frequency Response Characteristics with Grid Overlay The frequency changes are now integrated into a grid The shortest time is located exactly between the two cursors and corresponds to one bit Read out the distance between two adjacent cursors from the cursor positions on the X axis or on the property sheet According to the formula SR 1 Tp the symbol rate then is 50 Bd In the next step return to the standard display without cursors and deactivate the button lt Pause gt on the property sheet Please note The display will not be updated while set to lt Pause gt However this will not affect the inter nal processing and the display in other windows To suspend all processes currently active click the but ton lt Stop gt on the lt Control gt tab on the property sheet Determine Symbol Rate by Spectrum via Envelope Depending on the modulation type typically with ASK FSK QAM and many others changes of symbols frequently coincide wi
43. Detection quality of modem Quality of signal Quality of reproduced symbol rate of a modem Weighting of decoder Status of decoder Decoder not detected Decoder has detected modem characteristics in the data stream Decoder has been detected Modem has been detected Decoder runtime error NO Sync Identified Accepted Sync Error DMM Decoder Modifies Mo dem This column indicates whether the modem has been modified by the decoder or not Symbol Rate Measured symbol rate speed at which the signal is transmitted or keying rate number of characters per minute with Morse modems Measured Shift Measured shift interval between the lowest and the highest frequency Hz in an FSK mo dem Nominal Offset Centre Offset Burst Length Interval to the nominal frequency as opposed to centre frequency Offset interval to centre frequency of the signal Length of burst Burst signals only exist for a period defined based on the burst length Transmission mode in a speech modem USB One Side Band Upper side band LSB One Side Band Lower side band DSB Double Side Band Amplitude modulation FM Frequency modulation Dash Dot Ratio Scanning rate dash to dot rate in a Morse modem Duration Period during which the signal was detected O OoOO o Table 17 SDA Parameter Settings Voice The following options are available Parameter Function Channel Number This option serves to display th
44. Eye Pattern Display Extras Tab 73 EEE REE M 74 Figure 71 Analysis Display Parameter Tab 74 Figure 72 Analysis Display Cursor Tab 76 Figure 73 Analysis Display Extras Tab 77 Figure 74 Constellation Display ccoooccnnnccnnncccconononcconnnononononnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnans 78 Figure 75 Constellation Display Parameter Tab 78 Figure 76 Constellation Display Cursor Tab 79 Figure 77 Constellation Display Extras Tab 80 Foure HUD E s 81 Figure 79 Hell Display Parameters Tab E 81 Figure 80 Hell Display Cursor Tab 82 Figure 81 Hell Display Extras barne enden 83 Hess BS E e nee cia PO E PO OEA 84 Figure 83 Bit Display Parameters Tab 85 Figure 84 Bit Display Highlight Tab 86 Figure 85 Bit Display PS TaD Lassen iii ia 87 Figure SG Funcional DANA ronca id ESTEE EE ciaci n 89 Figure o7 ALO DANA 90 Figure 909 DANA Usor IMS ACE EE 91 FOUG OF MONU BaT EE 91 FOUS I FIE MSI rica ri E E AE 92 FEN GEN 92 FOUS 92 MONU EE EEE EE ia 92 FOE 93 MEAT AS araucanos 93 Figure 94 DANA Worm 93 Figure 95 Input Signal with Filter Range 5 10 KHZ ooccccncccnnccnncccnoncconccononncononononnnonononancnnnononanenononnnanennnos 95 Figure 96 Output Signal with Filter Range and IF Center Frequency 8 KHZ rrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnn
45. F7B mode Adaptive Equalizer Audio in file Burst mode Channel1 abs phase Channel1 diff phase Channel distance Channel position type Constellation Distance F1 lt gt F2 Distance F2 lt gt F3 Distance F3 lt ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters e 137 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE moe le e fe fe JP TT LLLI GT TITT eT Hh Wm HAH H TI IT edd ee eee eos ono eee eee Vo 9 WW 9 EH EM M M N RW am aa uu EN BM EN LM EM M BM OE EEE 1 vo PP PPT dee FP TITT a ie e je je fe fe sis J del dee 0 ie ie efe lo fe ee CITT KNEE O lede jo le elo eee tt ed 0 jeje efe fe eree CITT adm le e ele fe FTP dee te o 0 po eel pp ppp Table 85 Demodulator Parameter Combinations with Signal Types dl Hh EEE REDERE EN EN NM ON GE HEN NN 9 EN EH MON WW EEE i WM 11 PPT TT ee i eu NN NM NN NN S EM EN NE NM NM OM EM EN NH gH c o o o o o o O o ab c d Q nmm gt o o gt gt q Lo o t tos5 ov EM eee E E x o S 9g S di DENK 4 O m ea 2 S c 5 5 S G ei o aZ cls olslecis O EN c ES Sea c SE S Ee E Silel ei e Q c E O JEF c sch o o ER oa an e ei m 3 0 0 eE 0 D O o OE o u 2 oolok o o CG on eee d D l Sle 9 og E 9 EICcZIES 9 co o o 2 9zZ Eo 20 2 E RO o E 02 0 0c 0 e W oa o 2e gt 6 gt 62 605 0 02 9 o 0 2 UL BEelEaositle Be H 2 2
46. Figure 267 SITOR B Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd 100 SR tolerance Bd Shift Hz Shift tolerance Hz VER file name sitor b 100bd 400hz ver Table 289 SITOR B Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 290 SITOR B Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 273 SP14 General Information go2DECODE This standard is a system with 14 tones where only 13 tones are used The carrier is AM modulated with a secondary MFSK modulation for the data SP 14 is equivalent to NUM 13 Usage Transmission of numeric codes Mode Properties 15 07 14 000 15 07 14 500 15 07 15 000 15 07 15 500 15 07 16 000 dBFS 100 Demodulator Settings 274 e Standard Decoders HF Parameter Modulation primary secondary Number of tones Tone length ms Tone spacing Hz Bandwidth Hz Symbol rate Bd Coding Table 291 SP1 Value AM MFSK 14 4 Characteristics 300 250 200 150 100 50 50 100 150 200 250 500 350 400 450 500 Hz Figure 268 SP14 Spectrogram Parameter Demodulator Tone duration ms ms TD tolerance Tone position type Default Multitone MFSK 133 5 Equidistant frequencies Us
47. Function Channel number There are signals which consist of several signal parts e g the input signal channel in an MFSK2 modem By using the channel number the channels of such signals can be select ed as the input signal Use this parameter to select the input signal of the display If automatic production is active only the input IF will be enabled While setting the parameters of the demodulator it may occur that a previously selected input signal is no longer available In this case the selec tion no signal will be displayed Stattime The period of time to be viewed is set in combination with the time period Time period The period of time to be viewed is set in combination with the start time A zoom thus can be set manually Max amplitude Definition of the amplitude range of the eye pattern display The maximum amplitude is the upper end of the section This parameter is not available if Freq Freq filtered or Phase has been selected as the input signal Min amplitude Definition of the amplitude range of the eye pattern display The minimum amplitude is the lower end of the section This parameter is not available if Freq Filtered Frequency or Phase has been selected as the input signal Centre frequency The frequency section to be viewed is set in combination with the frequency range The centre frequency is the centre of the section This parameter is not available unless Freq Filtered Frequency or Phase has
48. Hz EE IF from WAV file Start frequency 4000 000 Hz 7 Mirror End frequency 5 000 000 Hz Time source T go2sIGNALS Figure 190 Input Signal in DANA with Filter Range 3 6 kHz and Output Shift User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 5 Examples e 159 go2DECODE File Edit Display Extras Modem ModemList Windows Help pala ae D xl Tl Spectrum Sonagram IF input Channel 1 z Z j Modem viorse 125 200 R E Control Demod Decod Extras Audio 14 40 03 500 14 40 04 000 14 40 04 500 14 40 05 000 0 0000000 ders 100 1000 800 600 400 200 o 200 400 600 800 1000 REA Modem Ei Hz Parameters Extras i Result Modem Recognition B D x IV Nominal frequency me mwm ees sr mare nemine ame Detection omet asia 038 HFDL none 48 88 4 011 ARQ M4 342 192bd 400Hz none OW 35 0 046 Pactor none 59 38 77 041 no sync 1802 3 Bd 0 0 Hz Centre frequency 191 4 Bd 0 0 Hz no sync 197 8 Bd 0 0 Hz 8 P P IV Burst length 035 Globe Wireless PSK none 45 76 O Sino sync 203 9 Bd 0 0 Hz 016 Baudot 1 Stopbit 200Bd 850Hz none 0 35 O ino sync 199 8 Bd 0 0 Hz Voice 004 ARQ6 90 98 200Bd 400Hz none 29 34 O no sync 196 0 Bd 0 0 Hz 031 DGPS MSK 200Bd none 52 10 46 no sync 199 8 Bd 0 0 Hz Pitch 037 HC ARQ 240Bd 190Hz none o 35 0 Sino sync 240 0 0 0
49. Hz 040 erod 266 none oa 34 o no sync 265 6 0 0 Hz v I Dash dot ratio v Start time IV Duration IV Lack time 26 07 12 14 39 26 047 search end E789 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 012345 m Pause Delete E 26 07 2012 14 39 05 14 40 04 12 500 Hz E Le Figure 191 Signal in SDA Processed by APC Example 2 A USB speech signal is played and processed directly by DANA In this example the signal is not fil tered but it is shifted by 4800 Hz 160 e ANNEX 5 Examples User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE E DANA C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 examples dana De pr File Control Extras Help 8 re P m M sess x dBFS 0 p5 n 50 75 100 125 150 wu 0 2500 5000 7500 10000 12500 15000 17500 20000 Hz Predefined frequencies B l No predefing d frequencies v Input filter Output signal Remove DC Frequency 04300 000 Hz IF from WAV file Start frequency 0 000 Hz Mirror End frequency 12 500 000 Hz Time source System clock 1 1 1 C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo rum fec pink C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo sitor_a pink j Up C Progr m Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3
50. Initial Configuration Features of PMO Start go2DECODE by clicking the executable file pmo exe in the respective program directory or click the link on your desktop if any Please note that if DANA is not running yet it will be started along with PMO The following dialog window is displayed 102 e PMO Production Memory Observer User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 D go2 DECODE In x File Help Production Memory c Amen prod Directory Date 2007 03 23 sl AF recording IF recordings Production results Start time Length s 000 Emission 05 27 25 062847 2 t 20070326 052725 677 4294967295 ZF 05 27 25 05 27 47 22 i 007 Emission 10 20 39 16 20070320 102024 275 DDDDODODOD zF10 20 24 102039 16 Production memory c mem prod E Figure 109 PMO User Interface Select the desired date in the drop down list box Directory Date on the top right The production results and recordings for this date are then shown in a tree structure on the three tabs lt AF recordings gt lt IF re cordings gt and lt Production results gt All files belonging to the same emission are stored in one folder The recording time limit is configurable APC configuration file apc conf and the folders XXX Emission may therefore contain several files The tab lt AF recordings gt shows the audio files wav files of the emission These files are played back using the media player specified in the PMO configuration file The
51. M4 342 Demodulator Settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 193 go2DECODE Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment yes Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 123 ARQ M4 342 Features ARQ N General Information ARQ E is a synchronous dual channel ARQ mode This system was used by Italian diplomatic services Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones Shift Hz 850 Symbol rate Bd NN ARO Repetition cycles char Table 124 ARQ N Characteristics 194 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 D go2 DECODE 15 06 12 500 15 06 13 000 15 06 13 500 15 06 14 000 15 06 14 500 4 i n F dBF 50 100 1000 A00 00 400 200 200 400 600 600 1000 He Figure 212 ARQ N Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd 96 Shit Hz Shift tolerance Hz Table 125 ARQ N Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 126 ARQ N Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 195 D go2 DECODE ASCII 7 Bit General Information The American Standard Code for Informatio
52. NNN 293 EIA TN 294 EUO ope del 295 FLEXODEC ON EE 297 FNS BOS Se WOON fil RR T 298 Golay Pager Spectrogram rrrrnnnnrvnrnnnnnnrvvvrnnnnnrvnnrnnnnnsvnnnnnnnnsrnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnsrnnnnnnnssennnnnsssennnnnn 300 MP ESTE ge dree ME a EEE aniraa 301 KES ee ito METER 303 NMT450 Spectrogram EEE 304 EOCDAG SA 305 TE AA SOS CUO ORAM A e PP e EEE A 307 ES ee Spec OCIA EE 308 DET SN ri RTT T T TIT 309 YDE SC el un RE EE 311 VDES Se e o o M 312 TA DECO HUN TT TOT DUET 314 Figure 296 330 e List of Figures User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SS go2DECODE List of Tables Taole 1 ENE 6 Tagle ele iesen 7 Table 3 System Heouremente cessaria EEEa E AEAEE AEREA E RRE eaS 9 Tage aA RI tee 18 Table o DEI 22 Tane o SDA SOMMandS eege 22 ENN 27 DE ODA MENU EMIS sorae an a E O E A E E E 28 DEP 34 Table 10 Modem Menu Hemes sssiisisisiisisssiirississisnacniiciroaniecaniiniicknsoisdoaeiidddie omisi iein iidi iei sin ne iiindaisinisiianiddes 34 Table 11 Modem List Menu Wems 35 Table 12 Window Menu ems nennen nnn nnn nnna inn nssna rins snas nnns sa sns snas 36 Table 13 Help Menu ems diaii dndi iadissiniaisiddiisisisiinaiddss 36 Table 14 SDA Toolbar ICONS nnannnnannnnnannnnaannnnannnonnnnnnannnnnnrrnsnnrrrnnnresnnrrosnrrrnnnrrrnnrrrrnnrrennrrronnrrrnnrernnnerene 37 Table ER En Leute DC 38 Table RE Oe serieei En EE aE E AEN 40 Table 17 SDA Parameter Geitmgs 41 Table 18 SDA Parameter Options cccccooccncccoccnncc
53. New Decoders ccooooccnccnncccccccnonccnnnnccnnnnonnncnononononenanennnns 127 s A EE NE moe 127 Service 129 Sr 129 jui AAA o Pi EE EE A 129 ANNEX 1 Port Configuration 131 ANNEX 2 Sound Configuration 133 Select tre ode D EE 133 Configure Multi Channel Sound Device 133 Configuration File cardhet vm 134 ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters 137 ANNEX 4 Receiver Support 153 Using Rohde 8 Schwarz ESMB Receivers sese 153 Using Receivers of the IZT R3000 Family 154 ANNEX 5 Examples 157 SDA in the DEMO MOOG erR RRE 157 Generating Signals Using SOMO rrrrrnnnnrnnnnnnnnrvnnnrrnnnnnnnnsrnnnvrnnnnnnnnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnee 162 Decoder Programming Examples ooooccnnccccccccnnccccnoncnncnononnnnnnnononncnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnos 165 ANNEX 6 List of Decoders 169 Standard Decoders HF 177 Version TE O EEE 177 Available Decoders oocccccccconcconccoconcconcnononncononononncnnnnononncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 177 eegene Eege 177 A A 179 EEE 180 A E E a ssasadeueasenesaacdieetees 182 A EE 183 A EE 185 A P 187 ARQ M2 242 EE 188 DeL 190 DID EE 191 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Contents e v SN go2DECODE vi e Contents FOT PS 193 ARO O A 194 lt lt AC EE 196 ASIS Blancas 197 AUTOSPEO E 199 Baldor as MO science ote cocidas 200 o 202 gt AE NG irradia 203 9 X5 EE EEE EEE EEE 205 2 EEE EEE EEE 206
54. SP14 impossible Z 0 0 Hz 0 0 V Symbol rate V Start time 085 SPREAD 51 none 32 t 23 39 tino sync 102 7 Bd 0 0 Hz 13 5 Y Measured shift 7 Duration 086 SWED ARQ none 29 334 0 tino sync 100 0 Bd 0 0 Hz 13 5 087 Twinplex no result mm eg 0 0 Hz 304 2 V Lack time 088 Visel none 31 23 34 no sync 118 8 Bd 0 0 Hz 64 6 RE 4 nm D d Pause Delete SM 2012 10 31 04 05 48 04 05 57 4800 Hz e go2SIGNALS Figure 193 Speech Signals in SDA Processed by APC Generating Signals Using SOMO SOMO stands for Software Modulation Signal Generator SOMO can generate a multitude of differently modulated signals These signals can be used e g as input signals for DANA to establish a comprehensive test scenario for go2DECODE in a very short period of time Generating Signals Several signals can be generated and played back individually or in combination Select the desired signal type on the Generator menu e g Morse This signal is then displayed in the List of Generators genera tor highlighted i e selected in this list can be edited via the parameter window To activate or deactivate the generator double click the icon or the speaker icon All activated signals are calculated and generated or stopped and paused using the buttons lt Start gt lt Stop gt and lt Pause gt on the Control menu or the icons on the toolbar Transferring the Signal to APC using DANA To ensure a correct signal processing in th
55. Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature es Combination with other modems modem list Table 105 ARQ 6 98 Features 184 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ARO E General Information Q go2DECODE ARQ E is a synchronous dual channel ARQ mode for the exchange of teletype data over a radio channel in a robust way Usage Military or diplomatic data communication over HF Mode Properties 15 04 34 500 15 04 35 000 15 04 35 500 15 04 36 000 15 04 36 500 dBFS 100 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Parameter Value Shift Hz 170 370 Bandwidth Hz 300 600 Symbol rate Bd 30 650 Error correction Alphabet ITA 2 extended Table 106 ARQ E Characteristics 400 200 0 200 400 600 a00 1000 Hz Figure 205 ARQ E cyc4 Spectrogram Standard Decoders HF e 185 go2DECODE 15 04 56 500 15 04 57 000 15 04 57 500 15 04 58 000 15 04 58 500 4 PA d6F5 D 50 100 1000 SS 600 400 200 o 00 400 600 600 1000 Hz Figure 206 ARQ E cyc8 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd 85 7 185 SH tolerance Bd Shi Hz m Modem type Synchronous VER file name arq e cyc4 85bd 170hz ver arq e cyc8 185bd 370hz ver Table 107 ARQ E Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Featur
56. TD tolerance ms No of tones Tone position type Tone distance Hz VER file name Default piccolo mk12 ver User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Table 262 Piccolo MK12 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Recognition Decoding Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 263 Piccolo MK12 Features POL ARQ General Information POL ARQ is a synchronous duplex FARQ system This system was used by the Ministry of Foreign Af fairs of Poland Usage Data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones Shift Hz 270 Symbol rate Bd Alphabet CCIR 476 Table 264 POL ARQ Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 261 15 06 25 000 15 06 25 500 15 06 26 000 15 06 26 500 Toone NAN 3 4 n 7 dBF5 50 100 500 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 o 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Hz Figure 259 POL ARQ Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd Shit Hz Shift tolerance Hz VEH file name pol arq 100bd ver Table 265 POL ARQ Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature SEN n yes es es es O es y Automatic Polarity Adjustment no
57. Table 220 HNG FEC Demodulator Settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 241 S go2DECODE Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 221 HNG FEC Features MD674 General Information MD674 is a military asynchronous FSK modem Usage Data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation Number of tones ARQ Symbol rate Bd 150 Error correction ARQ Alphabet ITA 2 ITA 5 Table 222 MD674 Characteristics 15 05 57 000 15 05 57 500 15 05 55 000 15 05 55 500 15 05 59 000 dEFS 1000 DUU 600 400 200 200 400 500 DUU 1000 Hz Figure 245 MD674 Spectrogram 242 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Symbol rate Bd Modulation order Shit He Shift tolerance Hz Table 223 MD674 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 224 MD674 Features MEROD General Information MEROD is a Message Entry and Read Out Device for exchange of encrypted tactical messages over a radio channel in burst mode Usage Exchange of tactical information
58. Tuning The tuning frequency is the peak 20 kHz above the low cutoff frequency of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 308 ACARS VHF Features 282 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE AIS General Information The universal ship borne Automatic Identification System AIS was created for efficient exchange of nav igational data among ships and between ships and stations ashore to improve safety of navigation Usage Worldwide radio system for ship collision avoidance and navigational advice Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation primary FM secondary GMSK BT product 12 5 kHz 0 3 or 0 5 25 kHz max 0 5 Symbol rate Bd 9600 Coding NRZI and CRC Table 309 AIS Characteristics 15 07 15 500 15 07 16 000 15 07 16 500 15 07 17 000 15 07 17 500 4 k 0 0000000 dBFS 50 100 A000 r000 6000 5000 4000 3000 z000 1000 1000 4000 3000 4000 S000 000 7000 DUU Hz Figure 274 AIS Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default G MSK Symbol rate Bd 9600 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 283 S go2DECODE Parameter Default Min pause length s 0 440 VER file name Table 310 AIS Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is 11 340 kHz above the pilot tone Status
59. User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 DANA Digital Analogue Audio Interface e 93 N go2 DECODE icon Function File The wav or raw file is played directly via DANA This is not possible unless the APC is nm ready indicated by the green dot on the status bar AAA km AA Signal source iv Selection of spectrum display signal source 5 Signal source Spectrum display of the input signal Output to IF Output to IF SDA Spectrum display of the output signal x Gain display of input signal Green O K Red Over modulated If the gain display is red and the source Sound is selected adjust the Windows volume con 2008000001 Ss Start Programs Accessories Entertainment Media Volume Control S Volume Control 1 me x Optionen 2 Volume Control Wave SW Synth Microphone Line In Phone Mono Out Balance Balance Balance Balance Balance Balance Balance De EN Ei KR Jed b 4 amp F 4 VS ER Lautst rke Lautst rke Lautst rke Lautst rke Lautst rke Lautst rke Lautst rke BEE fale Alles aus Ton aus Y Ton aus Y Ton aus Y Ton aus Y Ton aus iv Ton aus SoundMAX Digital Audio Select the item Properties in the Options menu Set the volume by selecting 9 Recording and activating the checkbox M Wave Out Mix In case your specific sound card does not pro vide this item select either Wave or What you hear If none of these items is available con nect the Line out
60. User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Introduction to go2DECODE e 3 go2DECODE 2 seas Graphical User Interface Signal Processing Audio file Gr p Media Player Sound Audio file Receiver Figure 1 The Application at One Glance DANA cf centre of the figure is used as a signal converter and provides the module APC with the signal data in the required form of digital IF The module APG central right section of the figure handles the processing of signals from the recogni tion of modems via the demodulation and decoding up to the permanent production of the message con tent APC is a background process without user interface The module SDA see top section of the figure carries out the numerous tasks involved in display and user interaction On the one hand it provides graphic displays of the results supplied by the module APC on the other hand the user can edit parameters to control the operating mode of the APC SOMO Subject to the delivered version The SOftware MOdulator SOMO generates standard signals SOMO can be used to teach the handling of the SDA operator interface In combination with SDA it is an appropriate training tool for inexperienced analysts For more information on SOMO please refer to the SOMO Instruction Manual DANA The converter module DANA Digital ANalogue Audio Interface receives the existing input data from sound card or file and converts it into complex signal packages that can be processed by
61. User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 31 goeDECODE Function Signal Sources spar piena Production Memory Modem Recognition Memory size OMB 4 Lead in 2 000 s Record Demod Output Lead out 5 000 s 3 Sound Configuration In case of a voice or morse modem the audio content of the transmitted signal will be recorded and saved to your hard disk if the option Audio in file is activated in the demodulator property page The parameter Lead in defines the start of the recording in advance of the actual produc tion start time In contrast the parameter Lead out defines how much longer the recording will last if the voice morse detector has lost the signal and stopped production Dialog Modem Recognition Signal Sources Signal Processing l Production Memory Search strategy Search best v Modem Recognition Automat Result threshold 70 0 Record Demod Output Sound Configuration Production Memory SNR threshold 15 0dB gt Save Result Search strategy Search first The modem which first exceeds the result threshold will be processed by the APC Search best The modem with the best result of all modems above the result threshold will be processed by the APC Result threshold Threshold for detecting modems The delivered modems are optimized for a threshold of 70 Changing these parameters is not recommended M Result If the IF storage is activated via
62. X ADO ixx xx XXx XX x x X xX x xx x x Xx xxxX x X X Axjs 409 x xxX X x XXxrx X X XX X X X AXIS WE II eg az XXx X X X X X 111 XX X X X XXX Column 112 X X XXXX X X EM x xxi 114 X XX X X EM x x X x x 116 X XX XXX XX XX BEEN eg 118 Xx X X XXX XX 118 x Xx XxX X X X 120 xxx X XXXX EHE x x x Nox cx X c XXxx Xx xx x x X X X xX xx X x ocyx x xoxx DE A EDR HKN XX X XX X XX X XXXX X x X x x x x xy x f EE X X X X X X 122 XX X XX X Xx X X XX X 123 Jx xx X X X X XX XXX XXXX X i i ET I X XX XX EXXEX EX X X X XX X X Highlighted 125 XX XXX X XX X XXXX XX X X Block 126 x X X X X X EXX X XXEXX X 127 X X X XXX Xx EX X X X 128 X XX X XXX X X XXEX X XXXX 129 XX XX E E X X X X X X X 130 x X XX X X XEX XX X X 131 XX X X XX X X X X X XEX E XXX XX XXX XX 132 XX X X XX XX XXX XX XX XX X X X X X X 133 X X X EX XXX X XX X XXX X X EXEXEX EX 4 X XX X E X X XEXX XX XXX X XX X EXXX EX 135 XXXX X X X X XXX X X X EXE EX EXX XX X 136 X EX EX EX X XXX X XXXX X X XE E X EXEX X Y AXIS 137 XXXXX XX XX X X X X X XEX XXEXXX X X X 138 x X X X XX X XE X X X X X EX XX How 139 X X XX X
63. X XX X X X X X XXX X XXX XX XX 140 X XXXX X X XX XX XXX XX XX XX X X XXX X 141 x X X XX E X XE X X X X X XXX X XXX XX 142 XXX XEXXX X X XX XX XXX XX EX EXX X X X 143 X X EXX X X XX XXX X XX X XXX X X XXXX 144 xX XX X XX X X X X XXX XX Offset O Mode MSB Circulation Figure 82 Bit Display Column numbers for the bits or symbols are drawn on the X axis The row numbers are drawn on the Y axis The bit display presents an overview of sequences of symbols and serves to analyze repeating bit pat terns Parts of the bit patterns can be highlighted The highlighted part of the bit pattern or all bits saved in the bit display can be saved in a file 84 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Parameter Setting Bit display Parameters Output channels Channel number Input signal Symbols Serialisation MSB first Display mode Column Row Alignment Offset Circulation length Figure 83 Bit Display Parameters Tab Parameter Function Output channels One symbol may consist of several channels e g in an MFSK2 modem This parameter serves to set the channels to be displayed All All channels of the symbol are displayed Channel number Symbols of a specified channel are displayed Use this parameter to select the input signal of the display If the Automat is on the option No
64. XXX XX XX X X X X X XX XX XEX EX XXXX XX X 19 X XXXXEX EX EXXXX XXX XX X X X XE E XX E X XXX X ZBEE x x X XEX XXX XX X X X XX XEX XX XX X ZII XXX EX XEX XXE XX XAX XXX XX X XXEXX XX EX X XE X X ESEIXZX ZzX XXXX XX X XX EX X X XXXX XX XX XX X X 23 XX X X X EEXX XX XXX XX XXEX X AX X AXX 24 XX XXX X XX X XX X X X XXX XXXXX X XX XX ga 3 XEX XXEXX 33 XX XZXEH KEE XZ X X ZZ X X Sech IA AA A A CH EE CH ad Xx xx X X X EXXX EXX X XX X X XXXX XXX XXXX X 30 XXx X X XX XX XX X XXX XXXXX XX XX XXX X XX 31 X XXX XX E XEXX XXX X X XX X XXX XE X XX X X X SETE XX AAA 2 amp 22x 28 2 24 KE 2 2 24 28 AAA AA 33 XX XXXXX XXX EX X XXXX XXX XX X XXX XEX X X XX 34 X XX XX X X X X XXX X XXXX X XX X XEX XX X X X 35 X X XX X X XXX XX X X X XX XXX XX X 36 X X XX XX XX XX X XXX X X XXX XX XX X X X 37 XX XXX XX XX XXX X XXX X X XXXX XX X X X 38 XXX XX XX XX XX XX X XXX X X XXXX XXX X XXX 39 XX XX X XX XX X XX X XXXX XX X X X X X _ 40 X X XX XXX X X X XX XX e Offset 0 Made MSE Burst A Figure 129 Bit Display of Demodulated Bits A typical search is for repetitions in the data stream Modify the parameter Circulation length and check the display Once a pattern shows up the circulation length corresponds to the repetition leng
65. active servers QOO no connection 1008 connection is established GOOG no connection Server inactive A list of available Signal servers will be sent to the SDA after the connection to the signal server is established In the group field Signal Sources a table of sources is shown Editing of the ta ble is not possible You can create new Signal servers by selecting the button lt new gt A dialog with the input fields designation IP Address and control port for details see ANNEX 1 Port Configuration as well as a check box M for activation will show up The designation of the server must be unique You accept the modified values by selecting the button lt OK gt With the button lt Abort gt you check out of the dialog with no changes By selecting the button lt Edit gt a dialog to modify the Server settings appears This button is only active if you have selected a signal server To display the configuration of a server you can start a viewer by selecting the button lt Show XML gt Server settings are cleared via the button lt Delete gt This button is only active if you have se lected a signal server A security check will pop up and if you confirm the settings of the se lected server will be cleared Note All related signal sources and the table content will be cleared too The group field Signal Sources is used for the input and change of the signal sources Signal sources DANA SOMO Receivers etc produce Data sig
66. adjust the parameter of the Menus and Submenus showing on the left of the dialogs Definition and adaption to the signal sources alignment and adaption to the APC limiting of recorded symbols User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 29 go2 DECODE Menu Item Function selection and configuration of soundcards On the left side of the dialog a navigation bar is displayed which provides 4 selections Signal Sources Signal Processing Record Demod Output and Sound Configuration Dialog Sound Sources Signal Sources Signal Processing Production Memory Modem Recognition Name IP Addres Control Pc Active Connectio Record Demod Output Sound Configuration New Edit Delete IP Address Data Port Server 1127 0 0 1 44001 127 0 0 1 44002 3 Guo Gao ose In this dialog you configure and adapt to the signal server and signal sources The group field RCM shows a table of the connected signal servers Signal servers in this case are applications which are used to provide separate signal sources RCM provides the possibil ity to use multiple receiver as signal sources all servers can be active or not active Each signal server has a designation chosen by the user an IP Address and a control port to take commands through Servers can be active or non active No connection will be estab lished to inactive servers The column connection shows the status on
67. annulations of the license In such cases the product must be newly acquired at its full price The SOFTWARE is provided on an as is basis without any warranty of whatsoever nature whether express or implied being given to LICENSEE including without limitation implied war ranties of satisfactory quality LICENSEE irrevocably accepts that it is solely responsible for all loss damage costs and expenses suffered and or incurred by LICENSEE arising from and or in connection with the download installation and or use of the SOFTWARE PLATH AG including all of its suppliers dealers distributors agents and employees excludes and disclaims all liability for any loss damage costs and expenses of whatsoever nature arising from and or in connec tion with this EULA the SOFTWARE its download installation use or otherwise and expressly excludes all liability for indirect special incidental and consequential loss or damage howsoever caused PLATH AG together with PROCITEC GmbH are and shall at all times remain the sole owner of all intellectual property and other rights whether proprietary or otherwise subsisting in or used in connection with the SOFTWARE The trademarks and logos including PLATH AG and go2SIGNALS go2MONITOR go2DECODE go2ANALYSE go2RECORD featured in the SOFTWARE are trademarks or registered trademarks of PLATH AG in Switzerland and other countries Third party trademarks trade names images product names and
68. as in any standard text editor 118 e Decoder Adaptation and Development User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Menu Bar Toolbar Decoder editor acars e e 9E IE E QE QE EE Lei Copyright PROCITEC GmbH 2008 ACARS detection and decoding SRCSfile acarg txt v SRevision 1 21 Date 2008710721 09 15 15 DE DE DE DE JE JE JE JE 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E DE e JE JE 3E 3E 3E 3E DE JE JE JE JE JE a VARDEF recognition sequence 6b4 AllInOne 1616 2aab ffff_h Level Inval Faults CRCError Tol 2 Gap Found Pos Burst5tart BurstLen DownLinkFlag 0 Varlen Edit Counter Window HIdent 1 64 Buf fer Une har tenpihar 048 Content 2048 tenplont ENDVARDEF i e e DE START PREPROC PPBitCodeInyvyNRZ 1 MATHPROC HevFrane Searching for the beginnig of a burst SearchBursti7FFFE bh Burstlen FFF bh Gap Found C T omplier Result Window Row D Column Jz Figure 134 Decoder Editor Menu Bar File Edit Extras Help Se ralxor Figure 135 Menu Bar The menu bar consists of five menus featuring the following menu items Menu Item Function File Management of decoder descriptions Edit Editing functions and decoder creation Extras Automatic indentation parameter information and mass compilation Help Instruction Manual to Decoder Description Language DDL Table 66 Decoder Editor Menu Items User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Decoder Adaptation and Development e 119 S go2DEC
69. based on the datagram communication protocol as described in Annex F of the manual describing the HF digital wideband receiver R amp S EM510 For detailed information on how to connect the receiver to the personal computer please refer to the corresponding user manual For correct manual configuration of the receiving equipment send the following commands to the DX200 by telnet In this example we shall assume that the IP address of the host PC is 89 10 11 24 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 4 Receiver Support e 153 go2DECODE sense dem ig trac udp tag 89 10 11 24 48001 LE trac udp flag 89 10 11 24 48001 SWAP OPT Band 50000 To check the settings use trac udp of 89 10 11 23 PuTTY sense dem iq traciudpitag 59 10 11 24 46001 IF trac udp flag 89 10 11 24 48001 SWAP OPT Band 50000 trac udp DEF DUI 59 10 11 24 485001 IF SWAP a Figure 185 Configuration Check To start the data transmission enter the command syst if rem mode long Using Receivers of the IZT R3000 Family Go2DECODE supports the operation of receivers of the IZT R3000 family The following block diagram shows the components of go2DECODE with all additional components The additional component to in stall is the receiver control module RCM This module receives the data from the IZT receiver in UDP format and converts the data into the format required by the APC The application IZT R3000 is the official softwar
70. buffer which is refilled after each call The search can be made with error tolerance These commands are re quired for both the identification of an encoding and the synchronization of an appropriate start position Examples Command Functions SearchPattern Search for specific bit patterns SearchSymbolTab Search for symbols defined in a table SearchlnterlSymbolTab Corresponding search of interleaved symbols SearchBurst Search for the start of a burst SearchPolynom Search for an output bit sequence of a feedback shift register LFSR SearchVectorPatternMatch Search for patterns consisting of multi order input symbols for example PSK8 se quences Table 72 DDL Search Commands Read Commands starting with Get These commands initiate the reading of data blocks from the input buffer in variables Examples Command Functions Read specific quantity of bits GetDelnterleave Read specific quantity of bits according to a definable interleaving pattern GetSymbol Read specific quantity of multi order input symbols Table 73 DDL Read Commands Frame Fragmentations and Reformatting Distributed or interleaved bit sequences can be composed in various ways Examples Command Functions Extract bit frame from variable with or without bit reversal Extractinteri Extract interleaved bit frame User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Decoder Adaptation and Development e 125 S go2DECODE Command Functions ExtractPattern Extract wo
71. can be employed in varying scenarios The adaptability of go2DECODE to future technology trends guarantees a maximum life cycle and a safe investment User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 General e 1 SN go2DECODE Note Please find information about the actual version in the readme file The described functions are subject to the delivered version Any requests and suggestions about go2DECODE will be highly appreciated We are happy to receive your information via the support contacts stated below go2SIGNALS goeSIGNALS The use of radio communication is constantly rising The traditional approach of monitoring this more and more connected signal scenario with a manual approach of channel stepping and manual search is not promising for future challenges The product line go2SIGNALS covers customer requirements from traditional manual signal handling to fully automatic intelligence system This provides processing speed and user comfort of automatic intelligence systems to single user working positions It is the perfect solution for mobile stand alone and remote controlled applications as well as a start into the world of automatic monitoring The focus of go2SIGNALS is on radio monitoring Future products will also provide some parts of Communications Intelligence COMINT or Signal Intelligence SIGINT goe MONITOR go2MONITOR is a modular software solution for receiver control classification demodulation decod ing and recording
72. can perceive in contrast to ultrasonic waves which humans cannot hear ALE Automatic Link Establishment commonly known as ALE is the worldwide de facto standard for digitally initiating and sustaining HF radio communications ALE is a feature in an HF communications radio trans ceiver system that enables the radio station to make contact or initiate a link between itself and another HF radio station or network of stations The purpose is to provide a reliable rapid method of calling and connecting during constantly changing HF ionospheric propagation reception interference and shared spectrum use of busy or congested HF channels ARQ The Automatic Repeat reQuest protocol ARQ is a method to increase the reliability of data transfer The data to transfer is split into smaller packets each packet is extended by a packet number and a check sum On the receiving side a checksum is generated on the received data part of the packet and com pared to the checksum that was sent If they do not concur the receiving station sends a message to the originator of the message reporting which packet failed This message prompts the originator to send the indicated packet another time ASCII The American Standard Code for Information Interchange commonly known as ASCII is a character encoding scheme originally based on the English alphabet ASCII codes represent text in computers communications equipment and other devices that use text ASCII e
73. color schemes for the displays Color Scheme Foreground Color Background Color Table 42 Eye Pattern Display Color Schemes In the spectrum sonagram display the tab Extras features a checkbox M Audio output freq Analysis Display In contrast to the other display types the operation of the analysis display does not depend on the availa bility of a demodulator lt filters a signal from a signal band parameters Filter Centre and Filter Band width and displays the curves of the three most important characteristics e amplitude magnitude phase and frequency in the specified period of time Depending on the modulation type there are charac teristic signal curves User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 73 go2DECODE Analysis display Paused IF input ojx Y Axis 0 075 Magnitude 0 025 Y Axis 0 000 Phase Y Axis 200 Frequency X Axis Time 50 ed 70 oa 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 60 927 lt 20 132 gt 81 060 ms Figure 70 Analysis Display This display is divided into three parts The upper part displays the curve of the magnitude amplitude of the signal The central part displays the phase of the signal The lower part displays the frequency of the signal The analysis display shows the time on the X axis Time 0 is the start of the signal section Parameter Setting The parameters of the analysis display are s
74. decoded select a decoder Select the lt Decod gt tab and activate the but ton lt Decoder Name gt list with the existing decoders will be displayed Select the desired decoder and confirm by lt Ok gt On completion of this selection the selected decoder will be used for decoding If there is no appropriate decoder either edit an existing decoder or create a new one see Decoder Ad aptation and Development Displays The signal displays can be used to determine the demodulator parameters Cursors are available to measure e g the shift or the symbol rate The cursors are superimposed in the spectrum sonagram dis play via the lt Cursors gt tab This way you can e g measure the shift by activating the X Cursors in the spectrum sonagram and plac ing the first cursor on the lower frequency and the second cursor on the upper frequency Drag n Drop Other displays for signal analysis are eye pattern and analysis displays showing the IF signal as a time curve The constellation display provides a display in the complex plane The APC is capable of demodu lating and decoding the signal The output of a demodulator the symbol stream can be viewed by means of the Hell and bit displays The Hell display is based on signals and the bit display is based on the sym bols which are provided by the APC as a result of the demodulation procedure The toolbar above the display windows serves to open the described displays Controlling th
75. defines the length of a row Burst The duration of a burst in symbols defines the length of a row The mode Burst length cannot be set unless there is a modem in which the burst mode has User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 85 goeDECODE Parameter Function beemactivated Offset Defines the number of the first bit from which the bit pattern is displayed Circulation length Defines the number of bits required to draw a row If the length is greater than the visible section the invisible section can be displayed by means of the parameter Column Columns which include only one bit number are called frames Use this parameter to set the skew of the bit sequences to make the repeating bit patterns visible with frame This parameter cannot be modified unless the row mode has been set to Circulation length Pause The display is suspended in Pause and the parameters can be modified for a more detailed analysis of the bit pattern Deletes the display and all saved bits of the bit display Table 52 Bit Display Parameters Parameters Highlight Function The parameters of the highlight function can be displayed and modified by activating the tab Highlight ing in enabled mode Pause Use the mouse for the highlighting operation e Move the mouse pointer to the start position of the block to be highlighted e Press the left mouse button e Drag the highlight to the end position of the block withou
76. display If the automatic production is active you can only select the input IF While setting the parameters of the demodulator it may occur that a previously selected input signal is no longer available In this case the selection no signal will be displayed Centre frequency The frequency section to be viewed is set in combination with the frequency range The centre frequency is the centre of the section Frequency range The frequency section to be viewed is set in combination with the centre frequency The frequency range is the range within the section The zoom can thus be set manually Maximum level Definition of the level range in the spectrum display The maximum level is the upper end User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 59 go2DECODE Parameter Function of the section Definition of the level range in the spectrum display The minimum level is the lower end of the section Number of values of frequency in which the signal is displayed To obtain a higher resolu tion of the displayed frequency range increase the FFT length Minimum level FFT length The spectrum is displayed in average of several spectrums The result of a change of the spectrum will be a total view of the spectrum 0 No average 80 Low average 80 99 High average 100 No updating of the spectrum The FFT algorithm is used for the calculation of the spectrum This algorithm however shows inacc
77. documentation and searches the DDL Operating Instructions for the current DDL command In case the current text string is no valid DDL command the search will not produce any result The precondition for the correct function of the context sensitive help is an existing DDL Operating In structions file Automatic Command Completion When entering a DDL command the software can complete the current text entry automatically into a DDL command Activate this function by means of the shortcut lt Alt gt lt gt gt If the entry unequivocally matches a DDL command the missing characters are inserted immediately upon activation of lt Alt gt lt gt gt GetBurstSymbol GetDelnterl GetFrame GetPos ommum Figure 141 Automatic Command Completion If the current text string matches several valid DDL commands a list box is displayed showing the com mands in question The list box shows a maximum of ten possible completions Select the desired com 122 e Decoder Adaptation and Development User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 OD go2DECODE pletion using the arrow keys or the mouse Insert the entry selected in the list box at the current text posi tion by pressing lt Return gt or double clicking the desired item Exit the list box at any time via lt Esc gt or clicking any position outside the list box on screen If no valid DDL commands match the current entry you will see an alert message Completion not possi ble on acti
78. down combo box now shows the de fault name modemo Analyze FSK Signals This paragraph describes typical methods for a manual analysis of FSK modulated signals For this pur pose we shall use the example file 5 2 FSK example wav stored in the directory exampleslanalysis in your Application directory applied to the Sound input of DANA Please replay the example file with a me dia player Adapt Display Area to Input Signal There is a chance that the displayed spectrum of the signal is outside the adjusted display zone as shown in the following examples 106 e Manual Analysis of Unknown Signals User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 12 45 29 000 12 45 29 500 12 45 30 000 12 45 30 500 dBFS ER 150 175 200 42000 10000 S go2DECODE 4000 6000 om 10000 12000 z Figure 113 Spectrum Outside Inadequate scaling will cause the display of an overmodulated signal where the signal characteristics will be impossible to view 12 45 23 000 12 45 23 500 12 45 24 000 12 45 24 500 12 45 25 000 BFS a 10 IR 20 30 40 42000 10000 4000 5000 2000 El 10000 12000 Hz Figure 114 Display of Overmodulated Signal Due to the inappropriate scaling the signal can be hardly recognized in the figure above Press the button lt Autorange gt to set the scaling automatically This button is located at the bottom of the spectrum sonagram display pr
79. existing demodulators SDA The module SDA Signal Display amp Analysis is the central graphical user interface The main functions of SDA are Display listening and monitoring of the incoming signals Display of the transient signal memories to check the APC function Display of the results APC control and parameter editing Editing the parameters of the modems Editing the parameters of the displays in the active window Provision of analytic measuring tools Development environment for the decoder description language For further details on the various SDA functions and its operation please consult the respective introduc tory chapters and the sections about SDA in this manual Sources Signal data can be provided to go2DECODE from a great variety of different signal sources In a rough abstraction three categories of sources are distinguished Signals via sound card Signals from files directly via DANA Signals via LAN data streams from any type of receiver Subject to the delivered version On the following pages we introduce you to these applications and provide an overview of all functions available Generally the programs can run on different computers and exchange data via TCP IP go2DECODE however is a standalone system whose modules are linked via loopback adapter with vir tual interface User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Introduction to go2DECODE e 5 D go2 DECODE Application Monitoring go2DECODE f
80. from the time at which the search was started This process will be faster than real time until the APC has processed all existing sig nal data Afterwards the SDA will again receive the data in real time In addition to the direct input the time parameters and the numerical values can be edited using the cur sor keys Up T or Down 4 corresponding to the up down controls on the right of the spin box This will change the digit on which the cursor is positioned Position the cursor by means of the cursor keys Right gt or Left The start and end times can be set both manually and by using the sonagram First activate the Z cursors in the sonagram Open the popup menu right mouse click in the sonagram in mode Analysis Offline and use this menu to adopt the time position settings of the cursors as Automat parameters for the start time and the end time of the short time memory On selecting start time or end time only the start time or the end time will be set otherwise the entire time range will be set Cursor L A CUrSsor A Zoom range d Tideo E a Cursor E Je Zoom in P Zoom out 2 Cursor mode h LE SCH Har nir Zi Immediate mouse zoom Harmonic 1 E Overview Figure 45 Sonagram Popup Menu Demodulator Selection The setting of the modem parameters directly affects the signal processing process this way the charac teristics of the modem can be modified Transmi
81. have been installed 1 Lo NT Start PMO Production Memory Observer for viewing results bl DANA Start DANA Digital ANalogue Audio interface for signal input Start SOMO Software Modulation Signal Generator Subject to the delivered version EA Decoder Debugger Start Decoder Debugger only Subject to the delivered version User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Starting go2DECODE e 21 S go2DECODE Icon Name Description Uninstall go2DECODE Uninstall go2DECODE with all its components Apply for license In the subfolder target open the Request_license pdf file explaining how to apply for an go2DECODE license Table 5 Desktop Icons In addition and for a flexible start you can use Commands to start the SDA Command Place holder Function S S S ZZ 2Li1nDIIQ conf Config lt ConfigFile gt Start the SDA with a Configuration File gt Path and Filename Example sda exe conf C Temp sda_Rx1 conf of the Configuration File dirCompatibility With this option only Windows XP you write the configuration file and the temp file in the Installation folder This is possible only if you are logged in as administrator The file for the Configuration changes must be the file directo rySettings conf Example sda exe dirCompatibility Table 6 SDA Commands After Start of go2DECODE On program start of go2DECODE the SDA will appear as in the screenshot below You will see a spec trum sonagram display a result display t
82. hide parameters F EH split Lj Cascade IS Close all windows Hide parameters F5 Fullscreen Fil WI Spectrum Sonagram HS Result display Figure 35 Window Menu This menu serves to arrange the displays of SDA more clearly and shows a list of all SDA windows cur rently open Menu Item Function Position all Arrange all signal and result display windows one below the other Every window is displayed in the same size Position all and Arrange all signal result display windows one below the other in equal size and show hide show or hide all property sheets whichever applicable parameters Split Arrange SDA windows both next to each other and below each other Arrange the windows of the signal displays on top of each other Close all windows Close all open SDA windows Hide show The property sheet currently displayed is hidden and vice versa hidden property parameters sheets are displayed Hide Parameters List of all open SDA windows On selection of a window title in the menu the respec tive window is activated and displayed in the foreground Fullscreen Switching the display to fullscreen modus toggle function User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 35 Menu Item Function Spectrum Sonagram Switch to Spectrum or Sonagram mode Result display Switch to result display Table 12 Window Menu ltems HINT Use lt Ctrl gt lt Tab gt to switch between display windows Minimized
83. in X direction They are used to measure periods of a row The cursors are activated in Z direction They are used to measure values of time Harmonic Several cursors are activated at equidistant intervals In this mode the first cursor will move all other cursors The intervals are defined by grabbing and moving the second or any following cur sor The Harmonic function can only be applied in combination with X cursors Y cursors or Z 82 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Parameter D go2 DECODE Function cursors lt serves to measure repeating intervals Use this spin box to determine the number of cursors to be displayed in Harmonic mode Coordinates of the first X Y and Z cursor each Coordinates of the second X Y and Z cursor each lt Zoom in gt lt Zoom out gt lt Pause gt Extras With enabled cursors the button lt Zoom In gt serves to graphically zoom into the area delimited by the cursors With disabled cursors the zoom enlarges the area by factor 1 2 each time it is acti vated X direction only Additionally the user may draw a rectangle in the display window and zoom into this section graphically by means of the button lt Zoom In gt If the display window has activated cursors the zoom via rectangle will take priority After zooming the rectangle shown as a white dotted line will disappear Otherwise simply click any position in the display window to delete t
84. inactive The selected Morse signal has a nominal frequency of 12 500 Hz If 12 500 Hz is entered in DANA as frequency this Morse signal will be processed in the APC In case another nominal frequency is entered one of the other signals will be processed User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 5 Examples e 163 go2DECODE DANA Sound File Control Extras Help A Sound m HH Signal source 150 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 14000 16000 18000 12000 Predefined frequencies no predefined frequencies Z Input filter i Remove DC Full span Start frequency End frequency 12 500 90 Hz 1 Start SRin 48000 00 Morse Signal PD go2DECODE File Edit Display Extras Modem Modem Windows Help c9 43 Qm uu HE Gi Eu EN DS E Spectrum Sonagram IF input Channel 1 14 37 51 500 14 37 52 000 14 37 52 500 14 37 53 000 14 37 53 500 0 0 r og 50 75 100 125 2000 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 10000 8000 6000 4000 1 om z Hz 0 x SRout 24000 00 Hz 3 Sink connected X Modem al GE 20000 22000 24000 Hz SS go2SIGNALS Nominal Frequency Alis Control Demod Decod Extras Audio Made Analysis online Frequency range Sianal search Nominal frequency OHz Search range 5600 Hz 500 Hz Search strategy Sear
85. internal detection of the signal and identifica tion of a modem in the APC Primary demod AM FM Primarily demodulated signal IF reduced Additional internal intermediate frequency The bandwidth of the signal has been roughly adapted according to the selected symbol rate Used to check the demodu lator setting Channel The signal after the channel filter Only signal relevant signal components are avail able Also used to check the demodulator settings AGC AFC QAM and PSK demodulators have a frequency control AFC and a level control AGC whose function can be checked by means of this input signal Magnitude Amplitude demodulated input signal AM Shows the energy loss of the signal Difference magnitude Especially the FSK2 matched demodulator uses two channels and therefore has two AM signals The difference between these two signals can be verified using this input signal Phase Phase demodulated input signal PM Frequency demodulated input signal FM Filtered magnitude Filtered amplitude demodulated input signal Filtered difference magni Difference between the two filtered AM signals tude Filtered frequency Filtered frequency demodulated input signal Symbol decision Signal prepared for symbol decision Symbol rate Symbol rate pins of the samples as input signal The equalizer identifies and calculates distortions from the channel signal Used to check the equalizer Symbols Output of the demodulator Table 28
86. logos featured in the SOFTWARE may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners LICENSEE acknowledges that he may not export the software to countries where this is forbidden by applicable international and national export legislation and pertinent regulations Furthermore the software may not be exported to a country or handed over to a citizen or resident of such User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Appendix e 315 NS go2DECODE country upon which an embargo has been imposed on the basis of existing national or interna tional export controls All rights to the use the Software shall be forfeited if the provisions of this EULA are not adhered to This EULA is governed by and construed in accordance with Swiss law and LICENSEE irrevo cably submits to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of Bern Switzerland Software and other relevant products are license protected e g WIBU Key or CodeMeter dongle Bug reporting Please report to support 2go2signals ch Required Information Operating system Other Applications running Langauge of the operating system Screen Shot When did show up this problem for the first time Conditions of sale General These general conditions of sales are binding if no other conditions have been declared as applicable in the offer or the confirmation of PLATH AG Customer orders are binding only if PLATH AG has confirmed them in writing These general conditions of
87. lt New gt but the fields are now filled with the values of the selected source Existent sources user predefined will be deleted via the button lt Delete gt This dialog is only active if you have selected a user defined signal source in the table A security check will pop up and if you acknowledge the settings of the selected table and list of signal sources in the SDA tool bar will be cleared Dialog Signal Processing This dialog defines the Automatic Production Control APC At the moment you can define one component Signal Sources Signal Processing APC Production Memory Modern Recognition PortBase 41001 Record Demod Output 21 IP Address 1270 0 1 APC Number Port 41002 Sound Configuration Default Apply Undo In the rotary field PortBase you can enter the base value of the calculation for the separate APC port number This calculation is based on the formula Port PortBase APC number 100 1 When changing this value the field Port will be updated in respect to the formula except for the setting in the field APC This will be ignored For identification of the component please insert an IP Address an APC number and a port for details see ANNEX 1 Port Configuration Select the button lt Default gt to reset to the default settings On selecting the buttons lt Apply gt or lt Undo gt you apply or discard your settings Dialog Production Memory
88. lt default gt lt samplerates gt lt card gt lt card gt lt name gt audigy2nx lt name gt lt descriptions gt lt desc gt 5B Audigy 2 NX desc lt desc gt USB Audio SB Audigy 2 NX lt desc gt lt descriptions gt lt channels gt 4 lt channels gt lt bitspersanple gt lt bps gt 8 lt bps gt lt default gt 16 lt default gt lt bps gt 32 lt bp5 gt lt bitspersample gt lt samplerates gt ar 12000 sr lt sr gt 24000 lt sr gt lt default gt 44100 lt default gt lt sr gt 48000 lt 3r gt lt semplerates gt lt card gt lt cardlist gt Figure 149 Configuration Example User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 2 Sound Configuration e 135 go2DECODE ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters Various parameters are available for every demodulator type Some demodulators allow for changes in their symbol tables i e modification of the symbol values produced by the demodulator in question Demodulator Parameters Et 0 0 oe OC GP TT IT pose 0908 y 0010 107 0 0 1i E 07 l o 0 1 l i 1 liste i WW EE ep HU adt 00 le sov e Ne 0 0 is adm e je e fe ie a e c le je E Ha a Me 0 NE M BM DU B ain el av o e v 7 vsa 107 e ge 0 O 2 l GEM ee GP PPT ode elo le el l ci cn Oe eim 0c III gt F4
89. mA use 1 roses esasa 1 Inner S S pr EE Liam mee S Fate 10060 AOV gm psk 20000 per Giobewreloss skr roscoe 0 i i ET AN emm G o Globe Wireless FSKPSK w S Irmine voice Jae see eov Waga Il IN OOOO Inge KSE moro ms wr OS mes User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 6 List of Decoders e 171 go2DECODE Modem Det Prod Same as Modem File Morse morse raw ver MSS gt X NUM 13 olivia 1000 32 ver eom gt Piccolo MK12 RACAL ARQ SITOR B 100Bd 400Hz Lg Le 0 mamdbdwr ter pam sider fpskoroover O O Trans fpsksopskeer O O te er Lee Pie tecer PS fpskesover O O ize mer E A eg Oia y O AI sitor b 100bd 170hz ver 172 e ANNEX 6 List of Decoders User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Modem Det Prod Same as Modem File X SITOR B fs 00 Autospec ee spread51 ver swdauwr CIS 36 50 CIS 11 twinplex ver E tor wear O O votes ade ear SSES Table 88 HF Standard Decoders Ke Modem Det Prod Same as Modem File AIS as X XK XI X X Xx X X lt dmr ver dpmr ver eea ver eia ver euro ver flex 1600bd fsk2 ver flex 1600bd psk2a ver fms bos ver Ex PAN golay pagerver AP User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 6 List of Decoders e 173 S go2DECODE Modem Det Prod Same as Modem File TY mptser1200pd mskver O nee nor 000
90. main window Show hide property sheets Window positions and window sizes of the individual displays if open All display parameters Window position and window size of the decoder editor as well as the last decoder edited if open Status of menu item Save settings automatically User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 27 go2 DECODE When the SDA is started the file default cmf will be loaded automatically This file holds the default set tings of SDA Menu Item Function Load settings Load previously saved settings Save settings Save current settings Save settings automatically On selection of this option the standard settings will be overwritten with the current settings when exiting SDA Table 8 SDA Menu ltems Before loading the settings switch to Analysis mode and switch off the Automat The settings of the signal types and of the channel number of the displays are displayed as they were saved before Edit Menu ESSE Display Extras Copy ctrl E Pase Cte Figure 30 Edit Menu Highlighted text blocks can be stored in the clipboard of your computer and pasted in other positions in the text using the functions Copy and Paste Please note that these functions can only be used in text windows such as in the Result Display or in the Decoder Editor They are disabled in other windows Display Menu This menu enables to start the various signal displays available in SDA
91. menu the program shows a dialog box for selection of the desired directory Decoder Source Code Structure The Decoder Description Language is the basis for the source code for the description of decoders Please consult the document Decoder Description Language DDL for a more detailed description of the structure and the various command elements To view this document use the Help menu or the lt F2 gt hot key The descriptions below will merely provide a rough and initial overview In general the syntax of the decoder description corresponds to that of a simple programming language Programs always begin with a declaration part which defines the variables used followed by the actual description of the program flow which uses both fundamental and very specific commands allowing for implementation of more complex decoder functions with only one command line Schematic assignments such as alphabet encoding may be defined in separate tables Reference to these tables can be made via specific commands in the course of the program flow Fig 143 illustrates the basic structure of a description using a simple decoder as an example Every pro gram is adapted to the general basic data flow as shown in Fig 144 First the incoming data stream is stored automatically in the input buffer where it is possible to search for specific data patterns or charac teristics to identify the modem or to configure the start synchronization Starting with the positio
92. over HF with emissions of minimum length Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Shit He Bandwidth Hz 1200 Symbol rate Bd 266 80H 127 78 Alphabet MEROD specific 6 bit Table 225 MEROD Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 243 S9 goe DECODE 15 05 46 500 15 05 49 000 15 05 49 500 15 05 50 000 15 05 50 500 dBF5 50 100 1000 800 600 400 200 00 400 600 enn 1000 Hz Figure 246 MEROD Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rat Bd Shift HZ Shift tolerance Hz Table 226 MEROD Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 227 MEROD Features MFSK8 General Information MFSK8 is a mode for digital data communication in the amateur radio domain 244 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Usage Transfer of textual information by radio amateurs over HF Mode Properties 15 06 46 000 15 06 46 500 15 06 47 000 15 06 47 500 15 06 49 000 dBFS 100 Demodulator Settings Tuning Parameter Value Modulation F Number of tones 3 3 SK 2 T Table 228 MFSK8 Characteristics Figure 247 MFSK8 Spectrogram Parameter Default Demodulator Multitone MFSK TD t
93. position of the first additional cursor Use this spin box to determine the number of cursors to be displayed in Harmonic mode Coordinates of the first X Y and Z cursor each Coordinates of the second X Y and Z cursor each Difference between Cursor1 and Cursor2 lt Zoom in gt With enabled cursors the button lt Zoom In gt serves to graphically zoom into the area delimited by the cursors With disabled cursors the zoom enlarges the area by factor 2 each time it is activated X direction only Additionally the user may draw a rectangle in the display window and zoom into this section graphically by means of the button lt Zoom In gt If the display window has activated cursors the zoom via rectangle will take priority After zooming the rectangle shown as a white dotted line will disappear Otherwise simply click any position in the display window to delete the rectangle lt Zoom out gt Each time the button Zoom Out is activated the display area is enlarged by factor 2 With disa bled cursors the zoom is exclusively made in X direction lt Pause gt In Pause the display is stopped not the signal processing Modification of the parameters Is pos sible for a more detailed analysis of the current signal range lt Autorange gt Automatic setting of the displayed range to view the total real and imaginary part The mode Au torange analyzes approx 12 vectors The display is adapted on every change of the range On pres
94. production start Test This is the first message This is the first message This is the first message This is the first message E A ad Figure 198 Result Display Change the search pattern as indicated in the comment lines in the section SearchPattern Compile the source code and check for compiler error messages Restart automatic production Automat The second message is displayed 166 ANNEX 5 Examples User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 D go2 DECODE Result display Paused ojx NN o Detection onet osis osr_ pecoa pam sr snitt 001 27 11 07 15 39 03 266 production start Test This is message number 2 This is message number 2 This is message number 2 This is message number 2 This is message number 2 Figure 199 Result Display As stated in the comments it is also possible to identify both patterns using X wildcard characters and to output both messages successively User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 5 Examples e 167 go2DECODE ANNEX 6 List of Decoders Modem Det Prod Sameas Modem File moe moea x F7B Morse Baudot AAN HFDL FE alcatel 801h ver alisver alis2ver X X X CIS 14 osa sona CET mensen O arame2mnom mames OOOO IET arq_6 90 ver XxX X Xx Ke ARQ E Cyc8 185Bd arq_e cyc8 185bd 370hz ver 370Hz ARQ E Cyc8 96Bd X X arq_e cyc8 96bd_192hz ver 192Hz ARCHES 508d 400H2 x X ARGES wm as X ARQ M2 342 arq m2
95. radio with low bandwidth Propagation in this range is marked by reflections of the waves in the ionosphere a layer which encloses planet earth at a high of about 60 to 600 kilometers This way almost every 2 points on earth can exchange information sometimes within 24 hours either by ground wave or via reflected waves The ionization depends heavily on the solar radiation so the available propagation paths are a function of the time of the day UO UO data are signals represented in the complex plane by their Inphase and Quadrature parts While the sole amplitude information of a signal is ambiguous regarding the phase the combination of I and Q data identifies the phase positively The magnitude of an UO signal is the square root of I C the phase is arcsin l plus the quadrant information derived from Q LF Low Frequency 30 500 kHz This is the frequency range for medium range information transfer over radio with low bandwidth Propa gation in this case is restricted to ground waves so the coverage is limited to a few 100 kilometers Modem Modem is an abbreviation for modulator demodulator It characterizes a device which is used to transfer information over radio telephone or fiberglass line The information which is to be sent is adapted to the channel so that it can be retrieived as reliable as possible given the characteristics of the channel RCM Receiver Control Modul receiver exe SLEW Link11 is a NATO s
96. signal The following table shows the pos The availability of the input signals depends on the demodulator selected as some demodulators will not sible combinations Primary demod AM FM IF reduced Q I IF reduced Filtered diff magnitude Demodulator gt Input Signal IF Unbuffered Q I IF Unbuffered IF Input Q I Channel Q AGC AFC OI Magnitude Diff Magnitude Frequency Filtered magnitude Filtered Frequency Symbol Decision OI Symbol Decision Symbol Rate Equalizer Q I User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 54 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis e go2DECODE Display Analysis Dis play c Sa O gt Z D a o o nage L3 E el bo m ER E NE pg HEN E NNNM Input Signal y Primarydemod AMW FMI e Is IFreducedQn 1 Je gt Wredued Je fe Je gt Channel PJ Je Ke A KE IES asciarcon 1 Je Mene e KE Nen Hoe EES Magnitude e fe e Ditt Magnitude e Je Je Je Pase Je Je gt OOO Filtered magnitude J Je Je Filtered diff magnitude e Je gt Filtered Frequency 1 Je gt Symbol Decision 01 Je Je Symbol Decision e Je Je ts OO Equatizeron le Ewaier e Je Je Smos je J Table 30 Input Signal and Display Combinations Spectrum Spectrum Sonagram Constellation ALT S Displays of the SDA Spectrum
97. signal will be displayed since the bit display does not support any IF input signal Serialisation This parameter serves to set the dissection mode of the symbols to bits LSB first The least significant bit i e the bit with the least significance of the sym bol is displayed first MSB first The most significant bit i e the bit with the highest significance of the symbol is displayed first Display mode Use this parameter to set the mode in which the bits are displayed If bits are displayed the character left to the slash stands for bit 0 and right to the slash for bit 1 Display the bits as value 0 and X value 1 Sek Display the bits as value 0 and 1 value 1 White Black Display the bits white value 0 and black value 1 LAR Display the bits as L value 0 and H value 1 Symbols Channel A symbol number for every channel is displayed in this display type 0 first channel 1 second channel etc Column Sets the number of the column in which the bit pattern is displayed The column is in the left end of the section to be viewed Sets the number of the row in which the bit pattern is displayed The row is in the upper end of the section to be viewed This parameter cannot be modified unless the display type has been suspended using lt Stop gt Bor D lt Pause gt This parameter serves to select the mode which defines the length of a row Circulation The parameter Circulation
98. socket of your computer to the Line in socket via cable EE Recording Control E i ial xl Optionen 2 CD Player Microphone Aux Video Line In Wave Out Mix iege Balance Balance Balance Balance Balance REGNER Lautst rke Lautst rke Lautst rke Lautst rke Lautst rke KJE JE Ausw hlen Ausw hlen Ausw hlen Ausw hlen Ausw hlen v Ausw hlen SoundMAX Digital Audio Slide down the volume control until the gain display turns green Table 58 DANA Toolbar Icons 94 e DANA Digital Analogue Audio Interface User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Spectrum Display PES D 5000 10000 15000 20000 Hz Figure 95 Input Signal with Filter Range 5 10 kHz In this window the spectrum green of the input signal or output signal in dBFS is displayed above the frequency axis in Hz Additionally the filter range for the signal red is displayed The blue line indicates the selected centre frequency for the IF of the input signal The figure above shows an example of an input signal with a filter range from 5 kHz to 10 kHz The corre sponding output signal with a selected frequency of 8 kHz in this case equal to the signal position in the input signal then looks as follows ru 10000 5000 D 5000 10000 Hz Figure 96 Output Signal with Filter Range and IF Center Frequency 8 kHz Conversion Parameter Setti
99. sr gt 12000 lt sr gt lt sr gt 24000 lt sr gt lt default gt 44800 lt default gt lt samplerate gt lt card gt This table shows the admissible tags and their description Tag Description bitspersample Defines the list box Bits per Sample of the sound device Individual item displayed in list box Bits per Sample Configuration of one sound device Defines the number of channels of the respective sound device default Defines the default value for Sampling rate Bits per sample The value is also displayed as clickable parameter item in the list box 134 e ANNEX 2 Sound Configuration User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Tag Description descriptions Several device description entries are admissible enclosed by the tags lt description gt and lt description gt Note These description entries vary since the descriptions read out from the hardware or drivers will differ under Windows and Linux Table 84 Sound Device Configuration Tags Configuration Example lt cardlist gt lt card gt lt name gt ensonic1371 lt name gt lt descriptions gt lt desc gt Ensonic AudioPCI lt desc gt desc ens1371 AudioPCI lt desc gt lt descriptions gt lt channels gt 7 lt channels gt lt bitspersample gt lt bps gt 8 lt bps gt lt bps gt 16 lt bps gt lt default gt 32 lt default gt z bitspersample lt samplerates gt lt sr gt 12000 lt 3r gt lt sr gt 24000 3r gt lt default gt 44800
100. the buffer In addition you see a rectangular mark around the section in the actual sonagram display Table 33 Spectrum Sonagram Popup Menu Parameters Keyboard Shortcuts In summary the following keyboard shortcuts are available in the spectrum sonagram display Shortcut Function 58 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Shortcut Function Activate and deactivate Z cursors toggle function Activate and deactivate Harmonic cursors toggle function Table 34 Spectrum Sonagram Display Keyboard Shortcuts Parameter Setting As with all displays the spectrum sonagram s parameters are edited on the property sheet which features several tabs Spectrum Sonagram Channel number 1L Centre frequency 0 0 Hz Frequency range 24 000 0 Hz Maximum level 0 0 dB 5 Minimum level 120 0 dB FFT length 31 Exp average 80 000 Windowing Lines second Display mode Peak hold time 10 000 s Peak hold pause Figure 55 Spectrum Sonagram Parameters Tab To show the parameters of the spectrum sonagram select the tab Parameters The following parameters are available Parameter Function Channel Number There are signals that consist of several signal parts e g the input signal channel in an MFSK2 modem The channels of such signals are selected as the input signal by their channel number Use this parameter to select the input signal of the
101. the check box M additional parameters are saved in an XML file This file will be saved in the directory of the Production Memory You can view it with the help of the Production Memory Observer PMO SNR Threshold 32 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 D go2 DECODE Function Adjustment of the signal to noise ratio SNR for the start of the recording This signal will be considered if the recording is set to UK signal or signal identified 40 to 100 The detection depends on the modem parameter The higher the threshold the better the match between modem and signal has to be Dialog Record Demod Output The tab lt Record Demod Output gt serves to edit the maximum number of symbols for this func tion The text box is enabled on pressing the button lt Number of Symbols gt The box lt Result ing file length approx gt indicates the conversion Signal Sources Signal Processing Recording Limits Production Memory Modem Recognition Number of Symbols 500000 Resulting file length approx 4588 kB Record Demod Output Sound Configuration A p pl y Undo e To do so you have to activate the check box M Number of signals and set the rotation field re sulting file length approx to the desired limit The resulting file length will be displayed in kb On selecting the buttons lt Apply gt and lt Undo gt you apply and discard your settings Dialog Audio Configura
102. yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 233 MFSK16 Features Morse General Information Morse code was the first method for data transfer over radio By now it has been mostly replaced by digi tal modes Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation Carrier keyed on off Bandwidth Hz 400 Symbol rate Bd Depending on data rate Data rate cpm 30 300 Table 234 Morse Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 247 gt go2DECODE 15 06 37 500 15 06 35 000 15 06 35 500 15 06 39 000 15 06 39 500 a 50 100 4 mT t 500 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 a 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 He dBFS Figure 249 Morse Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Range cpm 60 125 Tolerance cpm Table 235 Morse Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 236 Morse Features Olivia General Information Olivia is a radio teletype modem developed by radio amateur Pawel Jalocha Usage Transfer of textual information over HF 248 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SS goe DECODE Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation MF
103. 0 15 05 16 500 15 05 17 000 4 F dEF5 o 50 100 1000 800 600 400 200 200 400 600 800 1000 Hz Figure 231 Codan Selcal Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 3 4 discr Symbol rate Bd Modulation order Shift Hz Shift tolerance Hz VER file name codan selcall ver Table 181 Codan Selcal Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Recognition Decoding User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 223 OD go2DECODE Feature Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 182 Codan Selcal Features Coquelet 8 General Information The Coquelet modes were designed for the communications of French customs and police authorities They are similar to the British Piccolo modes Usage Transfer of textual information mostly encrypted over HF Mode Properties Parameter Modulation Number of tones Shift Hz Bandwidth Hz Symbol rate Baud 133 267 Alphabet ITA 2 ATU 80 Table 183 Coquelet 8 Characteristics 15 05 35 500 15 05 36 000 15 05 36 500 15 05 37 000 15 05 37 500 dBF5 1000 800 600 400 200 200 400 SO 800 1000 Hz Figure 232 Coquelet 8 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Coquelet Tone duration ms 37 5 224 e Standar
104. 0 180 s Figure 158 FSK 2 3 autoshift Parameters Multitone MFSK Control Demod Decod Extras Audio eine Tone duration 200 000 ms Tone duration tolerance Mo of tones Tone position type Tone distance 25 000 Hz Min burst length 0 210s Max burst length Min pause length Figure 159 Multitone MFSK Parameters n D Frequency table 0 000 50 000 150 000 200 000 Figure 160 Frequency Table for Multitone Modems Note Similar tables are available with all multitone modems 144 e ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 e go2DECODE Demodulator Additional Settings Multichannel FSK 2 EZ NEN Shift Shift tolerance No of channels fe ri Channel distance 20 000 Hz El Min burst length 0 600 s Max burst length Min pause length Figure 161 Multichannel FSK 2 Parameters G MSK Gauss Windowed Minimum Shift Keying bivalent frequency shift keying with minimum shift modulation index 0 5 Min burst length Max burst length Min pause length 0 180 s Adaptive equaliser E Figure 162 G MSK Parameters Control Demod Demodulator Symbol rate SR tolerance Adaptive equaliser Figure 163 TFM 3 Parameters User Manual go2DEC
105. 0 800 1000 Hz Figure 210 ARQ M4 242 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 3 4 discr 192 Symbol rate Bd SR tolerance Bd Modulation order Shift Hz 173 Modem type Synchronous VER file name arq m4 242 192bd_173hz ver Table 119 ARQ M4 242 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 120 ARQ M4 242 Features i 192 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 goeDECODE ARQ M4 342 General Information ARQ M4 342 is a synchronous full duplex time division multiplex system designed for low error rate ex change of textual data between two stations of governmental authorities Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones 2 Shift Hz 400 Bandwidth Hz 800 Symbol rate Bd 172 192 Alphabet ITA 3 Table 121 ARQ M4 342 Characteristics 15 05 59 500 15 06 00 000 15 06 00 500 15 06 01 000 15 06 01 500 4 dBF5 D 50 100 ill 1000 800 600 400 200 200 400 600 800 1000 Hz Figure 211 ARQ M4 342 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Symbol rate Bd 192 SR tolerance Bd 5 Shift Hz 400 Shift tolerance Hz 10 Z VER file name arq_m4_342 192bd_400hz ver Table 122 ARQ
106. 00 200 00 400 200 0 200 400 600 agg 1000 Hz Figure 226 CIS 8181 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd Shit Hz VER file name cis 81 81 81bd 500hz ver Table 167 CIS 8181 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 168 CIS 8181 Features Clover ll General Information Clover Il mode is a proprietary standard developed by HAL Communications Corp USA 216 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Usage ARQ and broadcast data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter DBPSK DQPSK 8 DPSK 8P2A 16P4A Modulation Number of channels Channel spacing Hz Symbol rate Baud Coding Table 169 Clover Il Characteristics 15 05 14 500 15 05 15 000 15 05 15 500 15 05 16 000 15 05 16 500 dBF5 Figure 227 Clover Il Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Clover II 4 0 540 Demodulator Modulation order Min burst length s Max burst length s 17 824 Min pause length s 0 064 Min burst SNR dB 0 VER file name Table 170 Clover I Demodulator Settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 A o Bandwidth Hz go2DECODE 600 800 1000 Hz Standard Decoders HF e 217 S goeDECODE Tuning The tuni
107. 00 6000 4000 2000 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 Hz Figure 284 FLEX Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Symbol rate Bd 1600 Shift Hz 9600 Shift tolerance Hz VER file name flex 1600bd fsk2 Table 340 FLEX Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the lowest tone Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Decoding FFSK 2 yes FFSK 4 no Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 341 FLEX Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 297 OD go2DECODE FMS BOS General Information The radio reporting system German FunkMeldeSystem FMS for agencies and organizations with safety assignments German Beh rden und Organisationen mit Sicherheitsaufgaben BOS is a radio communication system for security authorities and organizations Usage VHF security related communications Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation primary FM secondary FSK Shit tz e0 Bandwidth Hz Symbol rate Bd Table 342 FMS BOS Characteristics 15 07 37 000 15 07 37 500 15 07 36 000 15 07 36 500 15 07 39 000 4 k 0 0000000 dBF5 m ee 100 2B 1200 1000 500 Sall 400 200 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 Hz Figure 285 FMS BOS Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 3 4 discr Symbol rate Bd 1200 emm wo Shift tolerance
108. 000 2000 i000 O 1000 32000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 000 9000 Hz Figure 290 POCSAG Spectrogram Demodulator Settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 305 go2 DECODE Parameter Default Symbol rate Bd 1200 Shift Hz 8500 Shift tolerance Hz 500 VER file name pocsag_1200bd ver Table 358 POCSAG Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal s frequency range Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 359 POCSAG Features TETRA General Information TErrestrial TRunked rAdio TETRA is a standard for digital voice and data mobile communication over radio The standard has been released by ETSI organisation More than 100 countries across Europe Middle East Africa Asia Pacific Caribbean and Latin America are using TETRA systems The standard is being updated and extended continuously by ETSI Usage Communication in the VHF UHF frequency range among closed user groups such as public safe ty military industry and transportation Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation DQPSK Bandwidth Hz 25000 Symbol rate Bd 18000 Table 360 TETRA Characteristics 306 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 14 03 16 000 14 05 16 500 14 03 17 000 14 03 17 500 14m 18 nnm dBF5 100 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuni
109. 000 Input filter Output signal Hz Remove DC EI Frequency 1 800 000 Hz Full span v IF from WAY fle El ole ls Spectrum Sonagram Start frequency 300 000 Hz Mirror cens Dus a T Parameters Cursor Extras End frequency 3300 000 Hz Time source File Y 5 100 2 Bd E no sync 100 1 Bd Channel number 1 g 43 192 2 Bd A 186 7 Bd Input signal LIF input v C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq m2 242 ne syne 288 2 Bd Ee Sa C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq m2 342 MT no sync 102 7 Bd Ed 7 C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq m4 242 Down j Frequency range 13025 0Hz C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq m4 342 Remove C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq n plnk 3 Maximum level 0 0 dB 5 C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo ascii 7 11 plr Remove all C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo ascii 8 12 plr Sort Minimum level 120 0 dB D SE Files A ERE E 43 ease pin V Play List 1 FFT length 512 sl Y Loop j Exp average 80 000 Windowing Hanning Y 12 vU LK BRU e UMP VE E LA THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 Lines second 100 s THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 pientaw mode el 7 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG
110. 152733 464 0000000000 ZF 15 27 33 19002 Emission 15 28 33 Production memory C mem prod O0 1 A Figure 110 User Interface with Popup Menu Control of PMO The popup menu of PMO provides useful tools for playing exporting and file or emission handling Play File Export Export Ea Close Emission Figure 111 Popup Menu PMO When exporting the files and emissions are converted from raw file into wav format On clicking Export the file is saved to the most recent directory without any confirmation prompt default directory is the us er s home directory in cases of doubt please consult your system administrator Export to opens a Save File dialog box for selection of the desired directory 104 e PMO Production Memory Observer User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Manual Analysis of Unknown Signals go2DECODE is an efficient tool for manual analysis and processing of unknown modulated signals There are three different basic processing steps e Determine modulation parameters e Demodulate signal e Decode contents The following table provides typical measuring and processing functions Function Application Examples Spectrum Sonagram Display Input signal monitoring Bandwidth measurement Measurement of signal start or signal end Burst length measurement Measurement of shift with FSK Spectrum Display Frequency and level measurements Squaring to detect PSK signals Eye Pattern Display Measurement and co
111. 17 HFDL Demodulator Settings Table 218 HFDL Features reser Table 219 HNG FEC Characteristics Table 220 HNG FEC Demodulator Settings Table 221 HNG FEC Features Table 222 MD674 Characteristics Table 223 MD674 Demodulator Settings Table 224 MD674 Features Table 225 MEROD Characteristics Table 226 MEROD Demodulator Settings Table 227 MEROD Features Table 228 MFSK8 Characteristics Table 229 MFSK8 Demodulator Settings Table 230 MFSK8 Features Table 231 MFSK16 Characteristics Table 232 MFSK16 Demodulator Settings Table 233 MFSK16 Features Table 234 Morse Characteristics Table 235 Morse Demodulator Settings Table 236 Morse Features enne Table 237 Olivia Characteristics Table 238 Olivia Demodulator Settings Table 239 Olivia Features eese Table 240 Packet 300 Characteristics Table 241 Packet 300 Demodulator Settings Table 242 Packet 300 Features Table 243 PACTOR Characteristics Table 244 PACTOR I Demodulator Settings Table 245 PACTOR I Features Table 246 PACTOR I FEC Characteristics Table 247 PACTOR FEC Demodulator Settings Table 248 PACTOR FEC Features Table 249 PACTOR II Characteristics Table 250 PACTOR II Demodulator Settings Table 251 PACTOR II Features Table 252 PACTOR II FEC Characteristics Table 253 PACTOR II FEC Demodulator Settings Table 254 PACTOR II FEC Features Table 255 PACTOR III Characteristics Table 256 PACTOR III De
112. 21 TT 121 Automatic Command Completion 1nnnnseoo0eannnnnensennnnnnnnnnsennnrrrrennnnnrnrrnrssnnnrnrrrennennrerreenne 122 Decoder 5taluS Da 123 Example of a Decoder Program sess n nnne nnne 124 Decoder Dala FO 125 Result Display on Calling the Command dent 127 Message on Successful COMpilatiON cccooconncnnccccccncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnonanonnnononancnnnnnnnancnnnnnonanennnoss 128 IS Play OF RUNM ENO dE EE ica 128 sound Contiguration Dialog BOX EE 133 CONNU iO E ee 135 ie ee 141 PN 142 Morse Parameters rr A NA AAA pa qa 142 FAP NN 142 FP PP NNN 142 FSK2 matched Parameters ccccccccocccnncccnoncconcnononncnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanrnnnnnnnanrnnnnnnnanennnoss 143 Frequency to Symbol Conversion Table nnnnnnn0000annnnneoneennnnnnnnnsrnnnnnnrnnnsnnnrrrnerssnnnrrreeennne 143 FR 9 4 disor PAPE een 143 FSK 2 3 autoshitt Para Mel Ss isc 144 Multitone MFSK Parameters oooocccncccccoccnncccononcnnnonononononononancnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnanennnonnnanennnoss 144 List of Figures e 327 SS Figure 160 Figure 161 Figure 162 Figure 163 Figure 164 Figure 165 Figure 166 Figure 167 Figure 168 Figure 169 Figure 170 Figure 171 Figure 172 Figure 173 Figure 174 Figure 175 Figure 176 Figure 177 Figure 178 Figure 179 Figure 180 Figure 181 Figure 182 Figure 183 Figure 184 Figure 185 Figure 186 Figure 187 Figure 188 Fig
113. 210 Globe Wireless PSK Characteristics 236 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE 15 05 53 000 15 05 53 500 15 05 54 000 15 05 54 500 15 05 55 000 dBF5 1000 800 600 400 200 0 200 400 500 800 1000 Hz Figure 241 Globe Wireless PSK Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator DPSK 2 4 8 16 A B SR tolerance Bd Modulation order 20 5 4 Version A Symbol rate Bd 0 B Min pause length s 0 100 VEH file name gw psk 200bd psk4 ver Table 211 Globe Wireless PSK Demodulator Settings Min burst length s 0 400 d s Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature RSC n yes es es es O es Decoding Y Automatic Polarity Adjustment no Combination with other modems modem list y n Table 212 Globe Wireless PSK Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 237 D go2DECODE G TOR General Information G TOR mode is a proprietary standard developed by Kantronics Inc and is used by radio amateurs mili tary Irish Air Corps Navy Mexican army and governmental agencies ICRC Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value 2 Number of tones Shit a Symbol rate Bd 100 200 300 Coding Golay code Interleaving CRC Alphabet ITA 5 Table 213 G TOR Characteristics 15 06 47
114. 3 1 Demo sitor b plnk Down C Progr amp m Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo si arq plnk Remove C ProgrBm Files x86 go2S5IGNALS go2DECODE 3 8 1 Demo si fec plnk TF C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo swed arq plnk Remove all C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo twinplex pink Sort C Progfam Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo voice selcal icao plnk 7 Play List gt CP iles x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 examples dana DemoSpeechUSB wil 4 m p Loop 3 KY top SRin 44100 00Hz SRout 44100 00 Hz ink connected KW go2SIGNALS l Source File APC Ready DANA C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 examples dana De File Control Extras Help d File HH Output to IF SDA SD DE Output to IFSDA v dBF5 0 25 50 75 100 125 3 150 xm 2 20000 15000 10000 5000 0 5000 10000 15000 20000 Hz Predefined frequencies No predefined frequencies v Input filter Output signal Remove DC Frequency 04800 000 Hz Fogn IF from WAV file Start frequency 0 000 Hz Mirror End frequency 12 500 000 Hz Time source System clock v C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo rum fec plnk perm C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo sitor a plnk C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo sitor b plnk Down C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo si arq pink Remove C Pro
115. 342 96bd 400hz ver ARQ M2 342 200Bd X ar m2 342 200bd 410hz ver 410Hz ARQ M4 242 OX ar m4 242 192bd 173hz ver IN User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 6 List of Decoders e 169 go2DECODE Modem Det ASCII 7Bit ASCII 8Bit AUTOSPEC Baudot sync 200Bd 850Hz Baudot sync 2 stopbit 50Bd 450Hz Baudot sync 2 stopbit 75Bd 500Hz Baudot async 1 5 Stopbit 50Bd 450Hz Baudot async 1 5 Stopbit 50Bd 170Hz X X X X CCIR 518 Variant CIS 81 81 170 e ANNEX 6 List of Decoders O Q X CIS 36 50 Same as Modem File asci 7bit 100bd 173hz ver P ascii 8bit 180bd 500hz ver autosp over S E LS F7B Morse Baudot CI 3650 gt X X X X baudot async 50bd 170hz ver bulg ascii 75bd 510hz ver F7B Morse Baudot F7B Morse Baudot ARQ M2 242 ARQ M4 242 moe ICE moma gt stora copans e gt BEE e 90 ARQ6 98 POL ARQ ao gt fete EIN HERO e cz peer e pattern SO festa ase S o o 0 e O eor OOO ooo o osp SEET os A o Wer Lane cover 20008readeastver Lann me cover es00eroadeastver exaeper User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Same as Modem File codan_selcall ver codan3212 16channel psk ver Modem Det x nel PSK nel PSK Coquelet 8 FEC Coquelet 80 O Q X X X CODAN Selcal CIS 36 coquelet 80 ver Alcatel 801H IO as 20000 mkwr oo ee O O e EE Wm oo
116. 50 100 1000 1000 Hz Figure 251 Packet 300 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings 250 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 3 4 discr Symbol rate Bd 300 Shift Hz 200 Shift tolerance Hz Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s Table 241 Packet 300 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment yes Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 242 Packet 300 Features PACTOR I General Information Pactor l mode is a proprietary standard developed by SCS GmbH amp Co KG Hanau Germany Usage Data communication over HF In successive standards Pactor ll and Pactor Ill the mode Pactor l is used during the call set up Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones Shift Hz 200 Bandwidth Hz 300 Symbol rate Bd 100 200 Table 243 PACTOR I Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 251 d go2 DECODE 15 07 20 500 15 07 21 000 15 07 21 500 15 07 22 000 15 07 22 500 dBF5 50 100 1000 500 600 400 200 200 400 600 GU 1000 Hz Figure 252 PACTOR I Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd Shit He Shift tolerance Hz Modem
117. 500 Hz Pulse shape m v Rolloff 0 800 Spectrum Sonagram Parameters Cursor Extras Maximum level 21 5 dB A Minimum level 140 0 dB FFT length ER v Exp average 80 000 Windowing Hanning v Lines second 100 s Display mode Lines Z Peak hold time 1 000s Peak hold pause Pause Autorange Peak hold S go2SIGNALS Source Sound Figure 189 Signal Generation Using SOMO This input signal is then filtered from 4 000 Hz to 5 000 Hz and shifted by 4 500 Hz using DANA D DANA Sound ders 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 3 120 130 140 150 0 2500 Predefined frequencies A sound 9 r P NM M sunasource v 5000 7500 10000 12500 15000 17500 20000 22500 Hz No predefined frequencies Input filter Remove DC v Full span Start frequency End frequency 4000 000 Hz 00 000 Hz Output signal Frequency IF from WAV file Mirror Time source Stop SRin 48000 00 Hz SRout 48000 00 Hz a Sink connected 04 500 000 Hz T go2sIGNALS Filter Limits D DANA Sound d Ex dBF5 gt m I ouwutiorsoa Stop SRin 48000 00Hz SRout 48000 00 Hz sink connected 20000 10000 D 10000 20000 Hz Predefined FET NT No predefined frequencies x Input filter Output signal Remove DC 4 Frequency 04500 000
118. 6 220 Z M InN n E DGIDIEIDIESIED E ELSIE DI gt gt gt The following table provides a detailed description of the parameters User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 138 e ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters OD go2DECODE Parameter Function Adaptive These parameters serve to switch the LMS transmission channel equalization on and off This compensates distortions that occur during transmission LMS Least Mean Squares is the applied equalizing algorithm equalizer Audio in file Activate the recording of wav files by means of these parameters This requires saving the active IF If this function records the signal a wav file is recorded simultaneously BT This is the product of 3dB bandwidth and symbol duration and is a specific characteristic of GMSK Typical values are e g 0 25 for Tetrapol 0 3 for GSM and 0 5 for DECT lt Burst mode gt This parameter serves to switch the burst mode on or off The following three parameters are only available in burst mode Bursted signals only exist within a period defined by means of the burst length Between such periods they have a pause defined by means of the pause length Channel1 Defines the absolute phase of channel 1 in mode OFDM abs phase Channel1 Defines the differential phase of channel 1 in mode OFDM diff phase Channel Defines the distance between the individual channels distance Channel Choose between the lists items Channel distance and Channel frequencies posit
119. 62 DANA Play List Parameters nn00nnnnannnnannnnnannnonnnnnnnnnnrnnrrnnnnrrrnnrrnrnnrrrnnnrrnnnrrennrrrrnnrrnnnrrrnnnrrene 99 Table 63 DANA Status Bar Panels cooncnccconnnnccconcnccconcnncocnononnononcnnononnnnnononnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnonannnnononnnnnonanenons 100 Table 64 Measuring and Processing Funchons 106 Table 65 Decoder Editor Color Assignments eene nnne nnne nnn nnns nnns 118 Table 66 Decoder Editor Menu Hemes aannnnannnnaannnnennnnnnnnnoannnnnanrnonnrrnnnnrnrnnrrennnrrrnnrrrnnnrrrnnnrennnrrrenrrennnnne 119 Table 67 Decoder Editor File Menu Items nn n0annnnannnnnannnnannnnnannnnnnnnnnannnonnnrnnnnrrrnnrrnnnnrrrnnrrennnrrrenrrenennee 120 Table 68 Decoder Editor Edit Menu ItemS 121 Table 69 Decoder Editor Extras Menu Wems 121 Table 70 Decoder Editor Toolbar ICONS coccooocccccconcnnccconcnccconnnnononnnnnonononnnnonnnnononnnnnononnnnononnnnnnnanenoss 122 Table 71 Decoder Editor Shortcuts 000nnnnannnnaannnnannnnnnnnnonnnnnnannnonnrreranrnrnnrrennnrrrnnrrrnnnrrrnnrrrnnnrrennnrennnene 122 Table 72 DDL Search COMMANGS soosssspheteutta stad iebatedkrisdu dt tabtPastusdutcs toiebedbsadods circa do iaeiiai 125 Table 73 DDE Read KE e Tun un Tue uassisscetezt abtsasktkbn Init ua duse ciin triana ia rab phus ainda dato cinic aia ck Main init Ra dut U pos 125 Table 74 DDL Bit Maniupulation Commande 126 Table 75 DDL Check and Correction Commands occcccoccncccconcncononcnnononnnnnonononcnnonn
120. 750 1500 Demodulator Settings Tuning 1000 750 500 250 o 250 s500 ZU 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 Hz Figure 243 HFDL Spectrogram Parameter Default Demodulator PSK data added Symbol rate Bd SH tolerance Bd Modulation order Shift Hz Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s VER file name hfdl psk2 ver Table 217 HFDL Demodulator Settings The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment yes i LN Feature Demodulation y n n es O es O es Combination with other modems modem list 240 e Standard Decoders HF Table 218 HFDL Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 a go2DECODE HNG FEC General Information HNG FEC is a full duplex system used by the Ministry of Foreign Affairs in Hungary This modem is not used any more Usage ransfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones 2 Shift Hz 500 Symbol rate Bd 100 5 Coding Interleaving Parity bits Alphabet ITA 2 Table 219 HNG FEC Characteristics 15 05 53 500 15 05 54 000 15 05 54 500 15 05 55 000 15 05 55 500 dBFS D 50 100 1000 DUU DUU 400 200 200 400 600 DUU 1000 Hz Figure 244 HNG FEC Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd 5 Shi Hz Shift tolerance Hz VER file name
121. 77 ZVEI Features 314 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Ss go2DECODE Appendix License terms THIS SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN PLATH AG AND THE END USER OF THE INCLUDED SOFTWARE AND SOURCE FILES TOGETHER THE SOFTWARE YOU MUST READ THIS EULA CAREFULLY AND ACCEPT ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET OUT BELOW BEFORE YOU ARE ENTITLED TO USE THE SOFTWARE By clicking the ACCEPT button PLATH AG grants you LICENSEE a non exclusive non transferable and limited license to install and use the SOFTWARE strictly in accordance with the terms and conditions of this EULA and our General Conditions of Sale published on www go2signals ch The license must be legally acquired The protected software or the product itself can only be op erat ed simultaneously up to the amount of acquired licenses LICENSEE shall not disassemble decompile or reverse engineer the SOFTWARE nor translate adapt modify lease rent loan redistribute sub lease sub license or create derivative works of from the SOFTWARE LICENSEE shall not use nor display the SOFTWARE on any public bulletin board ftp site web site chat room or in any other media available to the public The SOFTWARE may not be copied without the consent of PLATH AG Any manipulation of the license e g the amount validity or to circumvent the license is prohibit ed Such actions will result in automatic
122. 8 Search for Repeating Frames in Demodulated Bit Stream 115 Select Audio Output 133 Service 129 Short Description of the Programs 3 Shortcuts 37 Shortcuts for Decoder Creation 122 Show Parameter Information 123 SI ARQ 268 SI FEC 269 Signal Memory 24 Signal processing with the SDA 53 SITOR A 271 SITOR B 272 SLEW 321 SNR 321 SOMO Subject to the delivered version 4 24 Sound Configuration 51 Sources 5 SP14 274 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Spectrum Display 65 95 Spectrum Sonagram Display 55 Spectrum Sonagram Specific Display Controls 56 SPREAD 51 275 Standard Decoders HF 177 Standard Decoders VHF UHF 281 Start Compiler 127 Start of DANA 89 Start of PMO 101 Starting go2DECODE 21 Starting the Software 17 Status 178 180 181 183 184 186 188 189 191 192 194 195 197 198 200 201 203 204 206 207 209 210 212 213 215 216 218 219 222 223 225 226 228 229 230 232 233 235 236 237 239 240 242 243 244 245 247 248 249 251 252 254 255 256 258 259 261 262 263 265 266 267 269 270 272 273 275 276 278 279 280 282 284 285 287 288 289 290 292 293 295 296 297 299 300 302 303 305 306 307 309 310 311 313 314 Status Bar 99 Support 129 SWED ARQ 276 System Requirements 9 T Tab Audio for Audio Out Parameter Setting 50 Tab Extras for Modem Parameter Setting 48 TETRA 306 Tetrapol 308 Time Eye Pattern Display 69 Toolbar
123. ATEL General Information The NATEL SelCal standard was defined by the Scandinavian National Telephone Usage Narrowband FM SelCal system in the VHF UHF frequency range Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation Multitone Table 351 NATEL Characteristics 302 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SN go2DECODE 15 07 43 500 15 07 44 000 15 07 44 500 15 07 45 000 15 07 45 500 dBF5 Bi n v n MR o MEL M s NE 2000 1750 1500 1250 1000 EN 500 250 250 500 en 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 Hz Figure 288 NATEL Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Analogue Selcall Tone duration ms SELCAL type NATEL Min burst length s 0 280 Max burst length s 1 000 Min pause length s 0 070 Min burst SNR dB Table 352 NATEL Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal s frequency range Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 353 NATEL Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 303 Q go2 DECODE NMT450 General Information The Nordic Mobile Telephone standard NMT 450 is an analog mobile telephone system developed by Telecommunications Administrations of Denmark Finland Norway and Sweden Usage Public mobile phone network on UHF 450 MHz 900 MHz with some restrictions Mode Properties Paramet
124. Agreement Installing the Dongle Version On the dongle version you will see the following WinZip Self Extractor dialog WinZip Self Extractor WkRt Int exe Welcome to the WibuKey Runtime Kit version 6 00a Setup Build 129 2009 12 03 Please click Setup to install the Setup Figure 5 Welcome Message The WIBU Key Software setup program will be launched automatically within a few moments showing the following dialog box Welcome to the WibuKey Software Setup program This program will install Wibukey Software on your computer It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs and the control panel before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click sMext to continue with the Setup program Version 6 003 Cancel Figure 6 WibuKey Setup Follow the instructions on screen and press lt Next gt User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Installation of the Program e 11 Please select the languages that WibuKey should support 7 E ngli sh French German Italian Hungarian Japanese Portuguese Spanish Figure 7 Select Language Now select the language you wish to be supported The language of your operating system will be detect ed and checked automatically Activate the button Next to continue Setup will install the VWibukey Tools in the following folder To install to this folder click Neste To install t
125. Analysis e 51 or Ae dsip uongiaisuo e dsip ujo3jed aa ejdsip eu adojanuad euBis jo winsjoeds ueJ1beuos uinjj2eds zen 000 o0 CO D tH os 0 mei 005 og H os 005 os r or 000 tE Sr 11 SN Dr 1 3 S ae 000 Sv 11 F og a i ae j sl ue 0000 Sr 11 ier I ee See e r I rana e ES Se me 000 82 grut jor ee f Z rei wo 000 8 5011 sc r gt or we 000 vC 5e 11 x oe sy Og PT OP LL E 00022 srst E a af me 000 OF OI 65 000 vC Or 11 wo zo qua os 08 ET OP LI we UY 00091 srt sr JS GT mo 000 ri Srt or 008 EZ Op 11 vs we Se see wo 000 TI Sra Ot ET Op 11 ap 00001 Stt ES wi St 003 ET OP LI or 000 80 Sr 11 Me JE Ing e Wee UU Sei SE ENE EET r EDITE ae e DA EAT me e D4 poe Lee KE E L oe BE EMT Be e MT AS Se Sgr OR reg uepo Sead wa i ai sgr A eg wa mei wi SR dei sep VspoW seag MAK 193 mi gr deH MODUM WOR wei waa 3 aim o A 4 A P d s d d o 1 b i i i H H H H H E S i E k AT D ig iz ages So AD i im x ie iQ Q 019 c SU PNG E d 1 is 3 0 RANT O SL ig ig E SS SP SN g e a y _ 2 5 D SJOQUU S JE I JeuBis Jo BunuenUuoy umog ef epnyubeu up eseud Ee uoisioep joquu s J A09 1 aye Joqui s ere UoNeE NPOLUSP apnyubew 4 pay arewu CCET amp i i i Joyejnpowep esjanun su tH Du E og 05 or 0 0 cost 0001 gt pool 0061 09001 0058 0005 0052 0 oost ms Dr 00001 er KA bu st i
126. Analysis of Unknown Signals 105 Activate Manual Analysis ooccccconncncccocconononcnnocnannnconononnnnoncnnononnnnnonancnnonancnnenanens 106 Analyze FSK Ce EIN 106 Adapt Display Area to Input Signal cccccccconnnnncccnoncnonononanononononanenos 106 Measure Signal Centre and Chute 108 Determine Symbol Rate in Sonagram c ooccccccnnncccncccnnnnccnncnnnancnncnonanncinenos 110 Determine Symbol Rate by Spectrum via Envelope 112 Determine Symbol Rate by Measurement in Time Signal 113 Measure Shift and Baud Rate via Demodulator 114 Search for Repeating Frames in Demodulated Bit Stream 115 DECIAN RE UE US US EI 116 Save Modem coccccooccncccoccnncccncnncononcnnnnonnnnononnnnnononnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnonannnnonenenininos 116 iv e Contents User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 OD go2DECODE Decoder Adaptation and Development 117 AAC A 117 A le 118 E Ge ter E 118 Menu PV 119 Tb 121 Shortcuts for Decoder Creation oooncccncccconcconccononncnnnnononnnnnnnonannnnnnnnnnos 122 Context Sensitive Help 122 Automatic Command Completion cocccoocccnncccccnncnncnononccnnononanennnononanenos 122 Automatic Indentation assistance 123 Show Parameter Iniormaton 123 Compile DENON escri 123 Decoder Source Code Structure ooooonnccnnnccccccnonnccnnnnnonononancnnnnnononnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnos 123 Compile and Operate
127. CONGRATULATIONS YOU ARE SUCCESSFULLY DEMODULATING AND DECODING THE ANALYZED FSK 2 SIGNAL HERZLICHEN GLUECEWUNSCH SIE DEMODULIEREN UND DEECDIEREN DAS ANALYSIERTE FSE 2 SIGNAL ERFLOGREICH Figure 131 The Decoded Text is shown in the Result Display Save Modem At this point the essential parameters of your modem have been defined Edit the name in the drop down list box Modem on the control property sheet e g My first modem or FSK2 450 50 Baudot11 Save the modem by selecting the menu item Save modem to file on the Modem menu Enter the desired file name e g test or my fsk ver and click the button Save In the automatic mode of go2DECODE the modems analyzed will be recognized automatically 116 e Manual Analysis of Unknown Signals User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 D go2 DECODE Decoder Adaptation and Development Provided the source code for the supplied decoders is available you may adapt or modify the decoders to suit your requirements Additionally new decoders can be created to execute other modems by use of the description language DDL Decoder Description Language DDL is a simple programming language de veloped specifically for signal decoding tasks Create Decoder The following figure is an overview of all elements required to create and operate a decoder Demodulator Decoder Decoder Development Application Source Code Output Figure 132 Overview of Decoder Creation The decoder function is en
128. DECODE 3 3 1 setup is complete oos SIGNALS Click Finish to close the Setup Assistant To view the documents provided you must install Adobe Reader Y y Read ReadMe Figure 20 Installation Completion Select the respective check box to read the Readme file to this installation and to install Acrobat Reader Push lt Finish gt to exit the setup Connecting the Dongle Subsequently connect the USB dongle to a free USB port of your computer In case the dongle had been connected before please disconnect the dongle make a restart and reconnect the dongle to the port Your installation is complete Starting the Software Starts the main Application or the individual added applications either using the desktop icons or go2DECODE program group on the start menu Name Description Application Start go2DECODE including SDA DANA etc Start SOMO Software Modulation Signal Generator Subject to the delivered version Decoder Debugger Start Decoder Debugger only Subject to the delivered version Uninstall go2DECODE Uninstall go2DECODE with all its components Apply for license In the subfolder target open the Request_license pdf file explaining how to apply for an go2DECODE license User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Installation of the Program e 17 S go2DECODE Table 4 Desktop Icons Uninstallation Select Uninstall go2DECODE in the go2DECODE programs group in the start menu or as an alternative s
129. Demodulator 114 Measure Signal Centre and Shift 108 Menu and Shortcuts 27 Menu Bar 91 119 MEROD 243 MFSK16 246 MFSK8 244 Mode Properties 177 179 180 182 183 185 187 188 190 191 193 194 196 197 199 200 202 203 205 206 208 209 211 212 214 215 217 218 220 222 224 225 227 228 229 231 232 234 235 236 238 239 241 242 243 245 246 247 249 250 251 253 254 256 257 258 260 261 263 264 265 267 268 269 271 272 274 275 277 278 279 281 283 284 286 287 288 290 291 292 294 295 296 298 299 301 302 304 305 306 308 309 310 312 313 Modem 321 Modem List 43 Modem List Menu 34 Modem Menu 34 Morse 247 MPT1327 301 N NATEL 302 Navigation in SDA Main Window 38 NMT450 304 O Olivia 248 Operation 24 Operation of DANA 91 Operation of PMO 102 340 e Index P Packet 300 250 PACTOR I 251 PACTOR I FEC 253 PACTOR II 254 PACTOR II FEC 255 PACTOR III 257 Parameter Setting 40 59 65 70 74 78 81 85 Piccolo MK12 260 Piccolo MK6 258 Play Files 99 Play List 97 PMO Production Memory Observer 101 POCSAG 305 POL ARQ 261 Port Configuration 51 Protected Decoders 48 PSK10 262 PSK10 AM 264 PSK31 265 R RCM 321 Restriction 302 Result Display 39 RUM FEC 266 S oave Modem 116 SDA 5 SDA Signal Display and Analysis 27 SDA in the DEMO Mode 157 SDA Operating Modes 24 SDA Signal Displays 51 SDA User Interface 3
130. Dongle Version 9 dPMR 290 DSC 229 291 DUP ARQ 231 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 OD go2DECODE E Edit Decoder 118 Edit Menu 28 120 EEA 292 EIA 294 Euro 295 Extras 63 69 73 77 80 83 86 Extras Menu 29 121 F Features of PMO 102 FEG 320 FEC A 232 FFT 320 File Menu 27 92 120 FLEX 296 FMS BOS 298 FSK 400 500 233 G General 1 General Information 177 179 180 182 183 185 187 188 190 191 193 194 196 197 199 200 202 203 205 206 208 209 211 212 214 215 216 218 220 222 224 225 227 228 229 231 232 233 235 236 238 239 241 242 243 244 246 247 248 250 251 253 254 255 257 258 260 261 262 264 265 266 268 269 271 272 274 275 276 278 279 281 283 284 286 287 288 290 291 292 294 295 296 298 299 301 302 304 305 306 308 309 310 312 313 Generating Signals Using SOMO 162 Globe Wireless FSK 235 Globe Wireless PSK 236 go2ANALYSE 2 go2DECODE 2 go2MONITOR 2 go2RECORD 2 go2SIGNALS 2 Golay Pager 299 G TOR 238 H Hell Display 81 Help Menu 36 121 HF 321 HFDL 239 Highlight Function 86 HNG FEC 241 Index e 339 OD go2DECODE UO 321 Initial Configuration 102 Installation 10 Installation of the Program 9 Installing the Dongle Version 11 Introduction to go2DECODE 3 L LF 321 License terms 315 Load Editor 118 Manual Analysis of Unknown Signals 105 MD674 242 Measure Shift and Baud Rate via
131. Hz 298 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Parameter Default Min burst length s 0 120 Max burst length s 1 200 Min pause length s 0 150 Table 343 FMS BOS Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Table 344 FMS BOS Features Golay Pager General Information Golay Pager is a paging protocol developed by Motorola Inc Another designation for this modem type is Golay Sequential Code GSC Usage Alert and status messages emergency services etc on VHF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK St He bandwith Ha Symbol rate Bd Golay 23 12 and BCH 15 7 Table 345 Golay Pager Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 299 go2DECODE 15 08 28 000 15 09 28 500 15 09 29 000 15 09 29 500 15 08 30 000 4 Hr t 0 0000000 deFs D 50 100 2000 1750 1500 1250 1000 750 500 250 0 250 Sut 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 Hz Figure 286 Golay Pager Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd 60 SR tolerance Bd Shift Hz 2000 Shift tolerance Hz VER file name golay_pager ver Table 346 Golay Pager Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulati
132. Input Signal Parameters The analysis of the intermediate signals after the individual process steps not only serves to check the demodulator functions but also enhances the range of available analyzing methods For example periodi cal fluctuations in the signal energy and thus the symbol rate can be measured using the input signal magnitude with the help of the spectrum Another example is to use the input filter of the demodulator The input signal can be used for the separation of the signal to be analyzed from a signal mix elimination of distortions User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 53 oO MM j Je TT IT Fe Te 29 M NNN MNNM EM va od Bal E eee I I IT EN Ux eee ee TATT TT acc cose I Je FT AST ee ee E ME MM 91 1 dd MA MM id AEE O bd sj EE o ees EEE la a osos o eee OO la a A go eee ee eee a TL aver osa a v v z saon A O A IN E Be ee ee eee TT IT ET EN Gees i ikd eee I O ee t PETE aver MIA A Aejd Sig sisAjeuy ejdsiq 119H ejdsig ug Aejdsig uJoned EI ejdsig uonej o1suo av 3 r z sd e bd bibi MN je t t5 Amt eee ee eee II Je Fe Dd a ain SE AE TATE NAA SSE TE JA EE uwelBbeuos unaoeds un199ds Table 29 Input Signal and Demodulator Combinations O Q O ele D D i he O0 i gt 2 2 C E Lu Input Signal Display 3 y go2DECODE calculate every signal and some displays cannot display every
133. M asters amp ppD ata Local Temps WZsE0 T Selected languages English The following components will be installed Wibukev driver files Wibuker COM control WIBU SYSTEMS Winb4 64 variant Shell Extension Wibuker network server Wibuker tools Back Next gt Cancel Figure 11 Tasks of WibuKey Installation In the next dialog verify your selections To make a change press the button lt Back gt otherwise strike lt Next gt to continue The installation starts and its progress is shown in the dialog below If vou press s Mest the following tasks will be performed Operating system Windows Source path CA UsersyMasterv ppD ataL aca Temp W25E1 T Selected languages English The following components will be installed Wibukey driver files Wbuk en COM control WIBLU SY STEMS winb4 54 variant Shell Extension Wbuk eu network server Wbuk eu tools Copying files done Venfying language modules done Installing files Back see Cancel Figure 12 WibuKey Installation Progress User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Installation of the Program e 13 S go2DECODE Once all items have been successfully processed the button lt Next gt is active again click lt Next gt The WIBU Key Software setup is complete WibuKey Software Setup is complete Setup can launch the Readme help file with the latest product informations IV Yes want to view the Readme text now Click
134. Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Parameter Default Max burst length s 0 260 Min pause length s 0 200 VER file name arq_6 90 ver Table 101 ARQ 6 90 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment yes Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 102 ARQ 6 90 Features ARQ 6 98 General Information ARQ 6 98 is an ARQ mode similar to SITOR for the exchange of teletype data over a radio channel in a robust way Usage Basic data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones Shift Hz 200 Bandwidth Hz 400 Symbol rate Bd 200 ARO Alphabet CCIR 476 Table 103 ARQ 6 98 Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 183 Ka go2DECODE 19 04 Lo DU 15 04 19 000 15 04 19 500 15 04 20 000 15 04 20 500 O 0000000 dBFS 50 100 1000 200 00 400 00 0 200 400 600 500 1000 Hz Figure 204 ARQ 6 98 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 3 4 discr Symbol rate Bd 200 SR tolerance Bd Modulation order Shift Hz IA Shift tolerance Hz Modem type Synchronous Min burst length s 0 065 Max burst length s 0 260 Min pause length s 0 150 VER file name arq_6 98 ver Table 104 ARQ 6 98 Demodulator
135. Message Modem detected OutText Frame l Qutput af ACII Text on output channel 1 Else gt If search failed Fail Message Modem not detected EndIf GoTo Newsyne Jump back to program start END Figure 196 Decoder Programming The following files are available for this purpose in the directory Source code Examplele txt examples ddl Compiled code Example1e bin examples ddl Suitable signal Example1 wav examples ddl To test the program proceed as follows Create a new modem list Create a modem named Test in this modem list using the following settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 5 Examples e 165 e e goeDECODE Modem Test e Modem Test an Demod Decod Extras Aude Control Demod Decod Extras Aude penest EA Symbol rate 50 000 Bd Abbreviation SR tolerance 5 000 Bd Decoder type Local Shift 450 000 Hz Shift tolerance 10 000 Hz iul ode be Min burst length Max burst length 1 000 s Min pause length 0 100 s E T Figure 197 Demodulator Decoder Settings Start DANA with a centre frequency setting of 1 800 Hz and the source Sound Start the file Example1 wav via a media player Start automatic production Automat The result display will show a positive message of the production automat together with the decoded text Result display Paused 27 11 07 15 36 53 005 search end 27 11 07 15 36 48 990
136. Modulation FSK Shift Hz 492 Bandwidth Hz 700 Symbol rate 8d I Start 8 Dala 2 Stop Bit Table 130 ASCII 8 Bit Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 197 go2eDECODE 15 04 32 500 15 04 40 000 15 04 40 500 15 04 41 000 15 04 41 500 4 HL j 0 0000000 dBF5 D 50 100 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 U 200 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 He Figure 214 ASCII 8 Bit Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd 180 SR tolerance Bd Shift Hz Shift tolerance Hz VER file name ascii 8bit 180bd 500hz ver Table 131 ASCII 8 Bit Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 132 ASCII 8 Bit Features i 198 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE AUTOSPEC General Information Autospec is a synchronous FEC system This system was used by British coastal station for communica tion to oil rigs Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones 2 Shift Hz 270 Symbol rate Bd 68 5 Alphabet ITA 2 Table 133 AUTOSPEC Characteristics 15 05 18 000 15 05 18 500 15 05 19 000 15 05 19 500 15 05 20 000 nen san dBF5
137. NALS go2DECODE 3 3 Compile Pass 1 C Users H Hesse go25IGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 code Test txt List C cai Hesse go 25SIGNALS go 2DECODE 3 3 code Test list Compl Pass 2 C Asset p c 3 ic SCH Wo Code C Users H Hesse go 2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 code Test bin 0 Errors Ready Row 1 Colum 1 Figure 146 Message on Successful Compilation The proper operation of a program however cannot be verified until the new decoder has been started The new decoder code is displayed in the decoder selection list The code has been previously saved to a file with the extension bin For initial testing we recommend to start a manual production process with a Suitable test signal Runtime errors may occur in this process These errors will cause error messages which are displayed in the column Decod in the result display To obtain a detailed error message activate the checkbox M XML Tag Filter on the lt Extras gt tab of the result display Runtime errors are caused by errors that were impossible to detect in the compilation process Such er rors are e g inadmissible parameter values exceeding of runtime due to endless loops inappropriate in put formats due to incorrect demodulators or internal buffer overflow Res Gg E 5 xl peveceson oper asse osr ecos om sn AER Jess Eo EENEG ERR no result Baudot 1 Stopbit 65Bd 400Hz no result Baudot 2 Stopbit 50Bd 450Hz no result No Baudot 2 Stopbit 75Bd 450Hz no result Coquel
138. NAS Onda ENE EE 18 Application Demonstration ccccooncnncccnncnnononcnnnnnncnnnonanoncnnonennnnnnrnnnnonrnnnonannncnnanennos 19 Starting go2DECODE 21 After Start of go2DECODE rmmnnnnnnnnnrnnvnnnnnnvnnrnnnnnsvnnnnnnsnsnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnssnnnnnnnssernnnnnn 22 SDA Operating Modes ccccccoocccncccccoccnncccnnnncnnnnnnnancnnnononancnnnnnnnnncnnnonnnancnnnnnnnanennnnss 24 DAN 24 SOMO Subject to the delivered version sonennnnessnnnnnnnennnressnnrrernenni 24 Sie ee MEMO at EEE EN B 24 3 1 EE 24 BI SE O POP PE OPONE PA 25 Controlling the Signal Input using DANA 25 SDA Signal Display and Analysis 27 Menu and SIMO CUTS NN OE T 27 SE 27 EU Me 28 BIE EVA E EE 28 DUE AE A o PRE SP SS CE EE 29 Modem MEN 34 Modem List Menu rrnrrnnnnnronnrnnnnnronnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnsvnnnnnnsnsnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnsennnnnn 34 Window TG m TT 35 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SS Contents e iii SS go2DECODE EN Men EE aaa ET Ne 36 Tol een eee m ee een ene Pe eee eee et m 36 STU 37 Navigation in SDA Main Window arrrennnnnrevnnnnrrvnnnnnrennnnerennnnnnennnnnnnennnnerennnnsnennnnn 38 o O e o EOS 38 APC Automatic Production Channel oocccccccnocccnncnnnnnccnncnnnanccnncnnnancnnnnos 39 EEE id BLE DIA carito nico verd 39 APG Control Paramet
139. ODE File Menu Edit Extras Help New decoder description Load decoder description Save decoder description Save decoder description as Close Figure 136 File Menu Menu Item Function New decoder description Remove all decoder descriptions previously displayed to release a new description Load decoder description Load existing decoder description Save decoder description Save new modified description Save decoder description Save decoder description using a new file name as Table 67 Decoder Editor File Menu Items Edit Menu Paste Iu F3 53 29 Indent AutoCompletion Delete Select all j Compile Install Uninstall Search Replace Figure 137 Edit Menu The Edit menu comprises the standard editor commands Menu Item Function SS S S ZZ ZZ IIIIIITITY TT Cut Cut highlighted text block and copy to clipboard Select all Highlight the complete text Compile Install Compile the edited text and create a code that is interpretable during the decoder runtime The decoder code thus created is installed in the connected signal 120 e Decoder Adaptation and Development User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Menu Item Function processing channel Uninstall Remove decoder from the connected signal processing channel Search the entire text document for a specifiable text Replace the specified text with another text Table 68 Decoder Editor Edit Menu Items Extras Menu AutoIndentation Param
140. ODE 3 4 ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters e 145 S go2DECODE Demodulator Additional Settings DPSK 2 4 8 16 A B tial p A l Demod Decod Extras Audio Differential Phase Shift Keying _Control_ Decod Extras Audio Demodulator DPSK 2 4 8 16 A B M Symbol rate 5 000 Bd we SR tolerance 0 050 Bd Version Adaptive equaliser Min burst length 0 2105 5 Max burst length 0 260 s E Min pause length 0 010 s Min burst SNR Re Figure 164 DPSK 2 4 8 16 A B Parameters OdB D Symbol table a sco eine Defias Figure 165 Phase to Symbol Conversion Table Note Similar tables are available with all PSK modems Figure 166 PSK Channel Filter Parameters Note This dialog is available with all PSK modems 146 e ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Demodulator PSK 2 4 8 16 A B Phase Shift Keying absolute phase shift keying PSK data aided MDPSK 2 4 8 16 A B Multi DPSK 2 4 8 or 16 order multi channel differential phase shift keying 2 100 channels User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Additional Settings Symbol rate 13 333 Bd ale SR tolerance 0 050 Ed 4 Modulation order Version Adaptive equaliser Min burst length 0 500 s Max burst length 0 260 s E Min pause length 0 180 s 5 Figure 167 PSK 2 4 8 16 A B Parameters Min burst SNR O dB Contro
141. PC The upper part of the display shows a table including all modems executed by the APC and the currently active modem bold The lower pane shows the final search and production results APC messages decoded text runtime er rors of the decoder of the APC User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 39 S go2DECODE Depending on the status you will see the following APC messages in the lower pane during production apart from those that are self explanatory such as search start or production start etc Message Description uk signal detected Unknown signal detected edit parameters uk signal detected nearest modem name Unknown signal detected with indication of closest possible modem you may want to edit the parameters uk signal detected modulation Unknown signal detected with modulation similar to modem similar modem name indicated you may want to edit the parameters modulation detected modem name Modulation detected with indication of modem modem detected modem name The modem has been detected and production has started Table 16 SDA Messages The result display can output decoder text with various text codecs If the decoder has specified an un known or invalid text codec the software displays an error message Parameter Setting To view the parameters of the result display select the lt Parameters gt tab All results except No and Name are displayed by activating
142. PC and to edit the parameters of the modems demodulator selection and parameters decoder selection extras for modem parameter editing and audio out i e demodulator parameters and gain control The modem currently active is displayed in a drop down list box above these tabs The display parameters on the lower right will vary with the active display window To activate a display window on the left left click the desired window and its parameters will be displayed on the lower right Modems and displays are described in detail in the subsequent chapters There is a menu bar below the title bar of the program window below the menu bar is a toolbar featuring frequently used items from the menu bar In general these are icons to start the displays and icons for control of the APC At the bottom of the user interface is a status bar The left part of the status bar shows alert messages er rors or messages about the connection status to the APC The right part features a load display as well as a display of the time interval at which the short time memory of the APC stored the current signal On se lection of the item Sonagram Display the load display shows whether time errors have occurred in the signal red or whether the display can no longer process all data in time yellow In general both situa tions will not occur unless the system is under extreme load APC Automatic Production Channel The task of the APC is the fully au
143. SK Number of tones 4 8 16 32 Shift Hz 200 Symbol rate Bd 31 25 Coding Walsh Alphabet ITA 5 Table 237 Olivia Characteristics 15 06 32 000 15 06 32 500 15 06 33 000 15 06 33 500 15 06 34 000 deFs 04 50 100 1000 500 600 400 200 200 400 600 600 1000 Hz Figure 250 Olivia Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Multitone MFSK Tone position type Equidistant frequencies Tone distance Hz 31 25 VER file name olivia 1000 32 ver Table 238 Olivia Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation yes User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 249 S go2DECODE Feature Status Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 239 Olivia Features Packet 300 General Information Packet radio is a complex data transmission system used by radio amateurs Packet radio networks use the AX 25 data link layer protocol derived from the X 25 protocol suite and designed for amateur radio use Usage Data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation Number of tones end 1 Symbol rate FSK EMEN Shift H 200 Nt BEEN ELM Coding Table 240 Packet 300 Characteristics 15 06 28 000 15 06 26 500 15 06 29 000 15 06 29 500 15 06 30 000 dBFS5 D
144. Settings 0nnnnnn0000nnnnnnnoneennnnnnnnnrennnnnnnenrrnnrrnrnossnnnrnrrerssnnnrrrrrensennnne 216 PN he 216 Clover ll Charactertsice 217 Clover Il Demodulator Settings 000nnnnn00annneneannnnnnennnnnonnnnnnnsnnnnrennnnrrnosrnrnresnnrereosnnrrersenrerenne 217 COV STH Feall eS Rum 218 Clover 2000 2500 Characteristics nennen 218 Clover 2000 Demodulator Settings n000nnnnn0annnenneannnnoennnnnnsnnnnrnnrnnrrnnsnnrnrennnrerrnsnnrrrrsrnnerenne 219 Clover 2000 2500 Features occccccoccnccoconcnnoconcnnnononnnnononcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnonannnnonennnnnnnaneness 219 Codan 3012 ALE Characherstce 220 Codan 3012 Data Characteristics 0000nnne00ennneoeeannneorentnnnsnnrnrenrrnrrrnsrnrnresrnrrrrnsnnrrrrsenrerenne 220 Codan 3012 ALE Demodulator Gettngs 222 Codan 3012 Data Demodulator Gettmgs 222 Codan ER KE e 222 Codan Selcal ALE Characteristics ooooccccccoconconncnononncnnononancnnnononancnnnnonnnncnnnononancnnnnnnnancnnnnss 223 Codan Selcal Demodulator Settings 0nnnnn00nnnenneannnnneennnensnnnnnenrnnnnnnsrnrnrnsrnnrrensnnrrrrsrnreeenne 223 Codan Seldal Features secere AES 224 Coquelet 8 Characherstce 224 Coquelet 8 Demodulator Settings n000nnnen0ennneoneannnnorrnnnensnnrnrenrrnrrersrnrrresrnrrrensnnrnersrnrerenne 225 Coquelet 8 Features since 225 Coquelet 13 Charachersice 225 Coquelet 13 Demodulator Gettmngs 226 Coquelet 13 Features ccccccssscccccccesseceecceeseceecseeus
145. Sonagram Display The spectrum sonagram display serves to monitor the input signal It displays both the individual spectrum and several spectrums in the duration of a signal The following figure shows an example of the spectrum sonagram display User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 55 SS goe DECODE Spectrum Sonagram IF input channel 1 11 45 01 000 11 45 01 200 45 01 252 M 11 45 01 400 lt 00 00 657390 11 45 0 0 01 910 Z Axis Time 11 45 02 000 11 45 02 200 Sonagram Energy encoded colour 11 45 02 400 11 45 02 600 11 45 02 800 2004 9 BFS op 30 Y Axis Level 40 gt 50 60 70 80 EN 100 410 X Axis de 130 Frequency 140 MAN oor oit SS SS ES Za loo 3000 2000 1000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 Spectrum Hz Figure 53 Spectrum Sonagram Display The spectrum sonagram display is subdivided into two windows The upper window shows the time curve of the individual spectrums Each spectral line is displayed as an individual row The color shows the energy in this frequency from black gt blue gt green gt red The la bels on the time axis Z axis show the recording period of the signal Changes in the signal level in the course of time can be identified by changes in color In the lower window of the display the spectrum an X axis is drawn for the frequencies Frequency O cor responds to the
146. Table 206 FSK 400 500 Features Globe Wireless FSK General Information Globe Wireless FSK is one of several radio modems used by the Globe Wireless company in the HF frequency band Usage Transfer of selcall and status messages over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Table 207 Globe Wireless FSK Characteristics 15 06 21 000 15 06 21 500 15 06 22 000 15 06 22 500 15 06 23 000 dBFS 500 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Hz Figure 240 Globe Wireless FSK Spectrogram Demodulator Settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 235 go2DECODE Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd Shift Hz 200 Shift tolerance Hz Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s Table 208 Globe Wireless FSK Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 209 Globe Wireless FSK Features Globe Wireless PSK General Information Globe Wireless PSK is one of several radio modems used by the Globe Wireless company in the HF frequency band Usage Data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation DQPSK Bandwidth Hz 400 Symbol rate Bd 200 Table
147. User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 by PLATH AG Switzerland D goe DECODE OD go2DECODE Imprint PLATH AG Stauffacherstrasse 65 CH 3014 Bern Phone 41 311 6446 www go2signals ch info go2signals ch All brand names in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their owners 2013 PLATH AG All rights including those for translation reserved Reproduction in whole or in part in any form is prohibit ed without written consent of the copyright owner Specifications are subject to change All rights reserved Printed 5 August 2013 go2DECODE General 1 E een ER Ce Ee e KEREN 1 elc iP 2 Introduction to go2DECODE 3 Short Description of the Programs 3 SOMO Subject to the delivered version ssnnannnnnnunnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnesnenenne 4 DANA 4 n orW 5 SA 5 ejfe T RCM 5 FAO PME ATO av eda tee oem 6 Comparison between go2DECODE Full Version and go2DECODE MONTON BE 6 Installation of the Program 9 System Heouremente 9 NPE NN 9 DONE VOI p ea 9 EC die EE 10 Installing the Dongle Version 11 Connecting the Dongle oocccncccccnnncnccccnnncnncnnnnancnnnononancnnnononancnnnonnnancnnnonnnanennnoss 17 Staring the SOMW ANC svanen 17 U
148. User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Parameter Default Table 373 VDL 3 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal s frequency range Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 374 VDL 3 Features ZVEI General Information This is a SelCal standard from the Zentralverband der Electrotechnischen Industrie Germany ZVEI I ZVEI Il ZVEI IIl DZVEI PDZVEI and PZVEI vary only in the digit encoding Usage Narrowband FM SelCal system in the VHF UHF frequency range Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation Multitone Table 375 ZVEI Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 313 S go2DECODE 15 08 03 000 15 08 03 500 15 08 04 000 15 08 04 500 15 08 05 000 1C ms AC CAN ou EEE DN EE SE E 2000 1750 1500 1250 1000 750 500 250 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 Hz Figure 296 ZVEI Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Tone duration ms TD tolerance ms Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s Min burst SNR dB 0 Table 376 ZVEI Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal s frequency range Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 3
149. VER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 dg Paute Delete 4 p S Ready H SM 2012 10 01 13 31 32 13 32 35 1800 Hz S go2SIGNALS Status Bar Display Parameter Figure 26 SDA User Interface with DANA The left part of the window features two displays The spectrum sonagram is a signal display showing the digital IF signal in two different presentations The sonagram top shows the energy distribution of the signal in the frequency time domain while the spec trum bottom indicates the spectral energy distribution of the most recent line at the bottom of the so nagram display The result display shows the modems currently stored in the knowledge base of the APC and the results of the automatic modem identification process The right hand side of the window displays the following property sheets In the upper part the parameters for APC control and parameter input for the APC modems are indicated These parameter tabs include the demodulator parameters and the decoder selection The lower part shows the parameters of the currently active display such as general display pa rameters cursor parameters and display parameters The status bar of the SDA is located at the bottom of the window It indicates status messages and the time interval covered by the short time memory SM On starting SDA you will see that the spectru
150. XXXXXXX Ax E XEXXX XXX X XX EX TELIXX X X X XXX XXXXX X XX XX XX X XXX XXXXX 178 IXX XX XXXX XXX X X X XX X X XXX XXX XX 179 x X X X XXXX X Offset Mode MSB Circulation 2 Figure 130 Bit Display Circulation Lengths Corresponding to a Multiple of the Repetition Rate Will Cause Frames Decoding The message in the example used was encoded by means of the Baudot modem in this case with one start bit and one stop bit To obtain this message select the appropriate decoder Press the button De coder name on the lt Decoa gt tab Select baudot11 and confirm with OK The decoded message is displayed in the result window CONGRATULATIONS YOU ARE SUCCESSFULLY DEMODULATING AND DECODING THE ANALYZED FSE 2 SIGNAL HERZLICHEN GLUECEWUNSCH SIE DEMODULIEREN UND DEECDIEREN DAS ANALYSIERTE FSE 2 SIGNAL ERFLOGREICH CONGRATULATIONS YOU ARE SUCCESSFULLY DEMODULATING AND DECODING THE ANALYZED FSE 2 SIGNAL HERZLICHEN GLUECEWUNSCH SIE DEMODULIEREN UND DEECDIEREN DAS ANALYSIERTE FSE 2 SIGNAL ERFLOGREICH CONGRATULATIONS YOU ARE SUCCESSFULLY DEMODULATING AND DECODING THE ANALYZED FSE SIGNAL HERZLICHEN GLUECEWUNSCH SIE DEMODULIEREN UND DEECDIEREN DAS ANALYSIERTE FSE 2 SIGNAL ERFLOGREICH CONGRATULATIONS YOU ARE SUCCESSFULLY DEMODULATING AND DECODING THE ANALYZED FAR 2 SIGNAL HERZLICHEN GLUECENUNSCH SIE DEMODULIEREN UND DERODIEREN DAS ANALYSIERTE FSK SIGNAL ERFLOGREICH
151. a W Loop Start SRin 11025 00 Hz SRout 11025 00 Hz iB sink not connectec m gagsiGwALS Play List Status Bar Figure 88 DANA User Interface Control of DANA Menu Bar File Control Extras Help ar O Signal source 4 Figure 89 Menu Bar User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 DANA Digital Analogue Audio Interface e 91 S go2DECODE File Menu Control Extras Open Ctro Exit Ctrl g Figure 90 File Menu Menu Item Function Open Load selected wav and raw files into the play list only displayed if the selected source is File Simultaneous selection and loading of several files is possible Exit Application is closed the files in the play list will be stored Table 54 DANA File Menu Functions Control Extras Help PS stop Ctrlt Space Po start Col NN Pause Figure 91 Control Menu Menu Item Function Control Stop H Stop playback SDA no longer receives any signal data Start gt Start playback SDA receives signal data Pause HE With DANA in Start mode playback will be halted in Pause mode playback will be restarted Table 55 DANA Control Menu Functions Help Options Sound configuration Figure 92 Menu Extras Menu Item Function Options The dialog window Options controls the handling of files or signals respectively It consists of two group boxes The checkbox M flush in the group box Buffer Management serves to instruct DANA to send n
152. a database Select the desired decoder via double click or use the up down keys on the keyboard to move in the list and press OK to confirm your selection Activating the button No decoder gt will remove the decoder from the modem To exit the selection click the button lt Cancel gt Protected Decoders Specific decoders may be subject to license restrictions i e they are protected and can only be run on Application installations licensed for this purpose As there is no source code available for these decod ers it is impossible to view or edit them by using the Decoder Editor Tab Extras for Modem Parameter Setting The tab lt Extras gt features modem parameters that are impossible to assign to any demodulator or de coder parameters The following table describes these general modem parameters 48 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Control Demo Abbreviation Primary demodulator FM bandwidth 6 000 Hz Deemphasis 50 us H Signal Frequency Nominal frequency oo Mr Offset nominal fra 0 000 Hz Resulting frequency for signal center Hz Measuring Measuring mode Pre carrier 10 0 ms Pre pre carrier 1 0 ms Post carrier 10 0 ms Post post carrier 1 0 ms Figure 50 Modem Parameter Setting Parameter Function WW Abbreviatio
153. a tence g oes acne Ore desse 292 Table 331 EEA Demodulator Settings ooccccccoccococoncnncoconcncononcnnononnnnnononnnnononnnnnononnnnonannnnononnnnnnnanenens 293 Table 332 EEA FN Ne 293 336 e List of Tables User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Table 333 Table 334 Table 335 Table 336 Table 337 Table 338 Table 339 Table 340 Table 341 Table 342 Table 343 Table 344 Table 345 Table 346 Table 347 Table 348 Table 349 Table 350 Table 351 Table 352 Table 353 Table 354 Table 355 Table 356 Table 357 Table 358 Table 359 Table 360 Table 361 Table 362 Table 363 Table 364 Table 365 Table 366 Table 367 Table 368 Table 369 Table 370 Table 371 Table 372 Table 373 Table 374 Table 375 Table 376 Table 377 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE ERE oo sn ee eee ee eee ee ee 294 ER DETS e Te S aerea ia a ea i a 294 SE 295 EIERE EEE 295 Euro Demodulator Settings aai 296 EUO wb EEE o 296 FLEX E IIS A EEE 296 FLEX Demodulator Settings EN 297 EF NN 297 AU ee TTE TT 298 FMS BOS Demodulator Settings n000nnnnooannnnnneannneneenrnnenrnnnrnosrnrrrnsrnreressnnrrrnsrnnrressnnrrrennnne 299 gje BOSS HI 299 Golay Pager Characteristics oooccccccocnnncnncnononnonncnonancnnnnnonancnnnonnnncnnnnnonnncnnnononancnnnnnnnanrnnnnss 299 Golay Pager Demodulator Settings sessi 300 Golay Pager Features cccccccccceccccceceeesesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeesseeeseeeeeeeeessuaaseeeeeee
154. able 62 DANA Play List Parameters Play Files Start playback either via double clicking the desired file in the list or by activating the lt Start gt button gt The various play modes are selected by checking the checkboxes M Play List and or M Loop Play List Loop Figure 105 DANA Playback List Play List Loop Description E The file marked gt is played once O EN The file marked gt is played repeatedly E The list is played once from the file marked gt to the last item in the list EN v1 The entire list is played repeatedly from the file marked gt If no file is marked gt the first file in the list will be played when starting the playback The progress dis play shows how much of the currently active file has been played Status Bar Start SRin 11025 00 Hz SRout 11025 00 Hz GN Sink connected SS go2sIGNALS Figure 106 DANA Status Bar Panel Content Status Field Application status Start Stop or Pause User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 DANA Digital Analogue Audio Interface e 99 Content SRin Input sampling rate SRot Output sampling rate APC Status amp Sink connected 8 Sink not connected Company Logo Table 63 DANA Status Bar Panels 100 e DANA Digital Analogue Audio Interface User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Oe go2DECODE PMO Production Memory Observer PMO Production Memory Observer is a tool to manage the production of the APC It
155. activating this this button will display channels a table for input of the type and the special characteristics of the respective channel Channel Number Channel number in the channel grid manual editing is possible values less than 1 and greater than the parameter No of channels are possible Type Type of pilot tone or constellation respectively Phase deg only with pilot tones Reference phase at sampling time 140 ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters Ueer Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2 DECODE Parameter Function Gain dB Gain or attenuation factor Symbol rate Displays the symbol rate setting Bd symbols second The symbol rate is the transmission Channel A B rate of the signal Symbol rate With this parameter change the admissible inaccuracies in the symbol rate Note that the tolerance software may reduce the symbol rate tolerance value entered to an appropriate value for the demodulator used lt Symbol Serves to display and edit the symbol table This parameter defines the bit number of the table gt symbol The physical limit condition for the bit number which can be set in the right part of the symbol table is specified in the left part of the symbol table Defines the intervals between the individual tones Hz Sets the preset duration of a tone in the multi tone demodulator Tone duration Defines the admissible inaccuracies in the tone duration ms Note that the software may re to
156. along with a checkbox for X cursors through all plots M X Time The cursor parameters are displayed by activating the lt Cursor gt tab of the respective display You can thus insert cursors into the display which serve to select or clarify specific display sections or measure the signal data The lt Cursor gt tab shows the coordinates of the individual cursor positions in editable spin boxes User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 75 go2DECODE Analysis display Parameter Cursor Extras amp Time Le Magnitude Y Phase L v Frequency Harmonic Delta Number 20 Time Magnitude Cursor 1 4 0000 ms O 000000 Cursarz 0 0000 ms 0 000000 Difference 0 0000 ms 0 000000 Phase Frequency Cursorl 0 000 0 00 Hz Cursore 0 000 0 00 Hz Difference 0 000 0 00 Hz Figure 72 Analysis Display Cursor Tab Parameter Function X Time The cursors are activated deactivated in X direction They are used to measure values of time Y Magnitude The cursors are activated deactivated in Y direction They are used to measure the values on the Y axis which varies from display to display i e magnitude phase frequency etc Y Phase The cursors are activated in Y direction They are used to measure the phase Y Frequency The cursors are activated deactivated in Y direction They are used to measure the values of frequency on the Y axis which varies
157. ampling rates internal names etc so that the exact parameters of one s specific sound device can be preset The configuration is assigned to the respective module by means of the sound card description User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 2 Sound Configuration e 133 S go2DECODE Edit the file using an appropriate editor such as e g Microsoft NotePad Should cardlist xml not be found the software will use the default values Parameter Description Sampling Rate 96 000 Hz Studio Sampling rate setting of sound device provided 48 000 Hz R Dat the sound device supports the respective sam 44 100 Hz CD pling rate 32 000 Hz 24 000 Hz 22 050 Hz 16 000 Hz 11 025 Hz 8 000 Hz Bits per Sample 8 bits Resolution of sound device 16 bits default 24 bits 32 bits Number of channels It is assumed the sound card is a stereo sound card Table 83 Multi Channel Sound Configuration Parameters Configuration File cardlist xml This section describes the contents of the configuration file for sound devices and the respective tags The values stored for each sound card are lt card gt lt name gt ensonici371 lt name gt lt description gt lt desc gt ENS1371 Ensoniq AudioPCI lt desc gt lt desc gt Creative Sound Blaster PCI lt desc gt lt description gt channels gt 2 lt channels gt lt bitspersample gt lt bps gt 8 lt bps gt lt default gt 16 lt default gt lt bitspersample gt lt samplerate gt lt
158. anau Germany Itis an advancement of the Pactor l FEC mode User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 255 go2DECODE Usage Broadcast data transmissions plain text and encrypted over HF Mode Properties Parameter Modulation Number of channels Channel spacing Hz Bandwidth Hz Symbol rate Bd Coding Convolutional FEC code Viterbi code Table 252 PACTOR II FEC Characteristics 15 06 24 000 15 06 24 500 15 06 25 000 15 06 25 500 15 06 26 000 4 j dBF5 D 50 100 n 1000 DUU 600 400 200 o 200 400 600 DUU 1000 Hz Figure 255 PACTOR II FEC Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Pactor Il Table 253 PACTOR II FEC Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Recognition Decoding 256 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Feature Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment yes Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 254 PACTOR II FEC Features PACTOR Ill General Information Pactor Ill mode is a proprietary standard developed by SCS GmbH amp Co KG Hanau Germany It is an advancement of the Pactor l and Pactor 1l modes Usage ARQ and broadcast data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation DBPSK DQPSK Number of channels 2 6 14 16 18 Bandwidth Hz max 2200 Symbol rate
159. and Cursor2 Once selected the button is dis abled and the checkbox M Harmonic is ticked This feature allows for convenient activation of the Harmonic function for specific areas without the need to adapt the cursors To cancel User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 61 go2DECODE Parameter Function EE the additional cursors deactivate the checkbox M Harmonic Doing so please note that Cur sor2 will take the position of the first additional cursor Lumber Use his sin bo to determine ine rumber of cusors tobe displayed Hanmoniemode Inv diff Inverted difference is a helpful function for direct readout of symbol rate determination of which is a major purpose of the Z cursors according to the formula 1 value in box Differ ence Coordinates of the first X and Y Cursor each Coordinates of the second X and Y Cursor each Difference between Cursor1 and Cursor2 Inv diff Inverted difference is a helpful function for direct readout of symbol rate determination of which is a major purpose of the Z cursors according to the formula 1 value in box Differ ence lt Zoom in gt With enabled cursors the button lt Zoom In gt serves to graphically zoom into the area delim ited by the cursors With disabled cursors the zoom enlarges the area by factor 2 each time it is activated X direction only Additionally the user may draw a rectangle in the display window and zoom into this section gr
160. aphically by means of the button lt Zoom In gt If the display window has activated cursors the zoom via rectangle will take priority After zooming the rectangle shown as a white dot ted line will disappear Otherwise simply click any position in the display window to delete the rectangle lt Zoom out gt Each time the button lt Zoom Out gt is activated the display area is enlarged by factor 2 With disabled cursors the zoom is exclusively made in X direction lt Pause gt In Pause the display is stopped not the signal processing Modification of the parameters is possible for a more detailed analysis of the current signal range lt Autorange gt Automatic setting of the displayed range to view the total amplitude frequency and phase range The mode Autorange analyzes approx 12 vectors The display is adapted on every change of the range On pressing lt Autorange gt again this process will be deactivated tog gle Peak Hold By activating Peak Hold the maximum energies in the spectrum are recorded and displayed as a red curve Table 36 Spectrum Sonagram Cursor Tab Parameters 62 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SN goe DECODE Extras Spectrum Sonagram Parameters AR Cursor Extras Display Standard Audio output frequency Spectrum 3 Normal At Cursor 1 Average value Cur 1 Peak hold import export Load Zoom
161. ase in mode OFDM diff phase Keying rate Defines the transmission rate Bpm This is the number of characters produced per minute Channel A B Keying rate Defines the admissible inaccuracies in the transmission rate Bpm tolerance Max burst Defines the maximum time the signal exists in burst mode s length Min burst Defines the minimum time the signal exists in burst mode s length Min pause Defines the minimum pause length between two signals in burst mode s length User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters e 139 OD go2DECODE Parameter Function Modulation Defines the number of potential bit counts of a symbol 2 order 1 bit 4 order 2 bits etc One order bit is the lowest transmissible binary unit of information lt can have the values 0 and 1 Modem type Defines the mode of FSK demodulation namely Synchronous If there are no or hardly no symbols that occur as single symbols but only as double triple etc ones the symbol rate quality will deteriorate to O permanently to indicate that there is a demodulation with a multiple of the actual symbol rate Asynchronous Support of half start stop bits Multi SR Multiple symbol rates The symbol rate quality will not deteriorate if the demodulation is made with a multiple of the actual symbol rate Oversampling 2x 4x etc Multiple sampling during a symbol duration Note that the symbol quality may deteriorate Heavily interfered signals m
162. ata Channel A is a Morse channel and Channel B is a data channel Please note Manual entries of the decoder name will cause the system to verify the exist ence of this decoder in the list of decoders Please observe the decoder type Abbreviation Defines the abbreviation of the decoder The maximum input is five digits A B Decoder type Displays the setting of the decoder type If go2DECODE has a database connection the A B decoder type can be changed to Local or Database in the list of decoders Local Decoder from SDA computer Database Decoder from database The decoders are stored on the computer of the APC Edit description This button calls the decoder editor If the decoder source code belonging to the decoder exists it will be loaded automatically Table 24 Decoder Parameters On selection of a decoder using the button lt Decoder name gt the list of decoders will be displayed User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 47 go2DECODE Selection Local Database Abbreviation Alcatel_801H_8Tone alis alis2 arg 6 90 98 arg e3 CC arg e cyc4 arg e cyc8 arq D 242 4 arg m2 342 A arg m4 242 arq m4 342 arg n asdi 7 11 asdi 8 12 No decoder Figure 49 List of Decoders This list shows the names of all decoders together with their abbreviations The two radio buttons Local and Database are not relevant unless go2DECODE operates within a system that includes
163. ature Status Demodulation yes Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment yes Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 141 Baudot sync Features BULG ASCII General Information BULG ASCII is a modem used by the Bulgarian Ministry of Foreign Affairs Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones Shift Hz 500 Bandwidth Hz 600 Symbol rate Bd 120 Table 142 BULG ASCII Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 203 goeDECODE 15 04 53 500 15 04 54 000 15 04 54 500 15 04 55 000 15 04 55 500 m deFs 0 50 1000 800 600 400 200 200 400 600 en E Hz Figure 218 BULG ASCII Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched 75 10 10 SR tolerance Shift Hz Shift tolerance Symbol rate Bd Bd H 5 In 0 VER file name bulg ascii 75bd 510hz ver Table 143 BULG ASCII Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 144 BULG ASCII Features 204 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 OD go2DECODE CHU General Information CHU is a radio station in Canada that continuously broadcasts time of day information lt is operated by the National Re
164. ay require to set the symbol rate tolerance to O to prevent the symbol rate from drifting off No of channels Defines the number of channels Displays the adjusted number of tones Range Indicates the transmission range setting BpM 20 500 20 30 30 60 60 125 125 250 250 500 Fixed This setting serves to set the transmission rate with tolerance SELCAL type Defines the type of the SELCAL data Sensitivity Defines the voice sensitivity Low not sensitive Medium sensitive High very sensitive For a well balanced detection and misdetection ratio we recommend to set this parameter to Medium by default Shit Defines the interval between lowest and highest frequency Hz in an FSK modem Shift tolerance With this parameter the admissible inaccuracies in the shift Hz can be modified Note that the software may reduce the shift tolerance value entered to an appropriate value for the de modulator used Exception with FSK2 matched When using the demodulator FSK2 matched and provided the search is carried out with the Automat nominal frequency or search range note that the shift will in addition to the de modulator measurement be measured automatically if the tolerance value entered is greater than half the shift value or greater than 1 2 symbol rate The measuring result is sent to the demodulator Special Number of special channels channels Special Provided at least one special channel has been entered
165. bd 850hz ver Table 202 FEC A Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 203 FEC A Features FSK 400 500 General Information FSK 400 500 is a chinese multi tone modem User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 233 S go2DECODE Usage Data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation MFSK Number of tones 4 Tone spacing Hz 400 500 Bandwidth Hz 500 600 Symbol rate Bd 100 Table 204 FSK 400 500 Characteristics 15 05 43 000 15 05 43 500 15 05 50 000 15 05 50 500 15 05 51 000 dBF5 o 50 100 2000 1750 1500 1250 1000 750 500 250 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 000 He Figure 239 FSK 400 500 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Multitone MFSK No of tones EN Tone position type Equidistant frequencies Min burst length s 2 500 Max burst length s 3 200 Min pause length s 1 000 VER file name fsk 400 500 ver Table 205 FSK 400 500 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal 234 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SN go2DECODE Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Recognition yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes
166. be viewed is set in combination with the centre frequency The frequency range is the range within the section The zoom can thus be set manually Definition of the level range in the spectrum display The minimum level is the lower end of the section Maximum level Definition of the level range in the spectrum display The maximum level is the upper end of the section FFT length Number of values of frequency in which the signal is displayed To obtain a higher resolu tion of the displayed frequency range increase the FFT length Higher frequency resolution numbers up to 65535 can be set in the spectrum Exp average The spectrum is displayed in average of several spectrums The result of a change of the spectrum will be a total view of the spectrum 0 No average 80 Low average 80 99 High average 100 No updating of the spectrum The FFT algorithm is used for the calculation of the spectrum This algorithm however shows inaccuracies in the amplitude attenuation as well as in the bandwidth expansion of a signal due to the finite signal probe These inaccuracies can be reduced using window Ing 66 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 D go2DECODE Parameter Function high band width accuracy Rectangle Hanning Hamming Kaiser Blackman low Flat Top band width accuracy low good magnitude accuracy magnitude accuracy Number of squaring operations applied to the time si
167. been select ed as the input signal Frequency range The frequency section to be viewed is set in combination with the centre frequency The frequency range is the range within the section The zoom can thus be set manually This parameter is not available unless Freq Filtered Frequency or Phase has been select ed as the input signal Max phase Definition of the phase range of the eye pattern display The maximum phase is the upper end of the section This parameter is not available unless Phase has been selected as the input signal Definition of the phase range of the eye pattern display The minimum phase is the lower end of the section This parameter is not available unless Phase has been selected as the input signal Display type Set the operating mode of the eye pattern display using this parameter Time display The signals are displayed in the chronology in which they are received Eye pattern display Time synchronization of the signals with the symbol rate is carried out before the signals are displayed Number of vectors Sets the number of signals which are drawn one above the other With this option you can adjust the superimposing of the signal vectors which is required in the eye pattern display Pause In Pause the display is stopped not the signal processing Modification of the parameters is possible for a more detailed analysis of the current signal range lt Autorange gt Automatic setting of the displayed ra
168. ccconnncoconcnnononnnnnnonnnnnononennnnoncnnnnnos 60 Table 36 Spectrum Sonagram Cursor Tab Parameters coooncccccccncccoconcnnccconnnnononcnnononnnnnnnnnnnnononennnnonnnnnnnos 62 Table 37 Spectrum Sonagram Extras Tab Parameters ocooonnccccconcccoconcnncconnnnnonononnnnonennnnonnnnnnnonennnnonnnnnnnos 64 Table 38 Spectrum Display Parameters Parameters ccccccoccncccconcncoconcnnnconnnnnonononnononnnnononnnnnononennononnnnnnnos 67 Table 39 Spectrum Display Cursor Parameters ooccccccoccncccccnnnccconnnnononcnnnnonnnnnononnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnonnnnnnnos 69 Table 40 Eye Pattern Display Parameter Parameters 000nnn00nnn00annnnannnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnrrnnnrrnnnnrrennrrreenernne 71 Table 41 Eye Pattern Display Cursor Parameters cccoooccnccconcnccoconcnnocnoncnnononnnnnonannnnononnnnnnonnnnnonanennnnonnnnnnnos 73 Table 42 Eye Pattern Display Color Gchemes 73 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 List of Tables e 331 SS go2DECODE Table 43 Analysis Display Parameter Parameters occcccoccncccccncconnnoconnnononnnnnncnnnonnnnnnnnnonnnnnonnnnnnoncncnanenonos 75 Table 44 Analysis Display Cursor Parameters ooocccccconcnccconcnncoconcnnononcnnnnonnnnnonancnnononnnnnnnnnnnnonannnnnnonnnninnos 77 Table 45 Analysis Display Color Schemes occccccccccccoconcnncconononononnnnononcnnnnonnnnnononnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanennnnnas 77 Table 46 Constellation Display Parameter Parametere 79 Table 47 Constellation Display Curs
169. ce GUI that appears upon user interaction such as a right click mouse operation A context menu offers a limited set of choices that are available in the current state or context of the operating system or application Usually the available choices are actions related to the selected object dB Decibel Symbol dB is a logarithmic unit that indicates ratio or gain Decibel is used to indicate the level of acoustic or electromagnetic waves or electronic signals The logarithmic scale can characterize very big or very small numbers with short notation The dB level can be viewed as relative gain or attenuation of one level vs a second or absolute logarithmic scale level for well known reference levels Decibel is a dimensionless unit The ratio in Bel is the base 10 logarithm of the ratio of P1 to PO Ratio dB 10 log o P1 PO DDC In digital signal processing a Digital Down Converter converts a digitized real signal centered at an inter mediate frequency to a baseband complex signal centered at zero frequency In addition to down conversion DDC s typically decimate signals to a lower sampling rate DDL The Decoder Description Language is a programming language developed by Procitec for the easy im plementation of modems compiler converts the source code into binary intermediate code which is in terpreted by the application DHCP The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a network protocol used to configure
170. ce 133 Connecting the Dongle 17 Constellation Display 77 Context menu 320 Context Sensitive Help 122 Control 44 Control of DANA 91 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Control of PMO 104 Controlling the Signal Input using DANA 25 Conversion Parameter Setting 95 Copy Protection 9 Coquelet 13 225 Coquelet 8 224 Coquelet 80 227 Create Decoder 117 CTCSS 287 Cursor Setting 67 71 Cursor Tab 75 79 82 Cursors 61 D DANA 4 24 DANA Digital Analogue Audio Interface 89 dB 320 DDC 320 DDL 320 Decoder Adaptation and Development 117 Decoder Programming Examples 165 Decoder Selection 46 Decoder Source Code Structure 123 Decoding 116 Demodulator Selection 45 Demodulator Settings 178 179 181 182 184 186 187 189 190 192 193 195 196 198 199 201 202 204 205 207 208 210 211 213 214 216 217 219 221 223 224 226 227 229 230 231 233 234 235 237 238 240 241 243 244 245 246 248 249 250 252 253 255 256 257 259 260 262 263 264 266 267 268 270 271 273 274 276 277 278 280 282 283 285 286 288 289 290 291 293 294 295 297 298 300 301 303 304 305 307 308 309 311 312 314 Determine Symbol Rate by Measurement in Time Signal 113 Determine Symbol Rate by Spectrum via Envelope 112 Determine Symbol Rate in Sonagram 110 DGPS 228 DHCP 320 Display Menu 28 Displays 25 Displays and Signal Types Available 51 Displays of the SDA 55 DMR 288
171. ch best Result threshold 70 02 Start time 01 01 00 00 00 00 000 End time 01 01 00 00 00 00 000 Repeat replay 7 IF recording Off T Result SNR threshold 1 504 4j Hewind Stop Start Automat Spectrum Sonagram Parameters Cursor Extras Channel number Input signal IF input be mme peso oes 034 HFDL 035 HNG FEC 100Bd 420Hz 037 Packet 300 038 Packet 9600 039 Pactor 040 Piccolo 6 SOms 041 Piccolol2 4 23 07 09 14 36 17 101 NTHE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZ impossible none impossible impossible none impossible impossible 49 production start Morse 60 125 Ready amp ass Jose pecos m o 46 45 0123456789THE QUICK 0 no sync N BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 201 7 Bd 0 99 8 Bd arora ols oJoojojo D D Hz Hz 0123456789THE QUICK Centre frequency Frequency range 0 0 200 9 Maximum level 80 0 Minimum level Bn FFT length 99 6 50 0 Exp average 110 0 Y ERE gt Windowing Lines second Display mode 25000H 2 512 Yv z Pause Autorange Peak hold SM 23 07 2009 14 36 17 14 37 53 12 500 Hz SS go2SIGNALS Figure 195 Morse Signal Played Back with DANA and Identified in SDA 164 e ANNEX 5 Examples User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Decoder Programming Examples The
172. chieved at the expense of the quality of the time resolu tion which will deteriorate the blanking of the signal is impossible to recognize in the sonagram 12 45 08 000 al 12 45 08 500 12 45 09 000 12 45 09 500 12 45 10 000 dBFS em 3000 2500 2000 1500 um 500 oO em 1000 1500 200 2500 3000 A 38971 lt 6958 2 gt 3361 22 Figure 120 Increased Spectrum Resolution FFT Length 4096 The shift is the distance between the two exterior shift keying frequencies strong signal peaks Activate the button lt Peak Hold gt on the property sheet to localize the exact position of the peaks and to measure the distance between them A red line is created every n seconds depicting the maximum amplitudes The length of this time interval can be adjusted manually in the spin box Peak Hold Time on the lt Extras gt tab if necessary Place one cursor each on the maximum positions Read out their exact positions and distance on the fre quency axis OD 400 300 4200 100 O 100 208 300 400 501 223 b 2450 0 226 4 Figure 121 Spectrum Display with Peak Hold Curve Consequently the shift is of 450 Hz approx which supplies the second demodulation parameter Determine Symbol Rate in Sonagram Due to the time resolution measuring the symbol rate in the sonagram display will only make sense with low symbol rates lt 100 Bo Expand the window by dragging the lower margin downwards for optimum working conditi
173. connnnonononnnnonnnnnonnnnnnononcnnnnonnnnnonnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanennnnnos 41 Table LR Mt E 42 Table 20 SDA Modem Parameters ccccccoccnccccccnncccnnnoconononnnnonnnnnononnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnanennnnnos 42 TETTE 43 Table 22 APC Control Parameters rrrnnrrnrnnnnnronnnnnvonnnnnnenrnnnnrnnnannrrnnnnnnennnnnnsennnnnsennnnssennnnnnsennnnnsennnnssennnnn 45 Table 23 Demodulator Tvpes EKAR AN EEE EARE ETENE EEEREN EE S E EEO E NS EEERANES 46 Table 24 Decoder barameters 47 Table 25 Modem Parameters cccccceecccceeeceeceeceeceeececceeeeeeceeeceeseueeceeseaeceeseuaeeesseaecesseaeeessageeessaeeeessages 49 Table 26 Audio Parameters Lavere sed 51 FEE DNV 51 Table 28 Input Signal FaramielBlS Lavvo 53 Table 29 Input Signal and Demodulator Combinations oocccccccoccncococcnncccnnnnnnnoncnnononnnnnnonnnnnononennonenennnnnos 54 Table 30 Input Signal and Display Combinations o00nnn00annnnannnoeannnnnnnnonnnnnannnnnnnnnsnnrrrnnnrnnnnrrennrrrnenerene 55 Table 31 Spectrum Sonagram Display Control Scrollbars 00nnn000nnnnannnoaannnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnennnnnnenenene 57 Table 32 Spectrum Sonagram Display Control Zoom Funchons 57 Table 33 Spectrum Sonagram Popup Menu Parameters sess 58 Table 34 Spectrum Sonagram Display Keyboard Shortcuts cccococcnccconcnococoncnnoconcnnnnnonnnnononennnnonnnncnnos 59 Table 35 Spectrum Sonagram Parameters Tab Parameters oocccccconcnc
174. cooccncconccncccnccncnnnccncnonccnannnccnns ARQ M2 242 Characteristics ARQ M2 242 Demodulator Settings ARQ M2 242 Features ARQ M2 342 Characteristics ARQ M2 342 Demodulator Settings ARQ M2 342 Features ARQ M4 242 Characteristics ARQ M4 242 Demodulator Settings ARQ M4 242 Features ARQ M4 342 Characteristics ARQ M4 342 Demodulator Settings ARQ M4 342 Features ARQ N Characteristics aeenneennneeennneerrnenennn ARQ N Demodulator Settings ARQ N Features rarrerrrnrrrerrnnrrvrnrnnnrenrnnrrennnnnnsen ASCII 7 Bit Characteristics ASCII 7 Bit Demodulator Settings ASCII 7 Bit Features rrrrrrnnrrernrnnrnvnrnnrrernnnnnnen ASCII 8 Bit Characteristics ASCII 8 Bit Demodulator Settings ASCII 8 Bit Features esses AUTOSPEC Characteristics AUTOSPEC Demodulator Settings AUTOSPEG Features victa reta Baudot async Characteristics Baudot async Demodulator Settings Baudot async Features n nnnnaannnnanannnannnnennnnne Baudot sync Characteristics Baudot sync Demodulator Settings Baudot sync Features nnnaannnennennenennennnenenne BULG ASCII Characteristics BULG ASCII Demodulator Settings BULG ASCII Features esses CHU Characteristics asii nite iiw cu a va i own ii CHU Demodulator Settings ONU TOS Ssmi epp a CIS 11
175. ctor is 2 respectively its reciprocal in opposite direction Custom zoom factors can be set on the display s property sheet on the lt Cursor gt tab spin box Relative Zoom Factor Parameter Function Ctrl Mouse Wheel Zoom in out no cursors activated lt gt Zoom in With enabled cursors the keyboard shortcut lt gt serves to graphically zoom into the area delimited by the cursors With disabled cursors the zoom enlarges the area by factor each time it is activated X direction only Additionally the user may draw a rectangle in the display window and zoom into this section graphically by means of the shortcut lt gt If the display window has activated cursors the zoom via rectangle will take priority After zooming the rectangle shown as a white dotted line will disappear Otherwise simply click any position in the display window to delete the rectangle Zoom out Each time the keyboard shortcut is activated the display area is enlarged by factor 2 With disabled cursors the zoom is made in X direction only Table 32 Spectrum Sonagram Display Control Zoom Functions Popup Menu The spectrum sonagram display provides a popup menu with a number of useful items IEA o y Cursor Y Zoom range a Cursor Z E Zoom in P Zoom out w 2 Cursor mode M SH D E des Ko J Immediate mouse zoom Harmonic H LT Mirrored M DN I ul Centred Wi Magnifier DIE Overview Figure 54 Sp
176. cuts The following shortcuts are available for quick activation of frequently used functions Function Shortcut Load settings Save settings Spectrum sonagram Constellation display Eye pattern display Analysis display Hell display Bit display New modem Load modem from file Save modem to file Delete modem Load modem list Save modem list Position all User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 37 go2DECODE Function Shortcut Table 15 SDA Shortcuts Navigation in SDA Main Window To navigate in the main window of SDA and to activate the functions use one of the following three meth ods depending on the current function Keyboard shortcuts eft mouse button Popup menu via the right mouse button You will find an overview of this subject in the previous chapter Use the keyboard to enter edit or delete text SDA User Interface When starting the program the SDA user interface is structured as follows Menu Bar Toolbar Modem Parameter and Control D go2DECODE default Lo eem File Edit Display Extras Modem List ws Help d 7 2 kd XX mug HH Gi uM ES D r lll Spectrum Sonagram IF input Channel 1 ca le ses Y Decod Extras Audio 13 32 34 500 13 32 35 000 4 m H Edit description 0 0000000 dBFS 0 50 100 Result display 6000 4000 2000 0 2000 4000 6000 Hanen Extras
177. d Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Ko go2DECODE Parameter Default TD tolerance ms No oftones In Tone distance Hz 26 67 VER file name coquelet 8 ver Table 184 Coquelet 8 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment yes Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 185 Coquelet 8 Features Coquelet 13 General Information The Coquelet modes were designed for the communications of French customs and police authorities They are similar to the British Piccolo modes Usage Transfer of textual information mostly encrypted over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation MFSK Shit a Bandwidth Hz 500 Symbol rate Baud 13 3 20 0 Alphabet ITA 2 ATU 80 Table 186 Coquelet 13 Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 225 Ka go2DECODE 15 05 26 000 15 05 26 500 15 05 29 000 15 05 29 500 15 05 30 000 d k dBF5 50 100 m 1000 DUU 400 200 00 400 600 DUU 1000 Hz Figure 233 Coquelet 13 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Multitone MFSK AAN TD tolerance ms Tone position type Tone distance Hz VER file name Table 187 Coquelet 13 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feat
178. d search range if Frequency Range is used IF Recording You can have the signals recorded by the APC The recording can be made at different times Off Signal is not recorded Detected modem Recording is started on successful search UK signal Recording is started when no matching modem has been found and when a signal has been identified and when this signal has at least the signal noise ratio defined in Record SNR Signal detected Recording is started as soon as the signal has been identified and when the signal has at least the signal to noise ratio defined in Record SNR Please note that the recording also depends on the start and end times On The complete signal is recorded Time at which automatic production is started In mode Analysis Offline this is also the time from which the recorded signal is read from the short time memory Time at which automatic production is stopped In mode Analysis Offline this is also the time from which the recorded signal is read from the short time memory M Repeat replay In mode Analysis Offline you can have the recorded signal played repeatedly To do so select this checkbox 44 SDA Signal Display and Analysis 1 1 1 UserManual go2DECODE 3 4 D go2DECODE Table 22 APC Control Parameters When the SDA has been started using modem recognition a search for the modem with the best result of all modems is carried out Once the modem has been found production starts
179. devices that are connected to a network known as hosts so they can communicate on that network using the Internet Protocol IP It involves clients and a server operating in a client server model FEC The Forward Error Correcting code is a method to increase the reliability of data exchange Additional da ta is appended to the original data which can be used to correct data if they are partly corrupted This technique is applied in cases where there is no channel for back reporting e g in a broadcast situation It is used as well in situations where the switch over and retransmission time by far exceeds the time to generate transfer and evaluate the correction code deep space communication FFT The Fast Fourier Transformation is a variant of the Fourier transformation This is a method to convert da ta between time and frequency domain Data are sampled in the time domain in many applications they are transformed into the frequency domain for further processing 320 e Glossary of Terms User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SS go2DECODE The DFT is the discrete variant of the Fourier transformation It works with every integer number N of samples and requires N operations The FFT is a special variant where N is 2 m being an integer In this case only N logn operations are required accelerating processing significantly for larger N HF High Frequency 3 30 MHz This is the frequency range for world wide information transfer over
180. directory User Name go2SIGNALS go2DECODE Any change can be accomplished there amp lol x Datei Bearbeiten Format Ansicht lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt configuration lt appSettings gt lt add key LogLevel value 0 lt add key LogProtocol value 0 lt add key LogPerRun value 0 lt add key LogMaxFilesize value 2 lt add key LogMaxFilenumber value 5 lt appSettings gt lt common gt lt path to the APC that is to be observed gt lt add key APC_PATH value gt lt alternatively we can EU another production memory for fall back gt add key MEM PROD PATH value gt lt refresh information about content on production memory every 50ms gt lt add key REFRESH RATE FOR TIMER value 50 gt lt two files with pause intervals lt 500ms will be concatenated to one emission lt add key INTERVAL FOR EMMISIONS value 500 gt lt lead in time of audio files EE be equal to the APC configuartion gt lt add key LEAD TIME value 2 lt WAV media player capable of playing m3u playlists gt lt add keyz WAV PLAYER value C Programme Windows Media Playerimplayer2 exe lt RAW file player DANA default location is PMO directory gt lt add key RAW PLAYER value dana exe l XML reader gt add key XML READER value WORDPAD EXE common lt configuration gt Figure 108
181. displays all produc tion results as well as AF and IF recordings The PMO interface displays the results and recordings in a clear structure and enables the user to select the specific date of the production of interest in order to view the desired recordings Start of PMO Select lt Programs gt lt go2SIGNALS gt lt go2DECODE gt lt PMOs in the WINDOWS 7 program group of the start menu to start PMO E Windows Anytime Upgrade CH Windows DVD Maker Fax and Scan Master Media Center Media Player EE Documents Update A XPS Viewer Pictures Accessories Music CyberLink DVD Solution A Dames Games Computer Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs 8 Uninstall go2DECODE Je Apply for license Help and Support Back Search programs and files Shut down Te Figure 107 PMO Start User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 PMO Production Memory Observer e 101 D go2 DECODE Operation of PMO Initial Configuration After the installation of the PMO the configuration file pmo confis filled Here you can specify the information processing of go2DECODE playing recorded LF records Standard Windows Media Player or displaying production results Standard MS Wordpad IF files have to be played via DANA If you want to use a hex reader of your own choice you have to modify the configuration file accordingly At the first start of PMO the configuration file is copied from the application directory to the user
182. ds NAM Mp AA ANN St p TE 05 T i is qu al e m mt USCH De UK 20 je 006 01 6 11 105 008 01 86 11 jor H 004 01 BE tL X X X X e e 0L 9 09 SS OG Sh OP SE 0t SZ Of ST Ot o0 i 295330 og bei 00901 BE 11 eE j BWET c MT me AA a a ES EE e ae E ARA BET EW Be defi ep uspo sea m 93 3 xo Gah sepa wapo segg m wy ai Ver Ga sopu ween send wem 193 wi7 II dg aa po segg m 3 23m ejdsip ug ejdsip uayjed o o peus een uieJ6euos uinjj2eds sis eue eubis jo Sajdwex3 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 52 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis go2DECODE Figure 52 Examples of Signal Analysis with this Application Signal processing with the SDA Signal processing is done in several steps e Recording of the signal A D conversion sound card WAV file etc e Filtering e Demodulation e Decoding Each step supplies temporary results for example internal IF signals demodulated bits etc which can be selected as a signal to be displayed in order to verify the processing or to analyze the signal infor mation Each display is adjusted separately by means of the nout Signal parameters The following table explains the different input signals Input Signal Description IF unbuffered Intermediate frequency before being stored into the short term memory Used to check the input signal Intermediate frequency at the input of the signal processing Used to check the in put signal Signal times depend on the
183. e the button lt Pause gt is selected This function will not stop the signal flow between the signal processing modules Re activate the current update of the display by selecting the button lt Pause gt again toggle switch The group box Peak Hold Import Export serves to save and load peak hold curves for accurate compari son The two functions are inactive unless the buttons lt Pause gt and lt Peak Hold gt are selected The curves are stored in csv format Comma Separated Value which is editable in Microsoft Excel or a suitable editor such as e g Microsoft WordPad When loading a saved curve it is inserted in the spectrum display as a yellow line The checkbox M Show is not active unless a curve has been loaded Figure 59 Loading of a Curve for Comparison Please make sure to display the inserted curve using the original FFT length or an adjacent FFT length The group box Zoom accommodates the controls for zoom operations The following parameters are available Parameter Function lt In gt With enabled cursors the button lt Zoom In gt serves to graphically zoom into the area delimited by the cursors With disabled cursors the zoom enlarges the area by factor 72 each time it is activated X direction only Additionally the user may draw a rectangle in the display window and zoom into this section graphically by means of the button lt Zoom In gt If the display window has activated cursors zooming by rectangle will
184. e APC be sure to set the source to Sound in DANA and ob serve the nominal frequency adjusted in SOMO If the nominal frequency in SOMO has not been changed either select the default setting for SOMO in DANA or enter the Nominal frequency adjusted in SOMO in DANA in the box Frequency as well 162 e ANNEX 5 Examples User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Example Menu Bar ectrum Sonagram 08 30 38 500 08 30 39 000 08 30 39 500 08 30 40 000 08 30 40 500 08 30 41 000 08 30 41 500 08 30 42 000 08 30 42 500 na 3n 43 nnn dBF5 Ll 50 75 100 125 0 10000 20000 d aea ner O Selected Signal Toolbar S go2 DECODE Signal Type asko not active Morse EG s Morse id selected Parameters Code Text Extras Channel Left and Right v Level 20 00 dB Nominal frequency 4500 00 Hag Nominal Keying Rate 200 00 cpm Frequency Pulse shape m gl Rolloff 0 800 S Genertor Spectrum Sonagram List Parameters Cursor Extras Maximum level 21 5 dB 3 E Minimum level 140 0 dB FFT length 512 Exp average 80 000 D roperty Windowing Hanning M sheets Lines second 100 s gt Display mode Lines Peak hold time 1 000 s Peak hold pause Pause Autorange Peak hold Hz S go2SIGNALS Figure 194 Signal Generation Using SOMO Six signals are generated two of which are
185. e APC and SDA Parameter Default Value Item PortBase 41001 The Parameter PortBase will be used for the adjustment of the port PortBase 0 StandareF Data Port Data out of Signal Memory Table 79 APC and SDA Ports Configuration by Configuration file lt add key PortBase value Configuration by Parameter Commands Ports for the DANA Parameter Default Value Item DataPortBase 44000 The Parameter DataPortBase or DataPortBase1 will be used DataPortBase1 for the adjustment of the port DataPortBase 1 BBF Port Dana Table 80 DANA Ports Configuration by Configuration file lt add key DataPortBase value Configuration by Parameter Commands dana exe DataPortBase Note If you use DataPortBase as well as DataPortBase1 the value of DataPortBase1 will always be used User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 1 Port Configuration e 131 S go2DECODE Ports for the SOMO Parameter Default Value Item DataPortBase1 44000 The Parameter DataPortBase1 will be used for the adjustment of the port DataPortBase2 44200 The Parameter DataPortBase2 will be used for the adjustment of the port DataPortBase1 1 gt BBF Port SOMO DataPortBase2 2 SBF Port SOMO Table 81 SOMO Ports Configuration by Configuration file lt add key DataPortBasel value gt lt add key DataPortBase2 value gt Configuration by Parameter Commands somo exe DataPortBase
186. e CD ROM Follow the instructions on the screen and in the present Instruc tions Welcome to the go2DECODE Setup Assistant V goPSIBNALS The Setup Assistant will guide you through the installation of go2DECODE 3 3 1 Click Mext to continue or Cancel to exit the Setup E Assistant WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law lt Back xt Figure 3 Welcome Message Subsequently you will see the welcome message of the Setup Assistant Strike Next to continue In the next step please read the License Agreement and should you have no objections agree to these terms and conditions by clicking the respective radio button 10 e Installation of the Program User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Please read the following license agreement carefully End User License Agreement PLATH AG Stauffacherstrasse 65 3014 Bern Switzerland THIS SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA ISA LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN PLATH AG AND THE END USER OF THE INCLUDED SOFTWARE AND SOURCE FILES TOGETHER THE SOFTWARE YOU MUST READ THIS EULA CAREFULLY AND ACCEPT 7 I accept the terms in the License Agreement 5 I do not accept the terms in the License Agreement Figure 4 License
187. e Signal Input using DANA DANA stands for Digital Analogue Audio Interface lt serves to convert existing analogue signals from sound card or wav files into complex IF signals and to provide these complex signals to the APC via TCP IP Playback Mode Sound If the input signal is applied via sound card e g files created and played by the signal generator SOMO or wav files played by Windows Media Player set the source to Sound in the first dropdown list box on the toolbar Make sure the signal is not over modulated red bars on the toolbar MANNIN If so readjust the Windows volume control cf chapter Operation of DANA User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Starting go2DECODE e 25 SS go2DECODE Playback Mode File For direct playback of a wav file select the menu item File in the first dropdown list box on the toolbar The signal cannot be played back unless the APC is ready green dot on the status bar 9 To load the wav file into the play list either select the menu item File Open or use the icon Start playback by double clicking the file in question For further information on the play list and its application as well as a detailed description of the entire program please consult the chapter Operation of DANA Conversion The input signal can be shifted by an offset and it can be filtered To do so select the setting No Predefined Frequencies and set the band pass limits in the spin boxes Startfrequency and Endfrequenc
188. e Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 108 ARQ E Features 186 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE ARQ E3 General Information ARQ E3 is a synchronous dual channel ARQ mode for the exchange of teletype data over a radio channel in a robust way Usage Military or diplomatic data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Modulation Number of tones Shift Hz Bandwidth Hz Symbol rate Bd Error correction Alphabet Table 109 ARQ E3 Characteristics 15 05 41 000 15 05 41 500 15 05 42 000 15 05 42 500 15 05 43 000 dBF5 50 100 1000 000 600 400 200 a 200 400 600 a00 1000 Hz Figure 207 ARQ E3 cyc8 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Symbol rate Bd 500 SR tolerance Bd 5 Shift Hz 400 Shift tolerance Hz 30 Modem type Synchronous VER file name arq e3 50bd 400hz ver User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 187 S go2 DECODE Table 110 ARQ E3 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment yes Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 111 ARQ E3 Features ARQ M2 242 General Information ARQ M2 242 is a synchronous full duplex time division multiple
189. e common color scheme options the Extras tab on the property sheet provides the group box Peak Hold Import Export which serves to save and load peak hold curves for accurate comparison The two functions are inactive unless the buttons Pause und Peak Hold are selected The curves are stored in csv format Comma Separated Value which is editable in Microsoft Excel or a suitable editor such as e g Microsoft WordPad When loading a saved curve it is inserted in the spectrum display as a yellow line The checkbox M Show is not active unless a curve has been loaded Figure 65 Curve to Compare with Please make sure to display the inserted curve using the original FFT length or an adjacent FFT length Time Eye Pattern Display The eye pattern display indicates the course of the amplitude the phase or the frequency during the peri od of time As shown in the Figure several signal sections can superimpose in one display The display has two operating modes Time display and eye pattern display If the system is set to eye pattern display the signals are drawn synchronized with the symbol rate of the demodulator In the oper ating mode time display no synchronizing process will be carried out User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 69 SS go2DECODE Eye pattern display Filtered diff mag channel 1 5 x Y Axis Amplitude X Axis Time Symbol Rate Pins Figure 66 Eye Pattern Display
190. e in writing and have to be confirmed by PLATH AG Any costs caused by material orders or additional administrative costs already incurred by PLATH AG must be paid by the customer Reservation of Ownership The delivered goods remain the property of PLATH AG until the invoice is fully paid Legal Domicile Legal domicile is Bern The buyer declares that for any legal claim against PLATH AG he waivers his legal domicile and hereby accepts the legal domicile of Bern All contracts are based on Swiss law Liability for Defects and Compensation Hidden defects must immediately on appearance be notified in writing otherwise the goods will be taken as accepted PLATH AG will guarantee faultless goods but not consultation on their technical use In the case of a legitimate defect notification PLATH AG is entitled to decide whether to deliver a replacement on return on the defect goods reimburse the amount of the purchase price and terminate the contract reimburse the reduced value of the goods according to the sales contract Claims by the buyer expire in every case where they are not legally established within 30 days of the goods delivery Compensatory claims against PLATH AG are not permissible unless negligence on their part can be proved by the buyer User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Appendix e 317 Ka go2DECODE Glossary of Terms AF Audio Frequency 40 20000 Hz Audio Frequency is the range of acoustic waves which the human
191. e of IZT serving to control the receiver manually It is not provided with the go2DECODE software package and therefore not described in this manual Please refer to the corresponding user manual for more information on how to connect the receiver to the personal computer The receiver transfers its data via the IZT control software to the computer where go2DECODE is running All applications can be installed on one personal computer as depicted in the figure above or on different machines The default port number for a single channel is 8615 This value is specified during the installa tion procedure of go2DECODE For receivers featuring several channels specific channels can be se lected by the proper port numbers 8625 for channel 2 8635 for channel 3 For trouble free data transfer execute the IZT control software as follows r3000 exe automation interface c1 ip localhost When using another channel modify the parameter c1 ip accordingly c2 ip C3 ip Please observe the manufacturer s instructions and restrictions when operating the IZT receiver and con trol software 154 e ANNEX 4 Receiver Support User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Figure 186 go2DECODE with IZT Receiver Connection User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 4 Receiver Support e 155 S go2DECODE ANNEX 5 Examples Select lt Programs gt lt go2SIGNALS gt lt go2DECODE gt lt DEMO gt in the WINDOWS 7 program group of the star
192. e text of other decoder channels if any Decoder Output Toggle between Decoder Channel A and B default is Channel A This option is only effec tive if the demodulator used provides F7B mode e g F6 F7B lt Pause gt The display is halted in Pause Now edit the parameters for more detailed examination of the results Deletes the buffer and the display of the final results Table 18 SDA Parameter Options To edit the display parameters of the final results in the lower part of the display select the tab lt Extras gt The following parameters are available User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 41 S go2DECODE Result Production 4 XML tag filter Show all Formatted output Result file Figure 41 SDA Dialog Extras Parameter Function WW XML Tag Filter The plain XML result is displayed if this checkbox is selected Show all In case of an unsuccessful search of the Automat tick this checkbox to view additional messages in the lower result pane such as the modem closest possible to the signal Formatted output Unselecting this checkbox will deactivate the formatted output considerable amount of additional information about the final results is displayed Result file By activating this checkbox the raw results of the output will be saved in a file If no file has been specified a file dialog will be displayed to select a base directory in which to save the results A re
193. e this parameter to set the type of the display Absolute Display of the complex signal Absolute SR Display of the complex signal only at the symbol rate time Difference phase As Absolute but phase as difference Difference phase SR As Absolute but phase as difference and only at the symbol rate time Number of points Sets the number of signals drawn in superimposed display Display mode Use this parameter to set the display mode of the display Dots Every value in the complex plane of numbers is displayed as a point Lines The individual values are linked and are displayed as a continuous row lt Pause gt In Pause the display is stopped not the signal processing Modification of the parameters is possible for a more detailed analysis of the current signal range lt Autorange gt Automatic setting of the displayed range to view the total real and imaginary part The mode Autorange analyzes approx 12 vectors The display is adapted on every change of the range On pressing lt Autorange gt again this process will be deactivated toggle Table 46 Constellation Display Parameter Parameters Cursor Tab The cursor parameters are displayed by activating the lt Cursor gt tab of the respective display You can thus insert cursors into the display which serve to select or clarify specific display sections or measure the signal data The lt Cursor gt tab shows the coordinates of the individual cursor positions in editable spin b
194. eatures SI ARQ General Information SI ARQ is an ARQ mode similar to SITOR for the exchange of teletype data over a radio channel in a ro bust way Usage Basic maritime data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones 2 Shift Hz 170 Bandwidth Hz 400 500 Symbol rate Bd 96 192 Error correction ARQ Alphabet ITA 2 Table 279 SI ARQ Characteristics 15 07 24 000 15 07 24 500 15 07 25 000 15 07 25 500 15 07 26 000 15 17 26 Enn r 4 m j dBF5 50 100 500 450 400 350 200 50 200 150 100 50 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 9400 450 500 Hz Figure 264 SI ARQ Spectrogram Demodulator Settings 268 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Parameter Default Symbol rate Bd 96 SH tolerance Bd Shit He Shift tolerance Hz Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s Table 280 SI ARQ Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment yes Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 281 SI ARQ Features SI FEC General Information SI FEC is an FEC mode similar to SITOR for the exchange of teletype data over a radio channel in a ro bust way Usage Basic maritime data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Mod
195. eatures two major configurations go2DECODE and go2DECODE Monitoring the differ ences are explained in this chapter go2DECODE is intended for use in the technical centre for online and offline analysis of signals automat ic recognition demodulation and decoding The Application allows for development of decoders by means of the decoder description language DDL and for creation of new modems using the universal demodula tors and the proprietary decoders This way the system s knowledge base will grow with the knowledge of the technical centre s experts Newly developed modems can be deployed to go2DECODE Monitoring for further use The go2DECODE Monitoring is used in the interception stations to automatically detect recognize de modulate and decode signals with the use of the knowledge base Any modems developed by the tech nical centre can be easily imported into the Monitoring version to increase the knowledge base It is further possible to record both unknown and recognized signals These signals can be played back in go2DECODE version in the technical centre Comparison between go2DECODE Full Version and go2DECODE Monitoring The following tables compare the features available in go2DECODE and Monitoring Available X Not available Modules available Module APPLICATION APPLICATION Monitoring AAA AAA KJE DNA SOMO Subjectto the delivered version e px gt gt NN NN decoder editor decoder debugger and comp
196. ececcseeuseceeessauseeeeessaueeeesssaseeesssaageeeeesaas 226 Coquelet 80 Characterstce 227 Coquelet 80 Demodulator Gettmngs 227 Coquelet 80 Features geegent ege e eege ebe Ee eteebegde be 228 DEP ENN 228 DGPS Demodulator Settings ennnnrnnrvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnrnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnsvnnnnnsnnesnnnnnnenevnnnnnner 229 DELLS Ee EEE EN 229 PP 229 DSC HF Demodulator Settings n n000nnneooannnnnnrannnnosrnrnrnsrnnrrensrnrrrrsrnrereosnnrrrrsrnreressnnrrernenne 230 Ben rub ci RTT 230 DUP ARQ Cliaracreris IOS csutexesvsuideduxtuxEE6a quao ia 231 DUP ARQ Demodulator Settings 00000nnnnnnn000annnnnnnonnrnnnnnnnnnsnnnnrnrrnnssrnnrnnrrosennnrrreenssnnnneeene 232 DUP ROR NE 232 FEC A erzielt EEE 232 FEC A Demodulator Geitmges 233 FEA acu me E 233 FRI NN second OE 234 ESK 100500 Demodulator Settings sara caida ida 234 FRI VF 235 Globe Wireless FSK Characteristics EE 235 Globe Wireless FSK Demodulator Settings n0000nnnn001nnnnonannenonrennnennnnnennsrnnrrensrnrnrrsrnrerenne 236 Globe Wireless FSK TEE 236 Globe Wireless PSK Charachersice 236 Globe Wireless PSK Demodulator Gettngs 237 Globe Wireless PSK Fealul6S usaras 237 STR eiie ec RT 238 G TOR Demodulator Settings 00000nnnnnn0000annnnnnonenannennensrnnnrnnennsrnnnrrrrnossnnnrrrrenssnnnrrrrrenennnnne 239 O TOR Peas soap 239 weiler eer 239 Table 216 334 e List of Tables User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Table 2
197. ectrum Sonagram Popup Menu User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 57 ZE goeDECODE Parameter Function Cursor Activate and deactivate X Y Z and Harmonic cursors X Cursor Y Cursor Z Cursor 2 Cursor mode N Harmonic Mirrored Centred gt Zoom Factors Max Frequency Range Zoom to maximum frequency range Max Time Range Zoom to maximum time range show entire buffer without scrollbar Max frequency range F Max time range T Max frequency and time range Enlarged view of the section delimited by the cursors Repeat this process until the spectrum area displayed is satisfactory Reduced view of the section delimited by the cursors Repeat this process until the spectrum area displayed is satisfactory Immediate Zoom Zoom in by clicking the mouse at the desired position zoom out using the lt Ctrl gt key Move The mouse pointer changes into a hand Drag the displayed section in the desired direction by moving the mouse while keeping the left mouse button pressed The mouse pointer changes into a magnifying glass superimposed on a rectangle On mouse click a separate window is opened showing the magnified contents of the sonagram display centre Select the section to magnify either by drawing a rectangle before activating the magnifier function or simply clicking the position of interest in the sonagram display Overview Opens a sonagram with an overview of the complete signal located in
198. eeeseeeesseuseceeesseaseeeesssaaseseeesaageeeess 178 ALIS NNN 179 ALIS 2 Spectrogram ita ice 181 ARQ 6 90 Gpechogram EE 182 MON Par 184 ABGRE MN NG 185 Oe ai GIN AA o O OO OT D m 186 MOEN 187 ARQ M2 242 Se ENG 189 ARG 1 2 942 Se EAN Grend 190 ARQ M4 242 Spectrogram oocccccnccccccnonnnccnnncononononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenannennns 192 ARQ M4 342 Spectrogram EE 193 ARO N Spectogr ai TET EE oaeei 195 ASCII ZT Bit SPE OG Mia nel 196 ASCILG Bil SpectrograAM ME 198 AUTOSPEC Special ee 199 Baudot async Spectrogram cccccccseeeecceccaeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeessaueeeeesseeseeeeeseeaeeeeeesaegeeeeeesas 201 Baudot sync Spectrogram cooooocccccnnnccccncnonnnnnnnncnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnos 202 Figure 217 328 e List of Figures User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Figure 218 Figure 219 Figure 220 Figure 221 Figure 222 Figure 223 Figure 224 Figure 225 Figure 226 Figure 227 Figure 228 Figure 229 Figure 230 Figure 231 Figure 232 Figure 233 Figure 234 Figure 235 Figure 236 Figure 237 Figure 238 Figure 239 Figure 240 Figure 241 Figure 242 Figure 243 Figure 244 Figure 245 Figure 246 Figure 247 Figure 248 Figure 249 Figure 250 Figure 251 Figure 252 Figure 253 Figure 254 Figure 255 Figure 256 Figure 257 Figure 258 Figure 259 Figure 260 Figure 261 Figure 262 Figure 263 Figure 264 Figure 265 Figure
199. een demodulator and de coder will minimize the identification error rate Comprehensive analysis tools allow the manual extraction of technical parameters of unknown and new modem types in order to include these into the knowledge base for future automatic processing The individual software modules communicate via LAN e every module may run on its individual hard ware and transfer the data to the other modules which is the common procedure in large scale multi channel systems if required by the application go2DECODE thus provides the option to use detached receivers to process unknown signals and to supervise the routine work in other locations or on inde pendent hardware In the existing stand alone system all functional units are applied on one individual hardware unit The software modules are neither platform nor operating system sensitive i e they run on any commer cial standard hardware COTS under any standard operating system Windows und Linux Since the modules do not depend on specific hardware the use of new and more efficient hardware generations will increase the performance of go2DECODE by simple means Due to the high modularity with TCP IP based data interchange via LAN go2DECODE and its individual components can be integrated into existing systems or adapted to new tasks in a quick and simple way some of the demodulators and decoders in new modems can be interchanged This facility ensures that the system
200. efault 1 lt add key LogDirectory value log gt l default log relative to application gt lt add key Logl evel value 1 gt lt add key LogProtocol value 0 gt lt add key LogPerRun value 0 gt lt add key LogPerlD value 0 gt lt add key LogMaxFileSize value 2 gt lt add key LogMaxFileNumber value 5 gt lt add key UseGUl value 1 gt lt l default 1 lt appSettings gt lt PreDef 12 lt add key Description value 1 8 kHz IF gt lt add key IF Frequency value 1500 gt lt PreDef 12 lt PreDef 2 gt lt add key Description value 12 5 kHz IF gt lt add key IF Frequency value 12500 gt lt PreDet_2 gt Figure 98 Example of a Configuration The parameters for the input signal can be set in the group box Input Filter Input Filter Remove DC F Full span Start Frequency 4 000 000 Hz End Frequency 000 000 Hz Figure 99 Input Filter 96 e DANA Digital Analogue Audio Interface User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 QS go2DECODE Input Filter Parameter Description Remove DC Removes the DC offset of the input signal This option is particularly relevant for signals from the sound card FulSpan This option deactivates the band pass filter The input signal is not filtered Start frequency Defines the left limit frequency for the band pass filter The value displayed refers to the input signal End frequency Defin
201. elect the item Programs and Features on the Control Panel Then click the item of go2DECODE and press the button lt Uninstall gt E Windows nytime Upgrade CH Windows DVD Maker Fax and 5can Master Media Center Media Player Documents Update XPS Viewer Pictures 1es Music Games Computer Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs Help and Support Shut down m Figure 21 Start Uninstallation The uninstallation process is initialized Acknowledge the uninstallation in the following alert message by striking Yes Windows Installer Are you sure you want to uninstall this product Figure 22 Uninstallation Confirmation The Installer executes the uninstallation process while showing the status messages below Gathering required information Cancel Figure 23 Status Message This status message disappears once the software has been fully uninstalled Note that uninstalling the go2DECODE software will not uninstall the software for WIBU Key Runtime 18 e Installation of the Program User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE To do so select the item Programs and Features on the Control Panel and repeat the above procedure for the items Adobe and WIBU Key Application Demonstration For demonstration purposes go2DECODE DEMO can be started via the appropriate desktop icon or the start menu depending on the installation Calling up go2DECODE DEMO will start th
202. equency is the center of the signal s frequency range Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 368 VDEW Features VDL 2 General Information The VHF Digital Link VDL Mode 2 is an ICAO standard developed by the Aeronautical Mobile Commu nications Panel AMCP providing data communication between aircraft and ground based systems Aer onautical VHF data links use the band 117 975 137 MHz assigned by the International Telecommunication Union Usage Data communication within the Aeronautical Telecommunication Network Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation DPSK Bandwidth Hz 25000 Symbol rate Bd 105000 Table 369 VDL 2 Characteristics 310 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S goa DECODE Da r28 07 500 06 20 06 0001 05 20 08 500 08 20 09 000 06 20 09 500 4 Tm 4 0000000 dBFS 15000 12500 10000 7500 5000 2500 0 2500 5000 7500 10000 12500 15000 Hz Figure 294 VDL 2 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Symbol rate Bd SR tolerance Bd Modulation order 8 S Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s Min burst SNR dB 6 VER file name Table 370 VDL 2 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal s frequency range Status Feature Status Demodu
203. er SCH Windows Fax and Scan Master V Windows Media Center al Windows Media Player Documents ET Windows Update A XPS Viewer Pictures j Accessories a Music CyberLink DVD Solution Games Computer Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs Uninstall go2DECODE Apply for license Help and Support Back Search programs and files Shut down F Figure 87 Start of DANA 90 e DANA Digital Analogue Audio Interface User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Operation of DANA Menu Bar Toolbar DANA C Prdgram Files x86 go2SIGNALS ge2DECODE 3 3 1 D Lea E 3 C rie m BH out as vr Spectrum Display 4000 Parameter Predefined frequencies t No predefined frequencies A n H u Input filter Output signal i Remove DC Frequency 1800 000 Hz E Full span IF fror van file 7 Start frequency 300 000 Hz Mirror F7 End frequency 3300 000 Hz E Time source File MM Position Display C Program Files x86 ga25IGMALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq_m2_242_ gt C Program Files x86 go25IGMALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arg_m2_342_ C Program Files x86 go25IGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arg_m4_242 _ C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq m4 342 EE Play ram Files x86 go25IGNALS g0 DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq n plnk Removeall Parameter Sort Ak 4 Play List gt C Program Files x86 g025JGNALS go 2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo baudotii e M
204. er Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd 120 9 Shit Hz Shift tolerance Hz Table 304 Visel Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 305 Visel Features 280 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Standard Decoders VHF UHF Version History Release Date Editor History Available Decoders ACARS VHF General Information Aircraft Communication Addressing and Reporting System ACARS is a digital datalink system for ex change of small messages between aircraft and ground stations Usage Aeronautical communication on VHF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation primary DSB AM secondary MSK Shit HZ Bandwidth kHz Symbol rate Bd 2400 5 Table 306 ACARS VHF Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 281 S go2DECODE 07 30 06 500 OF 30 07 000 07 30 07 500 07 30 06 000 07 30 08 500 4 JT V 0 0000000 dBFS D 50 100 20000 15000 10000 SUN S000 10000 15000 20000 Hz Figure 273 ACARS VHF Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator G MSK Symbol rate Ed SH tolerance Bd Min burst length s 0 050 Max burst length s Min pause length s Table 307 ACARS VHF Demodulator Settings
205. er Manual go2DECODE 3 4 T go2DECODE Parameter Default Table 292 SP14 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment yes Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 293 SP14 Features SPREAD 51 General Information SPREAD 51 is a synchronous FEC system which was used by the Ministry of Foreign Affairs in Romania Usage Data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Shift Hz 400 Symbol rate Bd 102 7 10 Bit Bauer code Interleaving Alphabet ITA 2 Table 294 SPREAD 51 Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 275 D go2 DECODE 15 08 10 000 15 08 10 500 15 08 11 000 15 08 11 500 15 08 12 000 4 LUI E dB Fs D 50 100 1000 800 600 400 200 200 400 600 GU 1000 H7 Figure 269 SPREAD 51 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd 102 7 Shit He Shift tolerance Hz VER file name spread51 ver Table 295 SPREAD 51 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature n yes es es es es es y Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 296 SPREAD 51 Features SWED ARQ General Information SWED ARQ is an adaptive fsk system which was used for diplomatic commu
206. er Value Modulation FFSK sitt Jm Symbol rate Bd Coding Convolutional FEC Table 354 NMT450 Characteristics 15 09 11 500 15 09 12 000 15 09 12 500 15 09 13 000 15 09 13 500 pr 0 0000000 deFs o 50 100 2000 1750 1500 1250 1000 750 500 250 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 Hz Figure 289 NMT450 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator G MSK Symbol rate Bd 1200 SR tolerance Bd VER file name nmt450 ver Table 355 NMT450 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal s frequency range 304 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Status Feature Demodulation y y i n y Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list y Table 356 NMT450 Features POCSAG General Information The Post Office Code Standard Advisory Group POCSAG pager defines the format used to encode messages and the standards for message transmission Usage Pager in the VHF UHF frequency range used by PTT administrations Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FFSK Number of tones 2 Symbol rate Bd 512 1200 2400 Coding BCH 31 21 Alphabet ITA 5 Table 357 POCSAG Characteristics 15 07 58 500 15 07 53 000 15 07 59 500 15 08 00 000 15 08 00 500 4 It t D 0000000 dBF5 50 100 9000 000 7000 6000 5000 4000 3
207. er of points Display mode Dots Pause Figure 75 Constellation Display Parameter Tab The following parameters are available Parameter Function Channel number There are signals which consist of several signal parts e g the input signal Channel in an MFSK2 modem By using the channel number the channels of such signals can be select ed as the input signal 78 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 D go2DECODE Parameter Function Use this parameter to select the input signal of the display If the automatic production is active you can only select IF input While setting the parameters of the demodulator it may occur that a previously selected input signal is no longer available In this case the item no signal will be displayed Display centre X Definition of the centre of the display in X direction The display range of the real part is set in combination with the Display range Display centre Y Definition of the centre of the display in Y direction The display of the imaginary element is set in combination with the Display range Display range Definition of the range of the display in X direction and Y direction The display range of the real part is set in combination with Display centre X and the display range of the imaginary element is set in combination with Display centre Y The zoom can thus be set manually Display type Us
208. er the image When the display type is inverted the image becomes darker as the brightness increases Contrast Sets the contrast of the display The higher the contrast the lower the number of shades of gray in the image With a high contrast the image has a high definition With a low contrast the image is dim lt Pause gt In Pause the display is stopped not the signal processing Modification of the parameters is possible for a more detailed analysis of the current signal range lt Autorange gt Automatic setting of the displayed range to view shades of gray The mode Autorange ana lyzes approx 12 rows The display is adapted on every change of the range On pressing lt Autorange gt again this process will be deactivated toggle Table 49 Hell Display Parameters Parameters Cursor Tab The cursor parameters are displayed by activating the lt Cursor gt tab of the respective display You can thus insert cursors into the display which serve to select or clarify specific display sections or measure the signal data The lt Cursor gt tab shows the coordinates of the individual cursor positions in editable spin boxes Hel deploy 7 x Cursor E Z Cursor Harmonic Number X Cursar Cursor Cursor 1 125 000 ms 400 ms K Cursor2 375 000 ms K 1000 ms K Difference 250 000 ms E 600 ms Figure 80 Hell Display Cursor Tab Parameter Function The cursors are activated deactivated
209. ers oooccncccccccccoconcnnoconcnnnonononnnnoncnnononnnnononnnnnnnanennos 43 Demodulator Gelechon 45 Decoder Selec E 46 Tab Extras for Modem Parameter Setting nnaennnnnennnennnnennneenrnnrnenrenenee 48 Tab Audio for Audio Out Parameter Setting sse 50 Pon CO TIGA E 51 SOU glo COMMGUL AON REC 51 SDA Signal Displays ccccccccoccccnccccnocconncnnnonononononancnnnonnnancnnnononancnnnonnnnnrnnnonnnanennnnss 51 Displays and Signal Types Available n00annnnnnnennennnenneennnnnnnnneeesernneeneee 51 Signal processing with the GIA 53 Displays Ol A og RiE AREARE 55 Spectrum Sonagram Display ccccccsssesccceceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeees 55 Spectrum DISpIaY NER ROO Ec 65 Time Eye Pattern Display 69 E oe M T OR CE TI a aa aeiaai 73 Constellation Display oooonccncccccnnconccononncnncnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononannnnnnnonanenns 77 PANDI EEE 81 Se Be 83 DANA Digital Analogue Audio Interface 89 TT 89 Operation of DANA EEE A 91 Eon DANA MP 91 Nonu Pr 91 FOODS EEE EN 93 Spectrum RTE IEN 95 Conversion Parameter Setting nn00nnnnnneennnnosennnneneenrnnnnrnnnnenrrnrnrenenne 95 CURAS EE SE EE ER E T 97 SJEL gt EE 99 PMO Production Memory Observer 101 TPM 101 PEN FN 102 HEEN EE 102 SEI o li E 102 Songebedliuem eE HM 104 Manual
210. es the right limit frequency for the band pass filter The value displayed refers to the in put signal Table 60 DANA Input Filter Parameters No entries can be made in the boxes Full Span Startfrequency Endfrequency and Frequency unless No Predefined Frequencies has been selected Output signal Frequency i 1 800 000 Hz E IF from aw File Mirror Time source File hl Figure 100 Output Signal Output Signal Parameter Description Frequency The frequency entered defines the frequency position in the input signal which is shifted to zero in the output signal IF from WAV Selection of IF from the Audio file file If signals are in flipped position LSB USB the mirror mode can be activated to turn these sig nals to normal position Time source Defines the time for the IF signal only in the mode File File The time of the latest modification date of the wave or raw file is used System clock The system clock of the computer is used If Play List is activated all files will be processed as files belonging to one signal Table 61 DANA Output Filter Parameters Play List On selecting the source File in the toolbar DANA will display a play list of loaded files Files cannot be played unless the APC is ready The APC status is indicated in the status bar green dot 9 Sink connected black dot 6 Sink not connected User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 DANA Digital Analogue Audio Inter
211. et 8 no result Cocuelet 13 Decoder run time error occurred in code baudotii Line 24 Output variable too short Size of variable at parameter 2 too small Figure 147 Display of Runtime Error The row number indicated in the error message here Line 24 refers to the specific position in the source code where an inadmissible condition has been identified and the program has been aborted You will find an example in chapter ANNEX 5 Examples 128 e Decoder Adaptation and Development User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Ka go2DECODE Service Support In the event of further questions or problems during the test stage please do not hesitate to contact PLATH AG at Phone 41 31 311 6446 Email support go2SIGNALS ch After the test stage e during the regular use of the product we shall provide support within the scope of the Service and Support Agreements concluded on the acquisition of this product Training As a supplement to this documentation PLATH AG offers comprehensive training e g in decoder crea tion manual analysis and the enhancement of automated production For additional information on the above training options please contact your local sales representative User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Service e 129 go2DECODE ANNEX 1 Port Configuration Apply in detail for the port allocation of the go2DECODE applications with the following conventions Ports for th
212. eter information Compile directory Figure 138 Extras Menu The Extras menu provides three items to facilitate the editing Menu Item Function Auto Indentation Automatically insert as many blanks as in the previous line Parameter information Show list of available parameters for valid DDL commands Compile directory Compile all decoders in specific directory Table 69 Decoder Editor Extras Menu ltems Help Menu Manual F3 Figure 139 Help Menu This menu features the item Manual which serves to display the Instruction Manual to the Decoder De scription Language DDL Toolbar Specific functions can be executed via mouse click immediately on the toolbar 9 G3 6813 a Figure 140 Toolbar The following functions are available Icon Function T Nedsenderdesepton toad decoder description rome ll Save decoder desertion tle Po Uno CHE amp ts LE Copy User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Decoder Adaptation and Development e 121 D go2 DECODE Em Table 70 Decoder Editor Toolbar Icons Shortcuts for Decoder Creation Shortcuts serve to quickly access specific functions in the creation of decoders Function Shortcut Table 71 Decoder Editor Shortcuts Context Sensitive Help This function serves to display the documentation on a valid DDL command To do so position the cursor on a DDL command in the decoder editor and press lt F3 gt Subsequently the software opens the PDF
213. eters is possible for a more detailed analysis of the current signal range Automatic setting of the displayed range to view the total amplitude and frequency range The mode Autorange analyzes approx 12 spectral lines The display is adapted on every change of the range On pressing lt Autorange gt again the process will be deactivated toggle lt Peak hold gt By activating Peak Hold the maximum energies in the spectrum are recorded and dis played as a red curve Table 35 Spectrum Sonagram Parameters Tab Parameters go2 DECODE Cursors Spectrum Sonagram E X Cursor E Y Cursor E Z Cursor 2 Cursor mode e Delta Number 20 E X Cursor Y Cursar Cursor 1 12 000 00 Hz 120 00 dB gt Cursor2 12 000 00 Hz 120 00 dB K Difference 0 00 Hz R 0 00 dB Inv diff 1000 000 00000 m Cursor Cursor 1 00 00 00 000 Cursor2 Difference 00 00 00 000 Inv diff 20 000 000 000 Hz Figure 56 Spectrum Sonagram Display Cursor Tab The lt Cursor gt tab accommodates all functions related to cursor operations except for the Zoom buttons and the relative zoom factor setting These are located on the lt Extras gt tab of the Spectrum Sonagram Display Additionally the spectrum sonagram display features a popup menu and keyboard shortcuts lt X gt lt y gt lt Z gt lt h gt serve to enable and disable the X Y Z cursors and Harmonic cursors Parameter Function The cursors are activated deacti
214. f corrections to the satellite ranging measurements GPS and GLONASS This radio standard is based on the recommendations of the RTCM Special Committee 104 SC 104 Usage Transmission of differential correction signals Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation MSK QPSK Symbol rate Baud 100 300 Coding Parity checksum CRC Table 192 DGPS Characteristics 15 06 16 500 15 06 17 000 15 06 17 500 15 06 15 000 15 06 18 500 k I dBF5 50 100 4 Misa 500 450 400 350 200 250 200 150 100 50 50 100 150 2400 250 300 350 400 450 500 Hz Figure 235 DGPS Spectrogram 228 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Demodulator Settings Parameter Default S goaDECODE Symbol rate Bd SH tolerance Bd G MSK VER file name dgps 200bd msk ver Tuning Table 193 DGPS Demodulator Settings The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Status Feature Demodulation Recognition Decoding DSC General Information Table 194 DGPS Features Status yes yes yes no yes DSC Digital Selective Calling is part of the GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System lt provides automatically formatted distress alerts urgency safety and routine radio telephone calls Usage Data communication over HF VHF Initiation of radiotelephone and MF HF rad
215. face e 97 go2DECODE Position Display gt C Program Files x86 go25IGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demoa alis pink C Program Files x86 q02SIGNALS go 2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arg_6 90 plnk C Program Files x86 go SIGNALS go 2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arq ei cyc8 plnk C Program Files x86 go 2SIGNALS go 2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo arg_e_cyc4 pink File List Playback Parameter Figure 101 DANA Play List Add and Remove Files Files are loaded using the menu item File Open or via the toolbar by clicking the icon 2 In either case a dialog box will open H Open TN G r Wd go2DECODE331 signals HF gt Organize e New folder Move and Remove Jg Downloads Name El Recent Places i Icatel 801h a tel d alis Libraries Bai a En Documents a Music b ds Je arq_6 98 di arq_e_cyc4 n arg e Och A arq_e3_cycs JH arg m2 242 4 JH arg m2 342 4 arg m 242 di arq m4 342 l Pictures BE Videos ed Homegroup jE Computer amp SYSTEM ICH a BACKUP Di Date modified 17 10 2012 09 03 17 10 2012 09 03 17 10 2012 09 03 17 10 2012 09 03 17 10 2012 09 03 17 10 2012 09 03 17 10 2012 09 03 17 10 2012 09 03 17 10 2012 09 03 17 10 2012 09 03 17 10 2012 09 03 17 10 2012 09 03 Type E File folde 3 File folde File folde File folde File folde File folde File folde File folde File folde File folde File folde File folde k
216. fnmasow reem 0000000 ener rooms o CCIR 1 pocsag 1200bd ver EMEN x moune TSS ear 000 Tase mar SSES a 000 0 mew ee Table 89 VUHF Standard Decoders Modem Det Prod Same as Modem File KEENE rn oan e emper O O a 000 i ee O OSO ener MIL 188 110A ser X partly included in STANAG 4539 4415 MIL 188 110A App C STANAG 4539 MIL 188 110B ser X partly included in STANAG 4539 4415 MIL 188 110B App C X X partly included in STANAG 4539 HDR MIL 188 110 39 Tone mil188 110 39tone ver MIL 188 141A ALE 2G 2G MIL 188 110 16 Tone mil 88 110_16tone ver 174 e ANNEX 6 List of Decoders User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 T go2DECODE Modem Det Prod Same as Modem File PSTANAG ASX X stanagsatsver OOOO STANAG 4481 FK Inn Lem DX stanagddoipskvr DX tangas er aragon DX taras ener DX stanag SOS kr STANAG 5065 STANAG 5066 TADIL A EN LINK11 CLEW TADIL B EX X LINK11 CLEW Table 90 Premium Decoders Note For Premium decoders the source code is not available User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 6 List of Decoders e 175 S go2DECODE Standard Decoders HF Version History Release Date Editor History Available Decoders Alcatel 801H General Information Alcatel 801H is an 8 tone MFSK ARQ teleprinter system Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number
217. following simple example gives an initial impression of how to use the language commands and the program structure The intended decoding function is to identify two different start patterns in one signal and to display the resulting ASCII texts A Ha simple Example of Decoder Programming Following the occurrence of pattern 0011 1100 and 0011 1110 each repeated twice two messages of length 208 hit will he decoded as ASCII characters POEGECKECKE XE EE QC QC AE 3C IE JC JE 3E 3E 3C 3C 3E JC C 3E 3E 3E 3C 3C 3E JC 3C 3E 3E HE JE 3C 3E JC IE HE 3E 3E MENE 3C JE IE JE 3E E JE E IE JE E Je dE EE DE DEE VARDEF Variables and initialisations Standard variable size is 32 bit Faund Tolerance 0 Repeat 2 GapLimit 500 256 Frame Input variable of size 256 bit ENDVARDEF I RE EE 3C JC 3C 3C JE 3E JE 3E 3E 3C JE 3E 3E 3E 3E JE JE 3E IE 3E 3E JE 3E 3E 3E 3E JE JE JE 3E 3E 3E 3E IE JE JE HE 3E JE IE DIE HE START Main program HNewsyne Frame 0 Clear input text field gt serach for the twice repeated pattern within the next 500 bit opearchPattern 0011 1100 m Repeat Tolerance GapLimit Found change into 0011 1110 m for second message Br 0011 1120 m for both messages It Found If search successful Read initial pattern and message 208 15 bit from input buffer GetFrame 224 Frame Initial pattern will be shifted out mentiont LSB first logic Frame Frame gt gt 16 Ident
218. from display to display i e magnitude phase fre quency etc Harmonic Several cursors are activated at equidistant intervals In this mode the first cursor will move all other cursors The intervals are defined by grabbing and moving the second or any follow ing cursor The Harmonic function can only be applied in combination with X cursors Y cursors or Z cursors lt serves to measure repeating intervals Delta This button serves to insert a specific number of numbered cursors Number 2 at equidis tant intervals in the area delimited by Cursor1 and Cursor2 Once selected the button is dis abled and the checkbox M Harmonic is ticked This feature allows for convenient activation of the Harmonic function for specific areas without the need to adapt the cursors To cancel the additional cursors deactivate the checkbox M Harmonic Doing so please note that Cursor2 will take the position of the first additional cursor Number Use this spin box to determine the number of cursor lo be displayed in Harmonic mode lt Zoom in gt With enabled cursors the button lt Zoom In gt serves to graphically zoom into the area delim ited by the cursors With disabled cursors the zoom enlarges the area by factor 1 2 each time it is activated X direction only Additionally the user may draw a rectangle in the display window and zoom into this section graphically by means of the button lt Zoom In gt If the display window has acti
219. g noise or external signals excessive bandwidths greater symbol rate selected may cause distortion signals to be visible in the difference magnitude oelect a time interval for the eye pattern display permitting to recognize several symbols in this case e g 400 ms 0 08 0 07 0 06 0 05 0 04 0 03 0 02 0 01 0 00 0 01 0 02 1 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 1 0 07 0 08 0 25 50 A 7 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 60 723 lt 20 034 gt 80 757 ms Figure 126 Eye Pattern Display via Difference Magnitude User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Manual Analysis of Unknown Signals e 113 go2DECODE The demodulated symbols are clearly visible In order to measure simply switch the display to lt Pause gt Activate the checkboxes M X Cursor and M Harmonic Use the cursors to measure the distance of the symbols In this case the individual cursors have been positioned on the centre of the symbols Another option is to use the symbol edges as refer ence points According to the formula SR 1 To the measured symbol interval of 20 07 ms results in a symbol rate of 49 83 Bd Measure Shift and Baud Rate via Demodulator Further the demodulator itself can be applied for automatic measurement of the shift and the symbol rate Select the demodulator FSK2 matched and enter the roughly measured shift and symbol rate magnitudes Note When using the demodulator FSK2 matched
220. gnal Example The modulation order 2 4 8 of PSK modems can be identified in a single dou ble triple squaring by the formation of a peak in the centre of the spectrum Additionally the symbol rate of such a modem can be seen by measuring the frequency interval be tween the main peak and the secondary peak In this process the frequency scaling must be taken in consideration and the measured value must be multiplied by 2 or 4 Display type In mode Line the spectrum is displayed as a closed curve In mode Beam the individual values are displayed as bars Peak hold time When the time adjusted has elapsed the peak hold the red curve in the spectrum will be reset by setting on the current spectrum 0 means no reset M Peak hold pause This checkbox serves to freeze the continuous display after a period specified in the spin box Peak Hold Time button Pause is activated and locked It can only be ticked if the button lt Peak Hold gt has been activated This function will not stop the signal flow between the signal processing modules To reac tivate the continuous update of the display press the button lt Pause gt again toggle switch lt Pause gt In Pause the display is stopped not the signal processing Modification of the parameters is possible for a more detailed analysis of the current signal range lt Autorange gt Automatic setting of the displayed range to view the total amplitude and frequency range The mode
221. gram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator G MSK Type GMSK Symbol rate Bd SR tolerance Bd 3 VER file name Table 364 Tetrapol Demodulator Settings 308 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SN go2DECODE Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal s frequency range Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 365 Tetrapol Features VDEW General Information This SelCal system conforms to the VDEW Vereinigung Deutscher Elektrizitaetswerke recommenda tions Germany It is an analog SelCal system using a sequence of single tones Usage Narrowband FM SelCal system in the VHF UHF frequency range Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation Multitone Coding Character coding Table 366 VDEW Characteristics 15 07 59 000 15 07 59 500 15 05 00 000 15 06 00 500 15 08 01 000 dBF5 D e n AEN Ax E 100 EE 2000 1750 1500 1250 1000 750 500 250 o ZOU 500 50 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 Hz Figure 293 VDEW Spectrogram Demodulator Settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 309 go2 DECODE Parameter Default Tone duration ms TD tolerance ms Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s Min burst SNR dB 0 Table 367 VDEW Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning fr
222. gram Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo si fec pink C Program Files x86 go2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 Demo swed_arq plnk Remove all Figure 192 Input amp Output Signal in DANA User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 5 Examples e 161 y e D go2DECODE default File Edit Display Extras Modem ModemList Windows Help o 100577 1 J mm SX men i EMO DO D BH one J gt a AS a e DI Spectrum Sonagram IF input Channel 1 Modem Morse v J Control Demod Decod Extras Audio 04 05 55 000 Demodulator Morse Range 125 250 z 04 05 55 500 qe 04 05 56 000 Audio in file T 04 05 56 500 04 05 57 000 J E L 0 0000000 a emen dBFS r gt Parameters Extras Y Detection 7 Nominal frequency V Detection quality Centre frequency 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 1 v Signal quality Offset Y SR quality Y Burst length Hill Result display S E em d E No Name Detection QDet QSig QSR Decod SR Shift Nominal freq Wght dec EM 8 080 SI ARQ none os E no sync 0 0 Hz 129 2 Decoder F Pitch 081 SI FEC none 31 25 28 ino sync 97 3 Bd 0 0 Hz 129 2 e 082 SITOR A 170Hz none 55 amp 29 59 amp sync 99 8 BA 133 1 Hz 146 3 E Decoder modified modem I Dash dot ratio 083 SITOR B 100Bd 400Hz none 28 Y 23 16 tino sync 103 6 Bd 0 0 Hz 57 5 7 p 084
223. gure 61 Spectrum Display The parameters are edited via the property sheet as with all displays They are distributed on several tabs Parameter Setting The parameters of the spectrum are displayed by activating the tab lt Parameters gt User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 65 goeDECODE Spectrum Parameters Channel number Input signal Centre frequency 0 0 Hz 7 Frequency range 24 000 0 Hz Maximum level 0 0 dB Minimum level 120 0 dB 3 FFT length 513 x Exp average 80 000 Windowing Squaring Display mode Peak hold time 10 000 s Feak hold pause Figure 62 Spectrum Display Parameters Tab The following parameters are available Parameter Function Channel number There are signals that consist of several signal parts e g the input signal Channel in an MFSK2 modem By using the channel number the channels of such signals can be select ed as the input signal Use this parameter to select the input signal of the display If the automatic production is active you can only select the input IF While setting the parameters of the demodulator it may occur that a previously selected input signal is no longer available In this case the selection no signal will be displayed Centre frequency The frequency section to be viewed is set in combination with the frequency range The centre frequency is the centre of the section Frequency range The frequency section to
224. harachersice eene emen nem nennen het re retener perra reine rens 271 Table 286 SITOR A Demodulator Settings 0000nn000nnn00nnnoannnnnannnonnnnnnannnonnrrnnnnrrrnnrrnnnrrnrnnnrrnnnrrrnnrrenenene 272 Table 287 SITOBSA Features unit Re obe cut em bnc deekes va ee pep ek inui niea Des nes a est seca Eee ennieoles n re pedtEt 272 Table 288 SITOR B Characteristics sess nennen ne nnne het re tretet rere rre reine rois 272 Table 289 SITOR B Demodulator Settings 0000nn000nnn00nnnoanannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnrnnnnrronnrrnnnrrnrnnrrrnnnrrrnnrrennnene 273 Table 290 SITOR B Features 273 Table 291 SP14 Characteristics sssssssessssesseenenm erre 274 Table 292 SP14 Demodulator Geitmgs sra tiissmiirsseonrnii innne inks nin ornan ANDORA a i E 275 Table 293 SP14 Features EE 275 Table 294 SPREAD 51 Characteristics ssessssssessessssenee em emn meme nennen net re triti rere rre rit rires 275 Table 295 SPREAD 51 Demodulator Gettngs 276 Table 296 SPREAD 51 Features inerti tddi 276 Table 297 SWED ARQ Characteristics eeesessessesseseen enm m m mnm nee mnn nnne teer re rre rer rer rr rna tnra 277 Table 298 SWED ARQ Demodulator Gettngs 277 Table 299 SWED ARQ Features 278 Table 300 TWINPLEX Characteristics nono nn nro nn r nr rere trttet re tretit reris 278 Table 301 TWINPLEX Demodulator Settings 000nnn00nnn0annnnnannnnnnnnnnannnonnnnnnnnnnrnnrrnnnnr
225. has a correct symbol rate can be applied in the eye pattern display Set the eye pattern display to the signal input Filtered diff mag Set the Display Type to Eye pattern display and increase the Number of vectors to e g 20 Modify the parameter Time period to a value that will make one to three symbols visible In the mode Eye pattern display the start time of the display is synchronized with the symbol rate from the demodulator The result will be an eye provided an appropriate symbol rate has been selected 114 Manual Analysis of Unknown Signals User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SS goe DECODE 0 040 0 030 0 070 MEE am 0 000 ao 0 020 0 030 0 040 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 ms Figure 128 Eye Pattern Display with Filtered Difference Magnitude If there is no visible eye the symbol rate of the demodulator is incorrect Search for Repeating Frames in Demodulated Bit Stream Activate the bit display Display menu or toolbar to display the demodulated bits 10 X X X XXEXX XEX X XXX XX XX X XX XX X XX X X 11 XXX XX XE XEX X X XX X XX XXEX E E X EXX XX TXM X XXxXXx X x X XXX XXX XX X X X XX XX X 13 X X XXXX XXX XX E EX X X IXXX XXX XXEX X XHX X 14 x XX XX XX XX XX X XXXX XX X X X EXEXX XXX X 15 XXX XX XE EXX EXXX X X XX X XXX XE X XEX X X XXXX X fe EA A A AX INX ZX ZXX XX A EXX X X XXAX X X XE EXXX XEXE X ZXXX XXX 18 X X
226. he display window and zoom into this section graphically by means of the button lt Zoom In gt If the display window has activated cursors the zoom via rectangle will take priority After zooming the rectangle shown as a white dotted line will disappear Otherwise simply click any position in the display window to delete the rectan gle lt Zoom out gt Each time the button lt Zoom Out gt is activated the display area is enlarged by factor 2 With disabled cursors the zoom is exclusively made in X direction lt Pause gt In Pause the display is stopped not the signal processing Modification of the parameters is possible for a more detailed analysis of the current signal range lt Autorange gt Automatic setting of the displayed range to view the total amplitude frequency or phase range The mode Autorange analyzes approx 12 vectors The display is adapted on every change of the range On pressing lt Autorange gt again the process will be deactivated toggle 68 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 goe DECODE Parameter Function Peak Hold When activating Peak Hold the maximum energies in the spectrum are recorded and dis played as a red curve Table 39 Spectrum Display Cursor Parameters Extras Spectrum Parameters Cursor Extras Display Standard Peak hold import export Load Figure 64 Spectrum Display Extras Tab Apart from th
227. he menu bar the toolbar two property sheets and the status bar Together with the SDA go2DECODE DANA will start 22 e Starting go2DECODE User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SN goe DECODE Modem Parameter and Control Toolbar Menu Bar D go2DECODE default File Edit Display Extras M I x 29 a kd AS um ui BH GAY EM BS Gan zx b tw e r lll Spectrum Sonagram IF input Channel 1 ca E es Modem Baddot 2 Stopbit 50Bd 450Hz v y Control Decod Extras Audio 13 32 34 500 Decoder name ot2plus 13 32 35 000 Abbreviation Decoder type 4 p d Edit description 0 0000000 dBFS Result display 6000 4000 2000 0 2000 4000 6000 Parameters Hz 1 v Detection V Nominal frequency S Hil Result display ol Em l 4 Detection quality Centre frequency No Name Detection QDet QSig QSR Decod 009 ARQ M2 242 96Bd 430Hz none 50 99 O no sync Signal quality Offset 010 ARQ M2 342 96Bd 400Hz none 08 44 O amp no sync 011 ARQ M4 242 192Bd 173Hz none 7 83 05 Y SR quality Y Burst length 012 ARQ M4 342 192Bd 400Hz none O 44 n 4 013 ARQ N none 0 44 0 no sync Woht decoder DE 014 ASCII 7 Bit 100Bd 173Bd none 08 42 0 no sync J Decoder Pitch 4 Decoder modified podem Dash dot ratio THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 E THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 J Symbol rate Y Start time THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS O
228. he rectangle Each time the button Zoom Out is activated the display area is enlarged by factor 2 With dis abled cursors the zoom is exclusively made in X direction In Pause the display is stopped not the signal processing Modification of the parameters is possible for a more detailed analysis of the current signal range Automatic setting of the displayed range to view the total real and imaginary part The mode Au torange analyzes approx 12 vectors The display is adapted on every change of the range On pressing lt Autorange gt again this process will be deactivated toggle Table 50 Hell Display Cursor Parameters Hell display Figure 81 Hell Display Extras Tab The lt Extras gt tab features additional options with regard to the display type The list box Display serves to select the color schemes for the displays Bit Display Color Scheme Foreground Color Background Color Table 51 Hell Display Color Schemes Symbols are the output of a demodulation process Every symbol can be viewed as a sequence of bits The bit display shows symbols or bits User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 83 o go2DECODE o 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 104 f YX X X XXX X XXXX XX XX X X X X 105 yY xYxYX X X X X X X X xx x xx 106 5x x x x X Xxx xx x x xx x x XX x x EE 1 x xxx x Xxx Xxx xxx XxXX X X XX XX
229. hes the signal If a modem is found output is produced from this modem for as long as the signal does not change Production If modem Recognition is set to off then manual production is active The APC starts production with the selected modem Record Select this menu item to start recording the demodulator output This item is not available un demodulator less the Automat is deactivated output This item provides a toggle to start and stop the Audio out function Signal source This item serves to select one of the three different SDA operating modes i e DANA SOMO and Signal Memory DANA This mode is the default to analyze wav files and signals which are connected to the sound card The receiving signal source for the APC is DANA Automatically the signal will be buffered in the APC All control parameters except M playback and start time can be edited the button Start is inactive SOMO Subject to the delivered version On selection of SOMO as the signal source the signal production from the SOMO will be ana lyzed and processed by the APC Automatically the signal will be buffered in the APC All con trol parameters except M playback and start time can be edited the button lt Start gt is inactive Signal Memory Use this mode if you want to playback analyze and process recorded signals All control pa rameters can be edited This menu item is only available if the signal processing is stopped Via the dialog Options you can
230. hown on the tab lt Parameters gt Analysis display Parameter Cursor Extras Channel number 1 Input signal IF unbuffered v Filter centre 0 0Hz Filter bandwidth 192 000 0 Hz Start time 0 000 ms Time period 1 000 000 ms Max magnitude 1 00000 Min magnitude 0 00000 Max phase 360 00 E Min phase 360 00 Centre Frequency 0 0 Hz z Frequency range 192 000 0 Hz E Figure 71 Analysis Display Parameter Tab The following parameters are available 74 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Parameter Function Channel number There are signals which consist of several signal parts e g the input signal Channel in an MFSK2 modem By using the channel number the channels of such signals can be selected as the input signal Use this parameter to select the input signal of the display If the automatic production is active you can only select IF input Filter centre Definition of the centre frequency of the filter The filter range i e the signal section to be ana lyzed is set in combination with the filter bandwidth Filter bandwidth Definition of the bandwidth of the filter The filter range i e the signal section to be analyzed is set in combination with the filter centre Starttime The period of time to be viewed is set in combination with the time period Time period The period of time to be viewed is set in combination wi
231. ile read character GetFrame 5 Zeichen read stop bit GetFrame l Stopbits If Stopbits amp 1 1 Fail GoTo NeuSync EndIf i Len Tab Adress Tol Invert OutTab Zeichen 5 a Le D D Level Inval Bitf GoTo ReSync END FE FE FE FE FE IE 3 9 9 3 3 3 9 3 3 3 9 DE 3 IE 9 DE 3 3 3 9 DE 3 3 3 DE DE 3 3 9 DE 3 3 3 9 DE 3 3 3 9 IE 3 3 9 IE IE ALPHA DEF 1 Baudot CCITT BitNo 5 Nolevel 2 ErrSymb _ MSB First TABLE Levell Level2 0 lt gt lt gt qd T 5 2 CR CR Table Section 3 0 9 4 A 5 H BEA 6 H BEER 7 M 3 8 LF lt LF gt 9 L EN 10 R 4 11 6 amp 12 E 8 13 P 0 14 C et 15 V x 16 E sd 17 Z 18 D lt WRU gt 19 B zw 20 S A 21 Y 6 22 F lt gt 23 X d 24 A 25 NM E 26 J lt BEL gt 27 L2 lt L2 gt 28 U RR 29 0 2 30 K E E 31 L1 L1 ENDTABLE END ALPHA DEF Figure 143 Example of a Decoder Program 124 e Decoder Adaptation and Development User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Ka go2DECODE Input Bit Stream Decoded Text Figure 144 Decoder Data Flow Most of the programs apply a choice of the following command types Search Commands starting with Search These commands search for special patterns and identification characteristics within the input
232. iler Table 1 Application Modules Features available Feature APPLICATION APPLICATION Monitoring EE EE Ver signal banawa soz e Samus e Processing o Modem Lists e CSS CSS Spectrum Sonagram Je 8 Semm fe X gt Constetaton Display Inn 6 e Introduction to go2DECODE User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SN goe DECODE Feature APPLICATION APPLICATION Monitoring Time Domain Eye Pattern Analysis Display Hell Display Bit Display Manual Signal Analysis Knowledge Base of Modems New Modem List Load Modem List New Modem Load Modem Change Modem Parameters Result Handling Text Display Display of Measured Parameters Result File for Production Wave Files for A3E J3E Signal Input TCP IP Wave files Raw Files Sound Card Demodulators Analysis Automatic Processing Decoders Analysis Automatic Processing Decoder Development Editor Debugger Compiler DDL Recording IF to Raw Files AF to Wave Files Replay Raw Files Wave Files Table 2 Application Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Introduction to go2DECODE e 7 go2DECODE Installation of the Program System Requirements IBM compatible PC or notebook with a minimum of one hard disk one CD ROM drive and one free USB port dongle version only There may be additional requirements depending on the selected receiver Component Recommended Minimum Processor s Intel Core i5 17 or equivalent
233. in order to recover the original baseband signal This is done by activating lt Deemphasis gt Deemphasis Defines the time constant used for deemphasis For European FM radio this is usually 50 us box and for US radio 75 us Audio band Defines the bandwidth of the demodulated audio signal to be listened to Hz width Gain Control Mode Defines whether to use automatic AGC or manual MGC signal amplification Gan Defines the degree of amplification in MGC mode dB 50 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Table 26 Audio Parameters To activate Audio Out click the speaker icon on the toolbar or use the menu item Extras Audio Out Port Configuration go2DECODE accepts ports between 41001 and 49150 lf these ports are used by another program go2DECODE will not work For details see ANNEX 1 Port Configuration Sound Configuration go2DECODE supports the use of several sound output devices i e standard and multi channel sound cards featuring e g different numbers of channels For details see ANNEX 2 Sound Configuration SDA Signal Displays The signal displays have numerous different tasks depending on the operating condition of go2DECODE When the Automat is on the displays serve to monitor the input signal and to verify the result In manual production i e the Automat is off and the APC attempts to produce results with a modem selected manu ally all display functio
234. io Out Parameter Setting The tab Audio features parameters for Audio Out of signals signal type F Unbuffered First of all these are the parameters for the voice speech demodulator converting the digital IF signal into a digital AF signal Further the resulting AF signal can be amplified either automatically or manually by the gain control parameters Control Demod Decod Extras Audio 0 0 Hz a BFO 0 0 Hz I Filter bandwidth 7000 0 Hz Deemphasis Deemphasis value 50 us E Audio bandwidth 3000 0Hz 0 0 dB H Figure 51 Audio Parameters Parameter Function Demodulator Operating mode of the voice speech demodulator USB Upper one side band modulation LSB Lower one side band modulation AM Two side band amplitude modulation FM Frequency modulation Nominal fre Defines the frequency of the audio signal to be listened to Hz This is the centre frequency for quency AM and FM signals respectively the upper and lower frequency for one side band modulated signals Defines the frequency of the oscillator used to create an audible frequency signal for one side band modulated signals mode USB LSB Hz Filter band Defines the bandwidth of FM signals FM mode only Hz width Deempha All FM systems adopt a system of emphasis where the higher frequencies are increased in am sis plitude before being used to modulate the carrier At the receiver the higher frequencies must be deemphasised
235. ion type Displays the QAM encoding type adjusted V22 or V17 or V32 Constellation Absolute differential phase constellation for OFDM channels Distance Defines the distance between frequency 1 and frequency 2 of an F6 F7B modem F1 lt gt F2 Distance Defines the distance between frequency 2 and frequency 3 of an f6 F7B modem F2 lt gt F3 Defines the distance between frequency 3 and frequency 4 of an F6 F7B modem F3 lt gt F4 F7B mode Mode of F6 F7B i e content of left and right channel Data Data Data Morse Morse Da ta Morse Morse Data Data Morse Morse Data interleaved Invokes dialog to define individual window function and filter parameters Frequency Provided the selected list item in the drop down list box Channel position type is Channel fre table quencies activation of this button will display a table for input of the desired frequency for each channel Using the button lt Init gt in this table the frequency can be initialized at equidis tant intervals based on the current entries in Channel distance and No of channels Manual editing is possible via double click on the respective cell Subsequently the various frequen cies from this table will be used The setting procedure for the parameter Tone position type is identical Increment Defines the increment of the absolute phase in mode OFDM abs phase Increment Defines the increment of the differential ph
236. iotelex calls Mode Properties User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones Shift Hz Bandwidth Hz 500 Symbol rate Baud Table 195 DSC HF Characteristics Standard Decoders HF e 229 S go2DECODE 15 06 36 500 15 06 37 000 15 06 37 500 15 06 36 000 15 06 38 500 k J dBFS 0 50 100 1000 DUU 600 400 200 o 200 400 600 DUU 1000 Hz Figure 236 DSC HF Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd Shift Hz Shift tolerance Hz Table 196 DSC HF Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment HF Combination with other modems modem list Table 197 DSC Features 230 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Q go2DECODE DUP ARQ General Information DUP ARQ is a synchronous duplex teleprinter system with ARQ This modem was used by the Ministry of Foreign Affairs in Hungary Usage Data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Modulation FSK Number of tones 2 Shift Hz 170 Symbol rate Baud 125 Coding 7 bit parity Alphabet ITA 2 Table 198 DUP ARQ Characteristics 15 05 55 000 15 05 55 500 15 05 56 000 15 05 56 500 15 05 57 000 4 dBF5 0 50 100 T 1000 500 600 400 200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 Hz Figu
237. istant intervals In this mode the first cursor will move all other cursors The intervals are defined by grabbing and moving the second or any following cursor The Harmonic function can only be applied in combination with X cursors Y cursors or Z cursors lt serves to measure repeating intervals lt Delta gt This button serves to insert a specific number of numbered cursors Number 2 at equidistant intervals in the area delimited by Cursor1 and Cursor2 Once selected the button is disabled and the checkbox M Harmonic is ticked This feature allows for convenient activation of the Harmonic function for specific areas without the need to adapt the cursors To cancel the addi tional cursors deactivate the checkbox M Harmonic When doing so please note that Cursor2 will take the position of the first additional cursor Number Use his spin box to determine the number of cursors 1o be displayed in Harmonie mode Inv Diff Inverted difference is a helpful function for direct readout of symbol rate determination of which is a major purpose of the Z cursors according to the formula 1 value in box Difference lt Zoom in gt With enabled cursors the button lt Zoom In gt serves to graphically zoom into the area delimited by the cursors With disabled cursors the zoom enlarges the area by factor 1 2 each time it is activated X direction only Additionally the user may draw a rectangle in the display window and zoom int
238. itone Table 315 CCITT Characteristics 13 07 21 000 15 07 21 500 15 07 22 000 15 07 22 500 15 07 23 000 dBFS o 100 SE 1250 1500 1750 2000 Hz 2000 i750 1500 1250 1000 750 500 250 o 250 200 50 1000 Figure 276 CCITT Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Tone duration ms TD tolerance ms Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s Min burst SNR dB Table 316 CCITT Demodulator Settings 286 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Q go2DECODE Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal s frequency range Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 317 CCITT Features e e CTCSS General Information The Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System CTCSS was developed for use with analog voice radios Analog radios equipped with the CTCSS system transmit a tone simultaneously with the voice signal CTCSS radios enable the selection of particular radio units by recognition of the CTCSS tones CTCSS tones are standardized by the EIA TIA but some systems use non standard tones Usage Analog voice radio with station selection Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation Multi tone Number of tones Table 318 CTCSS Characteristics 15 07 37 500 15 07 38 000 15 07 38 500 15 07 39 000 15 07 39 500 4 m
239. l DataPortBase2 Note If you use DataPortBase as well as DataPortBase1 the value of DataPortBase1 will always be used 132 e ANNEX 1 Port Configuration User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 OS go2DECODE ANNEX 2 Sound Configuration Select Audio Output To call the list of existing devices in order to view and select the desired sound device open the dialog box Sound Configuration via the menu item Extras Sound Configuration Signal Sources Signal Processing Sound Devices Production Memory Modem Recognition Name Speakers HP IDT High Definit Y E E 7 Bits per sample Sound Configuration z Le 2 Figure 148 Sound Configuration Dialog Box Parameter Description Select the desired sound device from the list of available devices Sample Rate Select the sampling rate of the selected sound card provided the sound device supports the respective sampling rate The following options are available Channel Specify which sound card output or input is to be used for the output or input of data Bits per Sample Set the resolution of the selected sound device Table 82 Sound Configuration Parameters Configure Multi Channel Sound Device The parameters of multi IO sound devices are preset in an XML configuration file named caralist xml This file which is located in your directory applications holds the configurations and descriptions of various sound cards e number of channels s
240. lation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 371 VDL 2 Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 311 D go2 DECODE VDL 3 General Information The VHF Digital Link VDL Mode 3 is an ICAO standard providing data and digitized voice communica tion between aircraft and ground based systems Ground stations assign Time Division Multiple Access TDMA slots for the exchange of information Usage Data and digitized voice communication within the Aeronautical Telecommunication Network Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation DPSK Bandwidth Hz 25000 Symbol rate Bd 105000 Table 372 VDL 3 Characteristics 10 01 20 500 10 01 21 000 10 01 21 500 10 01 22 000 10 01 22 500 4 n F 0 0000000 dBF5 D EE EE 50 q E nf eee ER eer E eee er 2 Ts oe eee PE e T e ee Medi apes do gt 100 Eom cm cw wo HN CN IR NM CN SIME ET tM e A sonal AA Lita pest e UA Fs es Leas LIRE ES FT J TTY TT 6000 S000 10000 1200 10000 DUU 6000 4000 2000 o 2000 400 ee po OI UTTTT TT TTT TT TT TT TTT TT jou 12000 Hz Figure 295 VDL 3 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator DPSK 2 4 8 A B Symbol rate Bd 10500 Modulation order 8 Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s 312 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF
241. lected The current modem is displayed above the control and modem parameters Additionally it is displayed in bold letters in the result display The remaining control parameters apply to the automatic production of the APC If a signal is applied and not recognized by the APC in automatic search mode either modify the parameters of the existing mo dem or create a new one To edit the modem parameters first select the modem to be edited To do so either use the modem list or double click the respective modem in the result display Now select the tab lt Demoa gt in the modem parameters form to display the demodulator parameters of go2DECODE by editing e g the symbol rate velocity of the signal or the shift interval between lowest and highest frequency of an FSK modem 24 e Starting go2DECODE User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Modem Baudot 1 Stopbit 200Bd 850Hz 5 d m 7 7 7 Control Demod _Decod Extras Audio Demodulator ra 2 matched i Symbol rate 200 000 Bd SR tolerance 5 000 Bd Shift 850 000 Hz Shift tolerance 10 000 Hz Modem type Synchronous z Min burst length 0 100 s Max burst length 1 000 s E Min pause length 0 100 s Burst mode Symbol table Figure 27 Modem Parameter Setting To create a new modem select the menu item New modem on the Modem menu Now change the de modulator type and enter the respective parameters If the demodulated signal is to be
242. lerance duce the shift tolerance value entered to an appropriate value for the demodulator used Choose between the list items Tone distance and Tone frequencies type Select type MSK or GMSK lt Use XML gt Activates deactivates the control of certain OFDM parameters by XML scripts Version Displays the adjusted PSK version A or B In PSK the bit values are encoded by the shift be tween phase angles of the signal the angles depend on the modulation order In version B the number of shifts is doubled Version B allows for an easier recovery of the symbol rate from the signal Voice Mode The voice mode specifies the modulation types to be detected by the speech modem The software can search for single modulation types or combinations thereof In the drop down list box select from the following parameters A3E_J3E One and two side band ASE Two side band amplitude modulation with carrier J3E One side band modulation without carrier J3E_USB One side band Upper side band J3E LSB One side band Lower side band F3E Frequency modulation Once the software detects the voice modulation type to search the result is indicated in the Result Display and a recording is made provided the check box M Audio in file is selected Should the software detect any voice modulation types that do not correspond to the type to search for the Result Display treats the respective modem as if nothing had been detected Invokes dialog to load and or modify XML para
243. m sonagram displays the signal in single frequencies the Figure shows a Morse signal If for example a Morse signal from the demo files is applied it can be de tected near the frequency 0 and the typical pulses are visualized in the sonagram In the result display you will first see the APC search The color of the modem in the list varies depending on the state of recognition e g the Morse line first turns yellow then orange when the demo file for Morse is played This indicates that the Morse signal has been recognized by the APC A moment later the mo dem turns green and the decoded Morse text is displayed showing the final results In demo mode this process repeats with each signal played User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Starting go2DECODE e 23 SS go2DECODE SDA Operating Modes SDA provides the option to supply signals from different sources The following signal sources are availa ble s DANA SOMO Signal Memory These modes can either be set on the menu Extras Mode or the toolbar Further signal sources can be added via the menu Extras Options DANA This is the default to analyze wav files or signals which are connected to the input of the soundcard If you are using DANA as the signal source the APC receives the signal data from DANA DANA features default a graphical user interface to analyze and edit various parameters SOMO Subject to the delivered version By selecting the SOMO as the signal
244. meter file used in mode OFDM Table 86 Demodulator Parameter Functions The applied parameters of every demodulator are depicted in the following table Demodulator Additional Settings Voice Contro Demod Decod Extras Audio Speech A Voice mode Audio in file SELCAL type NONE Sensitivity Low Figure 150 Voice Parameters User Manual go2DECODE 34 ANNEX3 Demodulator Parameters e 141 Ka go2DECODE Demodulator ASK2 OOK Amplitude Shift Keying 2 order amplitude shift keying F6 F7B 142 e ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters Additional Settings Symbol rate 5 000 Bd SR tolerance 0 050 Bd Figure 151 ASK2 Parameters Control Demod Decod Extras Demodulator Range Keying rate Tolerance Audio in file Figure 152 Morse Parameters Control Demod Demodulator Keying rate Tolerance Shift 170 000 Hz Shift tolerance 10 000 Hz 2 Figure 153 F1A Parameters Control Demod Decod Extras Audio Demodulator F6 F7E v Ta made Symbol rate channel A 13 333 Bd Distance F1 lt gt F2 250 000 Hz Distance F2 lt gt F3 250 000 Hz Distance F3 lt gt F4 250 000 Hz Min burst length 0 3758 Max burst length 0 260 s Min pause length 0 1505 G Figure 154 F6 F7B Parameters User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Demodulator Additional Settings FSK 2 matched Frequency Shift Keying Control Demod Decod Extras Audo
245. modulator Settings Table 257 PACTOR III Features Table 258 Piccolo MK6 Characteristics Table 259 Piccolo MK6 Demodulator Settings Table 260 Piccolo MK6 Features Table 261 Piccolo MK12 Characteristics Table 262 Piccolo MK12 Demodulator Settings Table 263 Piccolo MK12 Features Table 264 POL ARQ Characteristics Table 265 POL ARQ Demodulator Settings Table 266 POL ARQ Features Table 267 PSK10 Characteristics Table 268 PSK10 Demodulator Settings Table 269 bGhi teatures eene Table 270 PSK10 AM Characteristics Table 271 PSK10 AM Demodulator Settings Table 272 PSK10 AM Features Table 273 PSK31 Characteristics Table 274 PSK31 Demodulator Settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE List of Tables e 335 SS go2DECODE Tape 27 NN AM PEU A 266 Table 276 RUM FEG ChatraclerisliGS 2 inci heel 267 Table 277 RUM FEC Demodulator Settings sssciiiissoisirrisnieursniininsiiaeninnanaininsaci tanani aaeain eiaa 267 Table 278 RUM FEG PAUS 268 Table 279 SI ARQ Characteristics 2 0 00 ccccccccceeceeccecceeceeceeceecuecuecuecuecaecaesaecaeeaesaeeaueceecueseecueseesuesuesaesaeeaees 268 Table 280 SI ARQ Demodulator Settings 0000nnnnn00nnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnsnnrrresnnrrrrsrnnrrersnnrrresnnrrrersnnrrersenrerenne 269 Table 281 SI ARQ Features 269 Table 282 SI FEC Characteristics 00 nennen nennen nenne nemen terre rerit rere rerit rere 269 Table 283 SI FEC Demodulator Gettngs 270 Table 284 Sl PEG EE 270 Table 285 SITOR A C
246. n Defines the abbreviation of the modem The maximum input is 5 digits Primary demodu Type of primary demodulation USB LSB AM FM lator FM bandwidth Input signal bandwidth for the speech demodulator operating in Voice mode FM lt Deemphasis gt All FM systems adopt a system of emphasis where the higher frequencies are increased in amplitude before being used to modulate the carrier At the receiver the higher frequencies must be deemphasized in order to recover the original baseband signal This is done by ac tivating lt Deemphasis gt Deemphasis box Defines the time constant used for deemphasis For European FM radio this is usually 50 us and for US radio 75 us Nominal Frequen This spin box serves to specify a signal position deviation from the ideal position i e a cy nominal frequency offset to the internal nominal frequency for the current modem Hz Offset nominal The resulting nominal frequency is then the one used by the primary modulator This fea fred ture requires that the parameter Signal Search on the lt Control gt tab is set to Nominal Fre quency Bear in mind the above varies for AM FM and LSB Resulting fre Sum of the value of the field Nominal frequency and Offset nominal frequency The fre quency for signal quency depends on the set up of the demodulator centre Table 25 Modem Parameters User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 49 goeDECODE Tab Audio for Aud
247. n Interchange ASCII is a set of binary values to represent printable characters in electronic communication In the first version of the standard the character length was 7 bit Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Processing transfer and storage of textual information Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation 300 Shift Hz 173 pandwidth Hz 300 Symbol rate Bd Character 1 Start 7 Data 1 Stop Bit Table 127 ASCII 7 Bit Characteristics dBF5 D 50 100 Figure 213 ASCII 7 Bit Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default 15 05 16 500 15 05 17 000 15 05 17 500 15 05 18 000 15 05 18 500 4 P 1000 DUU DUU 400 200 00 400 500 DUU 1000 Hz um u Shift 173 d 196 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S goe DECODE Parameter Default VER file name ascii 7bit 100bd 173hz ver Table 128 ASCII 7 Bit Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Table 129 ASCII 7 Bit Features ASCII 8 Bit General Information The American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII is a set of binary values to represent printable characters in electronic communication In a later version of the standard the character length was extended to 8 bit Usage Processing transfer and storage of textual information Mode Properties Parameter Value
248. n Same function for Huffman alphabets unequal symbol lengths OutText Output of any additional text OutVal Output of a numeric value OutTimeStamp Output of a time stamp to a specific bit of the input buffer Table 76 DDL Output Commands Control Commands These commands serve to provide the calling production Automat with messages such as identification of the correct modem defined loss of identification or status of process ability without any identification statement Using these commands is the precondition for flawless automatic modem identification The status at the time can be verified in the result window during modem search see next figure Examples 126 e Decoder Adaptation and Development User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Command Functions The signal can be processed Ident The modem has been identified but on condition that the production Automat ac cepts the signal quality The modem has been identified clearly enough to omit the quality check The modem is not no longer available Table 77 DDL Control Commands see Result display oso ter mme Q oome No pr mmu 31 258 O 385 ma ose o No 308 m na PAE125 1125 And nane 37 X 4 lin syns Tin 125 1 En 4 k Figure 145 Result Display on Calling the Command Ident In some cases decoders require the processing of the incoming bit stream before saving it to the input buffer These commands must be li
249. n the processing of signals and gives the impression of an analogous FFT s and direct parameter measuring device User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Manual Analysis of Unknown Signals e 105 SN go2DECODE wi Table 64 Measuring and Processing Functions Activate Manual Analysis Apply the unknown signal to the input and start go2DECODE The displays shown on application may vary depending on the current presetting Autostart Select the mode Analysis Online and press the Start button to start the signal flow If not yet active start the Spectrum Sonagram Display to obtain an overview of the signal applied to the input Modem modem v V Control _ Demod i Decod I Extras Audio Main e Mode Modem Recognitian Signal search Frequency range Nominal frequency 0Hz 5 Search range 500 Hz 4 500 Hz IF recording Off Signal Memory I ror so bw Repeat replay o Figure 112 Control Tab on Property Sheet Normally a known signal will be demodulated and decoded automatically if the parameters have been en tered into the knowledge base Deactivate the automatic mode Automat to switch to manual processing To do so click the lt Control gt tab in the property sheet If activated i e engaged deactivate the button lt Automat gt We recommend to create a new blank modem to avoid unintentional modification of the stored modems Select the menu item New modem on the Modem menu the drop
250. nals which are processed by the sig nal processing components There are user defined signal sources and signal sources provid ed by signal servers Signal sources from a signal server cannot be edited An overview is shown on the table Each source has a unique designation an IP Address and 30 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 y goe DECODE Menu Item Function a control port and a server assignment In the column Server you can see either none for us er defined sources or the name of the signal server The display order in the table is equivalent to the display of the signal sources in the selected list of the SDA tool bar To rearrange the or der use the arrows up and down 9 Using the button lt New gt you can create new user defined definitions of signal sources dia log with input fields for designation IP Address and one data port appears The IP Address will define the PC on which the application providing the signal data is running The data port de fines the related port You accept the modified values by selecting the button lt OK gt With the button lt Abort gt you check out of the dialog with no changes Using the button lt Edit gt the dialog for adaptation of the definitions appears This dialog is only active if you have selected a user defined signal source in the table Accept for the predefined filled Input fields the dialog is the same as in the dialog of the button
251. nation with other modems modem list Table 174 Clover 2000 2500 Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 219 goeDECODE Codan 3012 General Information Codan 3012 mode is a proprietary standard developed by CODAN PTY Australia Codan 3212 is similar to the Codan 3012 mode with same modulation parameters and slightly different encoding parameters The Codan 3212 modem also supports decoding of the Codan 3012 mode Usage ARQ and broadcast data communication over HF ALE Mode Properties Parameter Value Number of tones Number of channels symbol rate d o Table 175 Codan 3012 ALE Characteristics Parameter TX modus selective broadcast group call Modulation DPSK Number of tones 4 Table 176 Codan 3012 Data Characteristics 220 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Sr ea n an 15 05 32 500 MAZZ er a a E ISI SS E EI i r al iT 15 05 33 000 m Bn 15 05 33 500 15 05 34 000 15 05 34 500 dBF5 0 50 100 abf ees 2000 1750 1500 1250 1000 750 500 250 o 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 Hz Figure 229 Codan 3012 ALE Spectrogram E EST As A ni E f E 4 E 15 06 41 500 He o ee ee ee Ae s E DN d Ze 5 S pa pe Mr B y 15 06 42 000 p LR dr a UM t G d 1a 15 06 42 500 15 06 43 000 15 06 43 500 dBFS 2000 1750 1500 1250 1000 750 500 250 0 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 Hz
252. ne 95 Figure 97 DANA Predefined Frequencies cccccsssscccecceeseceeeceeeeeeeeeceaaeeeeeessauseceeeseeaeceeessaeeeeessaageeeessaas 95 Figure 98 Example of a Configuration lessen nennen nennen nennen nn nnn n nnn nnns sns anna 96 FOUS NT qe TL cn 96 Figure 100 OPUS liinda 97 FET DANA Play Lamaen 98 326 e List of Figures User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE AdO Or to 1010 1 g NET iii 98 DA 99 DANNE 99 DANA see G EEE EEE EEE EEE 99 DANA ATP 99 de T TP 101 Take ge 8 LE iio n REOR 102 GR EEN 103 User Interface with Popup Menu cocccccccccnccnncccnonccnnonononnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnononnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnononanennnos 104 POPUD MENU FMO c
253. ng There are three parameter suites for conversion and output which are described below Predefined filter settings can be selected in the group box Predefined Frequencies for fast adaptation of the signal input to different receivers Predefined Frequencies Predefined Frequencies No predefined Frequencies v Figure 97 DANA Predefined Frequencies User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 DANA Digital Analogue Audio Interface e 95 D go2 DECODE Description No Predefined Frequencies No predefined band pass filters or centre frequencies are used The filter limits Start Frequency End Frequency as well as the IF Fre quency can be entered by the user Filter limits from 2 5 kHz to 22 5 kHz IF centered at 12 5 kHz kHz IF default centre frequency in SOMO Table 59 DANA Conversion Parameter Options In the configuration file dana conf you can define your own predefined filter settings On every start this file will be read Subsequently you can select the filter in the group field predefined fre quencies The next figure shows an example of two predefined frequencies Standard IF of a SOMO signal with full bandwidth F of 1 8 kHz with full bandwidth used to play the following example lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 5 7 gt lt configuration gt lt appSettings gt lt add key NumPreDefines value 2 gt l default 0 gt lt add key Warn_FileDoesNotExist value 1 lt l d
254. ng frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 171 Cover Features Clover 2000 General Information Clover 2000 mode is a standard developed by HAL Communications Corp USA Clover 2500 is a version with identical modulation types and coding but increased bandwidth 2500 Hz and symbol rate Usage ARQ and broadcast data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Modulation DBPSK DQPSK 8 DPSK 8P2A 16P4A Number of channels 8 Channel spacing Hz 9125 Bandwidth Hz 2000 2500 Symbol rate Baud 78 125 Coding Reed Solomon Table 172 Clover 2000 2500 Characteristics 218 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2 DECODE 15 05 56 500 15 05 57 000 15 05 57 500 15 05 58 000 15 05 58 500 k d dBFS D 50 100 su Mis 2000 1750 1500 1250 1000 750 500 250 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 Hz Figure 228 Clover 2000 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Clover 2000 Modulation order Min burst length s 0 270 Max burst length s 4 400 Min pause length s 0 040 Min burst SNR dB 0 VER file name clover_2000 ver Table 173 Clover 2000 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combi
255. ng frequency is the center of the signal s frequency range Status 0 0000000 7500 5000 2500 2500 5000 Figure 291 TETRA Spectrogram Parameter Default Demodulator Symbol rate Bd SR tolerance Bd Modulation order 2 Version Table 361 TETRA Demodulator Settings Right now the modem does process only downlink signals User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 y Automatic Polarity Adjustment y Combination with other modems modem list y Table 362 TETRA Features ON go2 DECODE d II 7500 10000 12500 15000 Hz Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 307 S go2DECODE Tetrapol General Information Tetrapol is a digital professional mobile radio standard for digital voice and data communication The standard has been designed by Matra and EADS corporation Currently Tetrapol networks exist in 34 countries claiming about 70 of the European Digital PMR Professional Mobile Radio market Usage Communication in the VHF UHF frequency range among closed user groups such as public safe ty military industry and transportation Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation GMSK BT Bandwidth HZ Symbol rate Bd 8000 Coding FEC encryption Table 363 Tetrapol Characteristics 14 53 19 500 14 53 20 000 14 53 20 500 14 53 21 000 14 53 21 500 4 n t 0 0000000 dBFS 50 100 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 D 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 He Figure 292 Tetrapol Spectro
256. nge to view the total amplitude frequency or phase range The mode Autorange analyzes approx 12 vectors The display is adapted on every change of the range On pressing lt Autorange gt again the process will be deactivated toggle lt Symbol rate gt Switch the display of the symbol rate pins in the eye pattern display on and off toggle func tion by using this parameter Table 40 Eye Pattern Display Parameter Parameters Cursor setting The cursor parameters are displayed by activating the lt Cursor gt tab of the respective display You can thus insert cursors into the display which serve to select or clarify specific display sections or measure the signal data The lt Cursor gt tab shows the coordinates of the individual cursor positions in editable spin boxes User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 71 go2DECODE Eye pattern display E X Cursor E YKursor Harmonic Delta Number X Cursar Cursor 1 Cursor 2 Difference Inv diff Zoom in Figure 68 Eye Pattern Display Cursor Tab The following parameters are available Parameter Function The cursors are activated deactivated in X direction They are used to measure values of time Y Y Cursors The cursors are activated deactivated in Y direction They are used to measure the values on the Y axis which vary from display to display e phase frequency etc wl Harmonic Several cursors are activated at equid
257. nic Several cursors are activated at equidistant intervals In this mode the first cursor will move all other cursors The intervals are defined by grabbing and moving the second or any following cursor The Harmonic function can only be applied in combination with X cursors Y cursors or Z cursors lt serves to measure repeating intervals lt Delta gt This button serves to insert a specific number of numbered cursors Number 2 at equidistant intervals in the area delimited by Cursor1 and Cursor2 Once selected the button is disabled and the checkbox M Harmonic is ticked This feature allows for convenient activation of the Harmonic function for specific areas without the need to adapt the cursors To cancel the addi tional cursors deactivate the checkbox M Harmonic Doing so please note that Cursor2 will take the position of the first additional cursor Number Use ts spin box to determine the number of cursor o be displayed in Harmonic mode Inv diff Inverted difference is a helpful function for direct readout of symbol rate determination of which is a major purpose of the Z cursors according to the formula 1 value in box Difference lt Zoom in gt With enabled cursors the button lt Zoom In gt serves to graphically zoom into the area delimited by the cursors With disabled cursors the zoom enlarges the area by factor each time it is activated X direction only Additionally the user may draw a rectangle in t
258. nication with Swedish em bassies This system is no longer in operation 276 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Q go2 DECODE Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Modulation Number of tones Shift Hz Symbol rate Bd Alphabet CCIR 476 Table 297 SWED ARQ Characteristics 15 07 55 000 15 07 55 500 15 07 56 000 15 07 56 500 15 07 57 000 dBF5 1000 DUU 600 400 200 o 200 400 600 S00 1000 Hz Figure 270 SWED ARQ Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Symbol rate Bd SR tolerance Bd Shit He Shift tolerance Hz Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s VER file name Table 298 SWED ARQ Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 277 S go2DECODE Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 299 SWED ARQ Features TWINPLEX General Information TWINPLEX is a 2 channel frequency domain multiplex ARQ system for data communications Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones a FSK 4 Symbol rate Bd Error correction Alphabet ITA 3 Table 300 TWINPLEX Characte
259. nnnnnnnnnnononnnnononnnnnnnanennss 126 Table 76 DDL Output COITIITidliQS e ousot partu eege gebeten 126 Table 77 DDL Control Commands occcccccccnncccncnncononcnnonononnnonononnononnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanrnnonennnnnnnanenns 127 Table 78 DDL Pre Processing Commande 127 Table Z9 Ee SDA POTIS secsentorererrine ina rs e E EEE EER 131 TEN 131 FEE NPR 132 Table 82 Sound Configuration Harameters 133 Table 83 Multi Channel Sound Configuration Parameters sese 134 Table 84 Sound Device Configuration Tags sessi nennen nennen nenne nnne nares 135 Table 85 Demodulator Parameter Combinations with Signal Types cccccocccnnccccccnconccononncononononncononnnnns 138 Table 86 Demodulator Parameter Functions ccoocccccconcnnccconcncononcnnononnnnnononcnnononnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnonennnnnnnanenoss 141 TE BETENT 151 TER RENEE NN 173 Table 89 VUHF Standard Decoder Lar 174 TENNE NN 175 Table 91 Alcatel 80114 CHaraCleri Sti avatarer 177 Table 92 Alcatel 801H Demodulator Settings scessiiscicssironrderniciiiraininea ra 178 Table 93 Alcatel 801H Features coooccccccoccnncconnnncoconcnnonononnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonennnnnnnanenns 178 Table 94 ALIS CHA ae CNIS TTD actas 179 Table 95 ALIS Demodulator Gettngs 180 Table 96 ALIS Features oocccccccncnnccconcnconononnnnonnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnenennnnnnnanenns 180 Table 97 ALIS 2 Charac
260. nnnnsssssnnnnnnnnnns 150 dover Iil Ici erie ETE 150 Clover 2000 Paramete ESPERE RT Tm 150 Clover 2500 Parameters occccccconnconccccnoncnnnccnnonconnnonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnrnnrnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnas 151 Coquelet gl 151 Pactor MN Tbe EEE 151 go2DECODE with R amp S Receiver Connection oocccccncccccnnnocccnnnccnnnnnanncnonnnnnnonnnancnnnnncnnnnnnanncnnos 159 eiue eq 154 go2DECODE with IZT Receiver Connection oooccccnccccncnnonnccnnnccnnnonanncnonnnnononnnancnnnnnnnonnnnannnnnns 155 Select Demo Mode naannnnnnaannnnnnnnnnnonrnnnnessrnrrrnsrnrerensrrrrrosrnrrrrsrnrrrensnrrrrrnnrrresnnnrreosnnrrrrnenrerenne 157 DANA SDA and APC with Signals from wav Files 158 Signal Generation Using SOMO nennen nnn nnn nnne nennen nennen 159 Input Signal in DANA with Filter Range 3 6 kHz and Output Shift ssssssesseee 159 Signal in SDA Processed by AC 160 Input amp Output Signal in DANA T 161 Speech Signals in SDA Processed by APC ooocccccccnccnccconcnnoconcnnnnnonnnnononennnnonnnnnonannnnononennnnnos 162 Signal Generation USING SOMO oscars ciaci n dcir 163 Morse Signal Played Back with DANA and Identified in SDA i uunnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrrrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 164 Decoder PEO AMINO EEE TL 165 Demodulator Decoder Gettmgs 166 ECS N DE oe AA e O a 166 A Vd DIE EEE NE OU o NE 167 Alcatel 801H Spectrogram cccccccccccsssseceecceeeceecceeeeceeess
261. nrnnnrnnnnerrsnrrennnnne 279 Table 302 TWINPLEX i TT 279 Table 308 Visel EE Leit e 280 Table 304 Visel Demodulator Gettmge 280 Table 305 VISS EN RRRRERRRTEEEPR 280 Table 306 ACARS VHF Charachertstce 281 Table 307 ACARS VHF Demodulator Gettmgs 282 Table 308 ACARS VHF Fealtl tes ee ntss 282 Table 309 AIS Characteristics e pis 283 Table 310 AIS Demodulator Gettngs 284 Table 311 AIS Features 284 Table 312 CCIR Characteristics 1 ee 284 Table 313 CCIR Demodulator Gettmges 285 Table 314 CCIR FAT a a 285 Table 315 CCITT EE ee is 286 Table 316 CCITT Demodulator Settings 000nnn000nnn0annnoannnnnannnnnnnnnrnnnnonnrnnnnnnnrnnrrennnrrrnnnnrnnnrrrenrrennnene 286 Table S1 COIT ii poc 287 Table 318 CT GSS Characidae 287 Table 319 01055 Demodulator SetlngS scence as 288 Table gt TE SPENN 288 TVETEN 289 Table 322 DMR Demodulator Settings ouod escas loquere id eee 289 TVEN DMR E DEEN 289 Table 324 dPMBR Gharaclterisli6S sesser 290 Table 325 dPMR Demodulator Settings 000nnn00nnnn0nnnnnannnoannnnnanenonnnnnnnnnnonnrrnnnnrrrrnrrennnrrrnnnrrnnnrrrenrrenenene 290 Table 326 0PMR FCA i i 291 Table 327 DSC VHF Characteristics 2 cccccceccccccecceececcecceeceeceececaecaeeaecaeeaeeceeceeceecueseecueseesueseesaesueeaess 291 Table 328 DSC VHF Demodulator Gettmges 292 Table 329 DSC Features aaa 292 Table 330 EEA Characteristics usa en sepe Scan cnp o petra anai aA
262. ns are enabled such as e Monitoring of the input signal e Measuring of signal parameters for example modulation type symbol rate modulation order e Quantification of the signal and demodulation quality e Identification of the modem parameters in the signal as well as in the demodulated bit stream Displays and Signal Types Available The following displays are available Display Application Spectrum Sonagram Monitoring of input signal measuring of bandwidth measuring of signal start or sig nal end burst length measuring measuring of the shift in FSK etc Spectrum Display Frequency and level measuring resolution to MHz range quadrature for identifica tion of PSK signals etc Constellation Display Determination of the version in PSK modulation order in PSK QAM etc The func tion difference phase produces a vertical display even if the parameter setting for the signal centre is not perfect Eye Time pattern Display Verification of the symbol rate and the signal quality as well as measuring on the time signal oscilloscope Analysis Display Simultaneous magnitude frequency and phase measuring Hell Display Identification of frames patterns etc by means of the intermediate results of a de modulator as well as measuring of the symbol rate Bit Display Identification of frames patterns synchronous words etc of the demodulated sig nals Table 27 Display Types User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and
263. ns detect ed this way the data stream can be read out and processed in steps Optionally pre processing operations i e the modification of the incoming data stream can be carried out before saving the data in the input buffer User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Decoder Adaptation and Development e 123 Decoder editor baudot2plus File Edit Extras Help 5 a Ed wen KOBE DE IE IE DE 3 3 3 3 DE 3 3 3 3 DE 3 3 3 IE DE 3 3 3 3 DE 3 3 3 39 DE 3 3 3 IE DE IE 3 IE 3 9 3 3 3 IE IE 3 3 IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE c Copyright PROCITEC GmbH 2008 Baudot 1 Start Bit 2 nd mor Stop Bit SRCSfile baudot2plus txt v Revision 1 4 Date 2008 08 26 09 57 5 VARDEF Zeichen Startbit Stopbits Bitf Level Inval Gap Found ENDVARDEF DE IE 3 IE IE IE 3 IE IE IE DE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE 9 IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE IE START 1Z New synchronising NeuSync auto invert 1 Search a block of synchroneous frames with exactly 2 Stop bit Repeat Tol GapLim SearchPattern 11XX XXXO m 8 0 Bitf 128 Gap Found If Found Ident Modem indentified Else Fail GoTo NeuSync EndIf ReSync Sync For following frames any number of stop bits are gccepted search start bit Startbit 1 While Startbit amp 1 0 GetFrame 1 Startbit Program Section EndWh
264. ntrol of symbol rate and signal quality Measurement at the time signal oscilloscope Constellation Display Determination of type and modulation order with PSK QAM The function Difference Phase creates an upright display even if the parameters of the signal frequency have not been set exactly Bit Display Detection of frames patterns synchronous words etc in the demodulated data Hell Display stream Online and Offline Analysis With a signal memory of 5 min which automatically takes records in online mode i e the last 5 min are available for analysis after switching to offline mode Cursor Functions Measurements of time frequency amplitude angle level etc Harmonic Cursor This cursor allows for precise measurement of signals with equidistant contents symbol rate harmonics etc Universal analysis demodula Processing of the signals down to bit level tor with free parameter set The temporary results of the demodulator AM demodulation FM demodulation ting filtered time signal and many others can be used immediately as an input for analysis displays expanded analysis options e g analysis with symbol rate in the centre of the symbols via demodulated signal contents etc Spectrum via AM demodulat Determination of the symbol rate with unknown signals modulation type also un ed time signal known Universal freely programma Decoding of the demodulated data stream ble decoder Fast visualising up to 1 000 Assists i
265. o o 8 Modem type Asynchronous VER file name baudot async 50bd 450hz ver Table 137 Baudot async Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 138 Baudot async Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 201 go2DECODE Baudot sync General Information The synchronous Baudot mode is a means to transfer printable characters over a communication chan nel Synchronisation in this case is achieved by using a fixed character length and a combination of Start and Stop Bit of reverse polarity Usage Transfer of textual information Mode Properties Parameter Value 200 Shit He Bandwidth Hz Symbol rate 8 mm Table 139 Baudot sync Characteristics 15 05 11 500 15 05 12 000 15 05 12 500 15 05 13 000 15 05 13 50 4 k dBF5 D 50 100 wT 1000 DUU DUU 400 200 U 200 400 600 DUU 1000 Hz Figure 217 Baudot sync Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Symbol rate Bd 200 SR tolerance Bd 5 Shift Hz 850 Shift tolerance Hz 10 VER file name baudot_sync_200bd_850hz ver 202 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Table 140 Baudot sync Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Fe
266. o a different folder click Browsex and select another folder ou can choose not to install the Wbuk ep tools by clicking Cancele to exit Setup Destination Folder C Program Files KEW IBLUEEY Browse Back Next gt Cancel Figure 8 Select Destination Folder Confirm with lt Next gt In this dialog box specify the target directory for the WIBU Key tools In case the folder specified does not exist the following message will be displayed Sp 8 r Ca The specified folder does not exist WE Should Setup create the folder a Figure 9 Create a New Folder Click lt Yes gt to have Setup create this folder On completion the following dialog will be shown 12 e Installation of the Program User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Select the WibuKey components you like to install Iv i32 bit WkNetAWKLAN Network Server Install as NT service with autostart WkNet Network Server for Novell Netware WM WkLAN AWkNet Network Monitor 32 bit WkNet Network Monitor 16 bit Additional WibuKey Tools Once you have selected the components you wish to install press the Next button to complete the installation lt Back Next gt Cancel Figure 10 Select WibuKey Components Now select the components you require and click lt Next gt IF you press sMext the following tasks will be performed Operating system Windows 7 P Source path CALI sers s
267. o this section graphically by means of the button lt Zoom In gt If the display window has activated cursors the zoom via rectangle will take priority After zooming the rectangle shown as a white dotted line will disappear Otherwise simply click any position in the display window to delete the rectan gle lt Zoom out gt Each time the button Zoom Out is activated the display area is enlarged by factor 2 With disabled cursors the zoom is exclusively made in X direction lt Pause gt In Pause the display is stopped not the signal processing Modification of the parameters is possible for a more detailed analysis of the current signal range lt Autorange gt Automatic setting of the displayed range to view the total amplitude frequency or phase range The mode Autorange analyzes approx 12 vectors The display is adapted on every change of the range On pressing lt Autorange gt again the process will be deactivated toggle 72 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 LS go2DECODE Parameter Function Symbol Rate Switch the display of the symbol rate pins in the eye pattern display on and off toggle function by use of this parameter Table 41 Eye Pattern Display Cursor Parameters Extras Eye pattern display Figure 69 Eye Pattern Display Extras Tab The lt Extras gt tab features additional options with regard to the display type The list box Display serves to select the
268. of HF VHF UHF signal go2DECODE go2DECODE is a standalone software for signal recognition demodulation decoding speech detec tion signal recording and technical signal analysis D go ANALYSE go2ANALYSE is a bit stream analysis software for manual determination of code characteristics D go2 RECORD go2RECORD is a powerful integrated solution for monitoring recording and extraction of wideband signal scenarios in a user friendly and interactive way 2 e General User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SN go2DECODE Introduction to go2DECODE Short Description of the Programs go2DECODE is built of the following functional units APC Automatic Production Channel SDA Signal Display amp Analysis DANA Digital ANalogue Audio Interface SOMO SOftware MOdulator On the one hand the perfect coordination between the software modules SDA APC and DANA increases the efficiency of go2DECODE On the other hand each of these modules will operate perfectly on its own Figure 1 provides a functional overview of the software modules SDA APC DANA and SOMO in combi nation with a selected range of potential signal sources The lower section of the figure shows potential signal sources which are either linked internally to the sound card of a computer SOMO any type of software player or delivered to the system via the ana logue input of the sound card line in base band output of any receiver see central left section
269. of tones NS Tone length ms Tone spacing Hz Table 91 Alcatel 801H Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 177 0 go2DECODE 15 04 01 000 15 04 01 500 15 04 02 000 15 04 02 500 15 04 03 000 15 04 03 500 15 04 04 000 mM 0 0000000 dEF5 D 50 100 1000 800 600 400 200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 Hz Figure 200 Alcatel 801H Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Coquelet Tone duration ms TD tolerance ms No of tones Tone distance Hz VER file name alcatel 801h ver Table 92 Alcatel 801H Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 93 Alcatel 801H Features 178 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ALIS General Information go2DECODE ALIS is a simplex ARQ teleprinter system developed by Rhode amp Schwarz Usage Transfer of textual information over HF with automatic Link setup Mode Properties 15 04 34 500 15 04 35 000 15 04 35 500 15 04 36 000 15 04 36 500 dBF5 D 50 100 1000 DUU Demodulator Settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Parameter Modulation Value FSK Number of tones 2 Shift Hz Symbol rate 170 Bd 228 7 Error correction CRC 16 Alphabet ITA 2 Table 94 ALIS Characte
270. oise for a specific time after playing back a file with deactivated Loop function This is done in order to empty the APC buffers When the checkbox M auto output rate in the group box Signal Processing is activated DANA will choose the output sampling rate automatically otherwise DANA will select a value close to the one specified in the spin box nominal output sample rate 92 e DANA Digital Analogue Audio Interface User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Menu Item Function Buffer management Flush Signal processing Auto output rate Nominal output sample rate 24000 Hz Sound Configuration If your system features various sound cards e g with different numbers of channels use this item to select and configure the existing sound input devices Select the desired device in the displayed dialog box enter the values for sample rate and bits per sample and edit the num ber of channels Table 56 DANA Extras Menu Function About Figure 93 Menu Help Menu Item Function Help Select this item to display information about DANA About Table 57 DANA Help Menu Function Toolbar O IA see CI Signal source Figure 94 DANA Toolbar Function NELLLLLLLL L LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLITTT Load wav or raw file Signal source Sound The signal is received from the current recording source of the system with 48000 Hz The wav file can be played by using e g Windows Media Player
271. olerance ms Tone position type Equidistant frequencies Tone distance Hz 7 813 Table 229 MFSK8 Demodulator Settings The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE 300 250 200 i50 100 50 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Hz Standard Decoders HF e 245 S go2DECODE Feature Status Demodulation yes Decoding Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 230 MFSK8 Features MFSK16 General Information MFSK16 is a mode for digital data communication in the amateur radio domain Usage Transfer of textual information by radio amateurs over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones FSK Tone spacing Hz Bandwidth Hz Symbol rate Bd Error correction Table 231 MFSK16 Characteristics 15 06 18 500 15 06 19 000 15 06 19 500 15 06 20 000 15 06 20 500 4 m F dBF5 50 100 500 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 50 100 150 00 250 300 350 400 450 500 Hz Figure 248 MFSK16 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings 246 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Parameter Default Demodulator Multitone MFSK Tone distance Hz Table 232 MFSK16 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Recognition
272. on Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 347 Golay Pager Features 300 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 D go2 DECODE MPT1327 General Information MPT1327 is a Signaling Standard for Trunked Private Land Line Mobile Radio Systems issued by the British Radiocommunication Agency Usage Mobile voice and data communication Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FFSK Number of channels 1 1024 Bandwidth Hz Symbol rate Bd Table 348 MPT1327 Characteristics 15 08 10 500 15 09 11 000 15 09 11 500 15 08 12 000 15 08 12 500 4 II F O 0000000 dBF5 0 50 100 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 Hz Figure 287 MPT1327 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default GIMSK Symbol rate B SH tolerance Bd Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 301 S goeDEGODE Table 349 MPT1327 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is 1500 Hz above the low end of the signal s frequency range Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 350 MPT1327 Features Restriction This decoder processes data on the TSC Trunking System Controller level only not on the RU Radio Unit level N
273. ons Since the measuring of the symbol rate will not require a precise frequency resolution set the FFT length to a value at which the symbols are clearly recognized In this case said value is 512 The number of rows created per second must be increased considerably to allow for visual recognition of the time shift between the two frequencies This is achieved by changing the value in the spin box Lines Second on the lt Parameters gt tab Appropriate values would range e g from 600 s to 1000 s Press lt Pause gt The screen should now resemble the following figure 110 e Manual Analysis of Unknown Signals User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Q go2DECODE 12 45 34 800 12 45 34 900 12 45 35 000 12 45 35 100 12 45 35 200 12 45 35 300 12 45 35 400 12 45 35 500 12 45 35 600 dBFS 50 100 4400 1200 um am em am 200 O om am em om 1000 1200 1400 23 Fe Figure 122 Zoom in of the Spectogram The sonagram has been expanded The number of rows created per second has been increased consid erably The exact shift between the frequencies can clearly be seen Now activate the checkbox M Z Cursor with the extension M Harmonic on the Cursor tab Additional red cursors will appear at equidistant distances to the green and the red cursors X Cursor Y Cursor 12 000 00 Hz E 120 00 dB E Cursor2 iz 000 00 Hz 120 00 dB E Difference 24 000 00 Hz 0 00 dB Inv diff 0 04167 ms Z
274. ontact info procitec de User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters e 151 SN go2DECODE ANNEX 4 Receiver Support During the installation process of go2DECODE you can install three additional components as an option For detailed information please refer to the Installation Instructions The first two components support the integration of two types of receivers i e a Rohde amp Schwarz ESMB receiver and receivers from the IZT R3000 family The third option supports external hardware modems for content production within the go2DECODE environment Using Rohde amp Schwarz ESMB Receivers go2DECODE can immediately analyze data obtained from R amp S ESMB monitoring receivers The monitor ing receiver uses an R amp S DX200 to transfer the data via LAN interface Personal Computer Standard PROCEED DANA SDA APC R amp S ESMB PUNIRE Hansen dn 1 RRS RAMOND S EOS pu R amp S DX200 Software Figure 184 go2DECODE with R amp S Receiver Connection The R amp S receiver is configured either manually by a simple telnet program or automatically by the R amp S RAMON software sending the data to the module eb200ifc This module receives the data from the R amp S receiver in UDP format and converts it into the format required by the APC The interface between the R amp S DX200 and the eb200ifc is
275. operty sheet User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Manual Analysis of Unknown Signals e 107 OD go2DECODE Spectrum Sonagram 1 Parameters Cursor Extras Channel number Lk Input signal IF unbuffered z Centre frequency 0 0Hz Frequency range 24 000 0 Hz Maximum level 0 0 dB Minimum level 120 0 dB FFT length 512 T Exp average 80 000 Windowing Hanning h Lines second 100 s Display mode Lines x Peak hold time 10 000 s E Pause Figure 115 Spectrum Sonagram Parameters Tab on Display Property Sheet oubsequently the spectrum sonagram should have the following appearance 12 45 11 000 12 45 11 500 12 45 12 000 dBFS Sc 20000 15000 10000 om 0 S0 1000 1500 2000 Hz Figure 116 Corrected Scale The FSK signal is clearly visible in symmetry with the origin The noise level is 125 dBFS The demodulators expect to receive their signal in a symmetrical arrangement around the centre 0 Hz If the input signal is outside the centre adjust the signal by use of DANA parameter Output Signal Fre quency A coarse setting is sufficient to carry out the following analyzing steps Measure Signal Centre and Shift Activate the checkbox M X Cursor on the Cursor tab in the display control to obtain an enlarged view of the relevant areas of the spectrum 108 e Manual Analysis of Unknown Signals User Manual go2DECODE 3 4
276. or 1750 000 Hz fo 1000 1250 1500 Multitone FSKn Tone duration ms 4 153 TD tolerance ms 0 100 No of tones Tone position type Equidistant frequencies Tone distance Hz 240 816 Min burst length s Max burst length s 0 040 0 350 Min pause length s 0 070 VER file name Table 98 ALIS 2 Demodulator Settings The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment alis2 ver Status Table 99 ALIS 2 Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 181 go2DECODE ARQ 6 90 General Information ARQ 6 90 is an ARQ mode similar to SITOR for the exchange of teletype data over a radio channel in a robust way Usage Basic data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation 2 400 200 ARQ Number of tones Shift Hz Symbol rate Bd Error correction Alphabet CCIR 476 Table 100 ARQ 6 90 Characteristics Bandwidth Hz 600 15 04 31 500 15 04 32 000 15 04 32 500 15 04 33 000 15 04 33 500 4 n 3 0 0000000 dBF5 1000 DUU 600 400 200 U 200 400 600 DUU 1000 He Figure 203 ARQ 6 90 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Symbol rate Bd 5 400 20 Sh toleran Bg s Shift Hz d Shift tolerance Hz Min burst length s 182 e Standard Decoders HF User
277. or Parameters nnn00nnnn0annnnnannnnannnnnnnnnnenrnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnrnnnnnrrennnrrrenerene 80 Table 48 Constellation Display Color Gchemes 80 Table 49 Hell Display Parameters Parameters 000nn000nnn00nnnnnannnonannnnannnonnnnnnnnrnrnnnrnsnnrrrnnrrronnrrennrrrennerene 82 Table 50 Hell Display Cursor Parametere 83 Table 51 Hell Display Color SCHEMES sion rd 83 Table 52 Bit Display Parameters ParameterS 001nnn00nnnnannnnnannnnnnnnnnunrnonnrrnnnnrrrnnrrrrnnrrennrrronnrrennrrrnnnrrene 86 Table 53 Bit Display Extras Parameters cccoconcccccccnnncononcnnoconnnnnononcnnononcnnononnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnonancnnnnonnnnnnnos 87 Table 54 DANA File Menu Funchons 92 Table 55 DANA Control Menu Funchons n aannnnaannnnannnnannnnnannnonnnrnnnnrrrnnrrnnnnrrrnnrrrnnnrrennrrrnnnrrennrrrnnnrrene 92 Table 56 DANA Extras Menu Function cccccocccccccccnncoconcnnccnnnnnnnnnnconononcnnononnnnnononnnnnnonnnnononnnnnonannnnonannnnnnnos 93 Table 57 DANA Help Menu Function cooccnccccccnncccnnnncoconcnnnccnnnnnnnnncnnononennnnonnnnnononnnnononnnnnnennnnnonannnnnnannnncnnas 93 Table 59 DANA Keele LE 94 Table 59 DANA Conversion Parameter Options ccccconnncccccccncncnncoconnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnonnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanonns 96 Table 60 DANA Input Filter Parameters nannnn0annnnannnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnonnrnnnnnnrrnnrrnnnrrrsnrrrnnnrrrnnrrronnrrnsnrrrnnnrrene 97 Table 61 DANA Output Filter Parametere 97 Table
278. oxes Constellation display Cursor El XY Cursor i E XY Cursor2 Harmonic Delta Mumber Magnitude Phase Cursor 1 0 00000 s Cursor2 0 00000 E 0 09 Difference 0 00000 H one Figure 76 Constellation Display Cursor Tab User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 79 oeDECODE 39 Parameter Function XY Cursor 1 The cursors are activated deactivated in XY direction They are used to display the current value in difference of phase XY Cursors 2 The cursors are activated deactivated in XY direction They are used to measure the previous val ue in difference of phase Harmonic Several cursors are activated at equidistant intervals In this mode the first cursor will move all other cursors The intervals are defined by grabbing and moving the second or any following cur sor The Harmonic function can only be applied in combination with X cursors Y cursors or Z cursors lt serves to measure repeating intervals lt Delta gt This button serves to insert a specific number of numbered cursors Number 2 at equidistant in tervals in the area delimited by Cursor1 and Cursor2 Once selected the button is disabled and the checkbox M Harmonic is ticked This feature allows for convenient activation of the Harmonic func tion for specific areas without the need to adapt the cursors To cancel the additional cursors de activate the checkbox M Harmonic Doing so please note that Cursor2 will take the
279. parameter signal frequency set in DANA All negative frequencies are below the signal centre all positive frequencies are above the signal centre The energy is drawn on the Y axis The energy is displayed in the spectrum as the logarithm of the meas ure dB The unit of the spectrum is dBFS This refers to the gain of the signal 0 dB full scale and 100 dB means 100 dB below full gain The spectrum sonagram display with IF input signal provides an overview of the total energy of the signal and displays the noise range of the signal The values of frequency level and time can be measured by use of cursors Spectrum Sonagram Specific Display Controls The spectrum sonagram has various special features to facilitate the navigation within the signal display To use the keyboard shortcuts make sure the GUI focus is actually on the sonagram display as indicated by the blue title bar 56 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 D go2 DECODE Scrollbars The display window features a scrollbar each in frequency direction and in time direction provided the signal exceeds the display section In addition to the common drag functions there are several keyboard shortcuts for scrollbar operations Parameter Function Table 31 Spectrum Sonagram Display Control Scrollbars Zoom Functions The sonagram software provides convenient zoom functions for quick navigation and analysis The de fault zoom fa
280. r Default Demodulator DPSK 2 4 8 16 A B Symbol rate Bd VEH file name psk31 ver Table 274 PSK31 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 275 PSK31 Features RUM FEC General Information RUM FEC is a duplex FEC system used by the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Romania Usage 266 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation 400 Shift Hz Symbol rate B Coding Interleaving FEC Alphabet RUM FEC Table 276 RUM FEC Characteristics 15 07 16 000 15 07 16 500 15 07 17 000 15 07 17 500 15 07 18 000 dBF5 o 50 100 500 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Hz Figure 263 RUM FEC Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd Shit Hz Shift tolerance Hz VER file name rum fec 165bd ver Table 277 RUM FEC Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 267 goaDECODE Feature Status Demodulation yes Decoding Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 278 RUM FEC F
281. r h 0 0000000 i Po 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 5 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 Hz Figure 277 CTCSS Spectrogram User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 287 go2 DECODE Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator SELCAL type CTCSS VER file name Table 319 CTCSS Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is 240 Hz below the center peak Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 320 CTCSS Features DMR General Information Digital Mobile Radio DMR is a digital modem with 12 5 kHz channel spacing and TDMA based protocol described in the ETSI technical standards TS 102 398 General Design TS 102 361 Part 1 DMR Air Interface Al protocol Part 2 DMR voice and generic services and facilities Part 3 DMR Data protocol Part 4 DMR trunking protocol TS 102 362 Conformance Testing Usage Category 1 Individuals and industries with low requirements small scale applications Category 2 Industries with high demands on business critical large scale communication Mode Properties Parameter Value Duplex method FDD or TDD Modulation FSK 288 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Parameter Value Number of tones Tone spacing Hz Symbol rate Bd Table 321 DMR Characteri
282. rameter Value Modulation Multi tone Number of tones Tone spacing Hz 700 Symbol rate Bd Table 324 dPMR Characteristics Figure 279 dPMR Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Symbol rate Bd Modulation order Shift Hz Shift tolerance Hz 0 Table 325 dPMR Demodulator Settings Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Recognition yes Decoding Binary Data yes Voice Data under development Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes 290 e Standard Decoders VHF UHF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 DSC General Information go2DECODE Table 326 dPMR Features DSC Digital Selective Calling is part of the GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System It provides automatically formatted distress alerts urgency safety and routine radio telephone calls Usage Data communication over HF VHF Mode Properties 15 07 27 000 15 07 27 500 15 07 28 000 15 07 26 500 15 07 29 000 dBFS D 50 100 4000 3500 3000 Demodulator Settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Parameter Value Modulation primary secondary FSK Number of tones Shift Hz 800 Bandwidth KHz 10 Symbol rate Baud 1200 Coding Checksum Table 327 DSC VHF Characteristics 2000 1500 1000 500 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 Hz Figure 280 DSC VHF Spectrogram Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 3 4 discr Symbol rate
283. rate 13 333 Bd SR tolerance 0 050 Bd Adaptive equaliser ET Figure 172 ASK2PSK8 ASK4PSK8 Parameters ct Adaptive equaliser Fl Figure 173 QAM 16 Parameters User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Demodulator QAM n OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexed signal User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Additional Settings 5 667 Bd 0 050 Bd Control Demod Demodulator Symbol rate No of channels Channel distance Constellation Min burst length Max burst length Min pause length Min burst SNR Special channels Figure 175 OFDM Parameters Note An XML editor has been added so that the parameters of the OFDM demodulator can be edited XML files created with the PROCITED Matlab OFDM Analysis Tool can be im ported Control Demod Sood Symbol rate 33 333 Bd El No of channels ap E Channel distance 62 500 Hz Constellation Min burst length Max burst length Min pause length Min burst SNR Figure 176 OFDM Constellations ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters e 149 d e goe DECODE Demodulator Additional Settings MultiModem Continuous production across multiple Control Demod Decod Extras Audo sub modems GE Figure 177 MultiModem Analogue Selcall Control Demod Decod Extras Audio Denes Tone duration 100 000 ms Tone duration tolerance 10 000 ms h No of tones SELCAL t
284. rd distributed in freely definable bit positions Destuff Delete stuffing bits Join Join two bit sequences Table 74 DDL Bit Maniupulation Commands Check and Correction Methods Examples Command Functions WWW CheckCRC Execution of Cyclic Redundancy Checks CorrectExtGolay Error correction of an Extended Golay Code TestPolynom Test whether a bit sequence was created by a linear feedback shift register LFSR Weight Count the quantity of ones in a test word ViterbiHDD Decode and correct convolutional code according to Viterbi Hard Decision Algo rithm IsTabSymb Check whether a bit sequence consists of valid symbols of a symbol table Table 75 DDL Check and Correction Commands Operators and amp amp amp Arithmetic binary and logical operators as well as bracket operators can be nested deliberately for use in assignment equations or parameter assignments The syntax follows the structure of the programming language C Branch Commands If While For GoTo Create conditional or unconditional branches and loops Output Commands starting with Out This group of commands serves to output results to specific result addresses displays database catego ries etc To a certain extent these commands can also convert table code in one step Examples Command Functions OutTab Decoding of a bit field according to a symbol table for example character alpha bets and output OutTabHuffma
285. re 237 DUP ARQ Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Shit n 0 Shift tolerance Hz 10 Min burst length s 0 245 d H User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 231 S go2DECODE Parameter Default Max burst length s 0 280 Min pause length s 0 260 VER file name dup arq 125bd 170hz ver Table 199 DUP ARQ Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 200 DUP ARQ Features FEC A General Information FEC A is a synchronous FEC system This system was mainly used for military and diplomatic services as well as for news agencies This modem system is also known as FEC 100 A Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Shift Hz 850 Bandwidth Hz Symbol rate Baud Table 201 FEC A Characteristics 232 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 D go2 DECODE 15 06 20 500 15 06 21 000 15 06 21 500 15 06 22 000 15 06 22 500 4 n F dBFS 50 100 1000 A00 600 400 200 a 200 400 600 GU 1000 Hz Figure 238 FEC A Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd Shit Hz VER file name fec a 145
286. ree applications Use the options specific to your operating system to switch from one application to the other DANA Filtering and conversion of the input signal into digital IF APC Automatic recognition of modems whose parameters have been previously entered into the knowledge base SDA Result display for APC and user interface for monitoring and manual analysis of the digital IF If you are using the go2DECODE Demonstration the signal sources are files Signal Sources ii SDA User Interface Figure 24 Signal Sources User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Installation of the Program e 19 S go2DECODE Starting go2DECODE Select the component in go2DECODE program group of the start menu or as an alternative select the item Programs and Features on the Control Panel Then double click the icon of the selected compo nent E Windows Anytime Upgrade DVD Maker Fax and Scan Master Media Center Media Player Documents Update 4 XPS Viewer Pictures n Accessories Music FEED DVD Solution A d Games Dames Computer Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs 5 Uninstall go2DECODE A Apply for license Help and Support Back Figure 25 Start go2DECODE Icon Name Description POS Application Starts go2DECODE including SDA DANA etc DEMO Starts go2DECODE playing back demo signals This feature is only available if the signal files
287. ristics n F 00000000 400 200 00 400 600 aun 1000 Hz Figure 201 ALIS Spectrogram Parameter Demodulator Symbol rate Bd SR tolerance Bd Modulation order Shift Hz Shift tolerance H Modem type Min burst length Max burst length Default FSK 2 3 4 discr 228 67 1 000 e e Standard Decoders HF e 179 S go2DECODE Parameter Default Min pause length s 0 010 Table 95 ALIS Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 96 ALIS Features ALIS 2 General Information ALIS 2 is simplex ARQ teleprinter system developed by Rhode amp Schwarz ALIS 2 is a further development of ALIS Usage Transfer of textual information and binary data over HF with automatic Link setup Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones 8 Tone spacing Hz 240 Symbol rate Bd 240 82 Alphabet ITA 5 Table 97 ALIS 2 Characteristics 180 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 15 04 15 500 15 04 19 000 15 04 19 500 15 04 20 000 15 04 20 500 dBF5 50 100 Q go2DECODE U 2000 1750 n 0 D000000 1500 1250 1000 50 500 250 500 Figure 202 ALIS 2 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Tuning Parameter Default Demodulat
288. ristics dBF5 50 100 15 07 31 500 15 07 32 000 15 07 32 500 15 07 33 000 15 07 33 500 4 j mt 1000 DUU DUU 400 200 U 00 400 600 DUU 1000 Hz Figure 271 TWINPLEX Spectrogram Demodulator Settings 278 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE Parameter Default Data interleaved Symbol rate Bd SR tolerance Bd Distance F1 lt gt F2 Hz Distance F2 lt gt F3 Hz Distance F3 lt gt F4 Hz Shift tolerance Hz Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s Table 301 TWINPLEX Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 302 TWINPLEX Features Visel General Information Visel is a synchronous teleprinter system used in former Yugoslavia It is unknown whether the system is still in use Usage Data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Shift Hz 300 Symbol rate Bd 81 3 123 5 125 Alphabet ITA 2 User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 279 Ka go2DECODE Table 303 Visel Characteristics 15 07 37 500 15 07 38 000 15 07 38 500 15 07 39 000 15 07 39 500 F dBF5 D 50 100 TT 1000 500 600 400 200 200 400 600 800 1000 Hz Figure 272 Visel Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Paramet
289. s e 337 SN go2DECODE Index A ACARS VHF 281 Activate Manual Analysis 106 Adapt Display Area to Input Signal 106 Add and Remove Files 98 AF 319 After Start of go2DECODE 22 AIS 283 Alcatel 801H 177 ALE 319 ALIS 179 ALIS 2 180 Analysis Display 73 Analyze FSK Signals 106 ANNEX 1 Port Configuration 131 ANNEX 2 Sound Configuration 133 ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters 137 ANNEX 4 Receiver Support 153 ANNEX 5 Examples 157 ANNEX 6 List of Decoders 169 APC 5 APC Automatic Production Channel 39 APC Control Parameters 43 Appendix 315 Application Demonstration 19 Application Monitoring 6 ARQ 319 ARQ 6 90 182 ARQ 6 98 183 ARQ E 185 ARQ E3 187 ARQ M2 242 188 ARQ M2 342 190 ARQ M4 242 191 ARQ M4 342 193 ARQ N 194 ASCII 319 ASCII 7 Bit 196 ASCII 8 Bit 197 Automatic Command Completion 122 338 e Index Automatic Indentation 123 AUTOSPEC 199 Available Decoders 177 281 B Baudot async 200 Baudot sync 202 BCH 319 Bit Display 83 Bug reporting 316 BULG ASCII 203 C CCIR 284 CCITT 286 CHU 205 CIS 405 3915 214 CIS 11 206 CIS 12 208 CIS 14 209 CIS 36 211 CIS 36 50 212 CIS 8181 215 Clover 2000 218 Clover ll 216 Codan 3012 220 Codan Selcal 222 Comparison between go2DECODE Full Version and go2DECODE Monitoring 6 Compile and Operate New Decoders 127 Compile Directory 123 Conditions of sale 316 Configuration File cardlist xml 134 Configure Multi Channel Sound Devi
290. sales are valid from September 1st 2012 Prices The list prices are net and exclude VAT shipping and packing costs unless otherwise arranged PLATH AG reserves the right to change the prices All special offers are subject to alteration without notice The supplier reserves the right to accept or refuse an order Delivery Time The delivery time is specified in the confirmation of order contract The delivery time may be extended due to unforeseen circumstances such as acts of God epidemic earthquake etc war as well as de livery delays from our suppliers Dispatch The method of dispatch may be selected by the customer Without any shipping instructions from the customer we reserve us the right to arrange the dispatch by any forwarder or courier of our choice Any complaints regarding damage delays or loss must be forwarded to PLATH AG in written form within 48h from the receipt of the goods Return of Goods The return of defect goods requires written approval of PLATH AG before the dispatch The charges for the shipping costs must be paid by the customer During the warranty period PLATH AG will bear the expenses for shipping the item s back to the customer The customer is responsible for returning the goods to the supplier without them being damaged please use appropriate packing material and insure the goods 316 e Appendix User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SS go2DECODE Cancellation Cancellations of orders must be mad
291. search Council of Canada Usage Time information broadcasts Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones Shift Hz 200 Bandwidth Hz 500 Symbol rate Bd 500 Table 145 CHU Characteristics 15 04 47 500 15 04 48 000 15 04 48 500 15 04 49 000 15 04 49 500 dBFS 1000 DUU 600 400 200 00 400 600 aun 1000 Hz Figure 219 CHU Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 3 4 discr Symbol rate Bd 300 Shift Hz 200 Shift tolerance Hz Min burst length s User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 205 go2DECODE Parameter Default Max burst length s 0 700 Min pause length s 0 150 Table 146 CHU Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Recognition yes Decoding yes Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 147 CHU Features CIS 11 General Information CIS 11 is a full duplex teleprinter system used in former CIS Commonwealth of Independent States Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones Shift Hz 500 Symbol rate Bd Alphabet ITA 2 Table 148 CIS 11 Characteristics 206 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 15 05 05 000 15 03 05 500 15 05 06 000 15 03 06
292. sed on the content of an ex isting one 322 e Glossary of Terms User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Glossary of Terms e 323 SS go2DECODE List of Figures Figure 1 The Application at One Glance saisserireirnianancnnntiastininniiaa eA ania eik aiaa Eao NAE aeniea 4 PIOUS Dongle A e Ur PEE Tm 10 Fade Welcome NESS TTC TETTE TOTO arica 10 Figure 4 License el A IER Pr AX VRMEXS REN RIVA e FD RYE 11 Figure 5 ee ne e 11 Fig re 6 ME e esasan e ia i iE Ei a R iaa EEE eaaa 11 Fig re 7 Select Language 12 Figure 8 Select Destination Folder oerte rote id adenda 12 Figure 9 Create a New FOU esse 12 Figure 10 Select WibuKey Components c ooccccccccncccnccccnncconcnononccnnnnononnnnnnnonnnncnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnanrannns 13 Figure 11 Tasks of WibuKey Installaton 13 Figure 12 WibuKey Installation Progress 13 Figure 13 WibuKey Installation Completion n0000nnnnnnnooa0nnnnnnnonsnnnnnnnnnssennnrnrnnnsnnnnrnrreossnnnnrrrenssrnnnrrreenne 14 Figure 14 Help Manual with Installation Complete nn00000nnnnnnnnnaannnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnonennnrnnnenssrnnnrneeenne 14 Figure 15 Choose the Location for the Installation n00000nnnnnnn00aannnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnosennnnnnnenssennnrneeenene 15 Figure 16 Setup Assistant Ready ccccccccccccconnccnnnccononoonnccnnnnonnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnns 15 Figure 17 License AO CMC asii 16
293. signal in the complex plane of numbers as a real part in phase and an imaginary element quadrature Several signal sections can be displayed in a superimposed display The display can be operated in the modes absolute or difference phase These two display types can be displayed in synchronization with the symbol rate which is recovered by the demodulator User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 77 SS goe DECODE Constellation display Symbol decision channel 1 o x Figure 74 Constellation Display For the real part an X axis is drawn in the display The imaginary element is drawn on the Y axis In mode difference phase the difference between the phase of the current value and the phase of the previous value is displayed This eliminates the potential rotation of the signal vector In mode absolute SR or difference phase SR only the values used for symbol decision will be displayed This way signal transitions will be deleted In a correct demodulation for example PSK4 QAM the phase star of the current demodulation will be displayed Parameter Setting The parameters of the constellation display can be displayed by activating the tab lt Parameters gt Constellation display Parameter Cursor I Extras UR Channel number Input signal Channel Display centre X 0 0000 Display centre Y 0 0000 7 Display range 1 0000 Display type Difference phase SR Numb
294. sing lt Autorange gt again this process will be deactivated toggle Table 47 Constellation Display Cursor Parameters Extras Constellation display Figure 77 Constellation Display Extras Tab The lt Extras gt tab features additional options with regard to the display type The list box Display serves to select the color schemes for the displays Color Scheme Foreground Color Background Color Table 48 Constellation Display Color Schemes 80 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Ka go2DECODE Hell Display The Hell display shows the variation of the signal in time in scales of gray The scales of gray are pro duced by evaluation of the individual samples of the signal BH Hell display Filtered diff mag J OD x UD JU ru uuu 09 58 20 000 09 58 22 000 09 58 24 000 09 56 000 Z Axis Time 09 58 28 000 09 58 30 000 09 58 32 000 X Axis Time 9 58 34 000 E 0 20 Figure 78 Hell Display An X axis is drawn in the Hell display for the periods of a row The values of time are drawn on the Z axis The Hell display provides an overview of bit patterns in the signal and allows for the analysis of bit lengths and the definition of the circulation times of specific signals The values of time of the bits can be meas ured by using the cursors Parameter Setting The parameters of the Hell display can be displayed by activating the tab lt Parameters gt
295. sired Now press lt Install gt to trigger the installation At this point the Microsoft Visual C Redistributable will be installed if it is not already available on your PC User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Installation of the Program e 15 S go2DECODE Microsoft Visual C 2005 SP1 Redistnbutable PS QE Please read the following license agreement Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement MICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS MICROSOFT VISUAL C 2005 RUNTIME HE By using the software you accept these terms you do not accept Do you accept all of the terms of the preceding License Agreement If you choose No Install will close To install you must accept this agreement es Figure 17 License Agreement The license agreement is displayed and must be acknowledged by striking the button lt Yes gt Figure 18 Configuration and Installation The installation continues showing the progress and asking you to be patient until the configuration are completed and the required information has been located Installing of go2DECODE 3 3 1 The program files you selected are now being installed Please wait while the Setup Assistant installs go2DECODE This may take several minutes Next gt Figure 19 Application Installation On successful installation the Setup Assistant will display the following message 16 e Installation of the Program User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE go2
296. source it serves to generate standard signals to analyze and edit by the APC The signal will be recorded in the signal memory of the APC Signal Memory If signal memory is the signal source you are able to analyze recorded signals The signal from the short time memory of the APC can be analyzed Analysis offline serves to set the time at which the short time memory is to start start time and stop stop time playback Activate the button lt Start gt to start over To switch off the continuous play of the short time memory unselect the checkbox M Repeat replay below the button lt End time gt Operation In case you want to switch between signal sources please activate the symbol M Stop in the tool bar or press the Stop button in the property dialog Select the new signal source and activate the symbol P Start in the tool bar or press the Start button in the property dialog When the SDA is started and the button lt Automat gt has been activated the system looks for the modem with the best recognition results of all Once the modem is found production will start at the time the search was originally started Production will then be quicker than in real time until all former signal data has been processed by the APC Subsequently the data is sent to the SDA in real time again When the feature Automat is deactivated the system is in manual production i e the APC attempts to produce results with the modem currently se
297. ssion of a signal using high frequencies requires influenc ing modulating the signal to encode the transferred information in the signal The basic high frequency HF signal is also called carrier The APC has to reverse demodulate this influence to recover the in formation The results of the demodulating process are symbols one or several bits Adjust the demodu lation using the demodulation parameters To do so open the tab lt Demoo gt Demodulator Symbol rate SR tolerance Shift Shift tolerance Modem type FSK 2 matched Min burst length 0 1008 z4 Max burst length 1 000 s Figure 46 Tab Demod with Demodulator Drop Down List The Demodulator dropdown list box provides an extensive range of demodulator types Select the de modulator type desired Demodulator Type Demodulation of Mose Mowesgnl O OOOO O O ASK2 Amplitude shift keyed signal Frequency shift keyed signal User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 45 D go2DECODE Demodulator Type Demodulation of PFSK2matched Frequency shitt keyed signal MESK2 Muti channelfrequeney shittkeyed signal QAMi6 Quadrature amplitude modulated signal actor Pactoriisignal gt Pador Pactorilisignal OOO O orb Orthogonal frequency division multiplexed signa FSK 22 autoshift Frequency shit keyed signal automatic measurement of shift OGPSK Offset quadrature phase shitkeyedsgral
298. ssssaaaeeeeeeeeseeaas 300 OE ST CPA AC IC MISHICS m T T AAR REN TE E SEE ENRERE REN DERRERS 301 MPT1327 Demodulator Settings 000nnnnn0annnnnoeannnnoennnnnonennnnenrenrnnrsrnneresrnnrreosenrerrsnnnerensnnnnee 302 AN SAA q Tre defence 302 Ne o PA 302 NATEL Demodulator Settings ninan inenika eene nennen nennen nnn nnn nnns 303 NELFO Se 303 KREE ed 304 NMT450 Demodulator Gettmges 304 MA A EET 305 POGSAG Chal E e 305 POCSAG Demodulator Settings n000nnnnnnaannenneannnensennnronrnnrreonrnrnrnsrnrerensnnrrrrnrnrrressnnrrrrsnnne 306 FOC Gy FEAS naaa ata 306 TETRA NNN PA e A a 306 TETRA Demodulator Gettngs 307 A A ee e PES o OOO ieeetousactosee 307 Tetrapol Characteristics rrrrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrernnnnrennnnnnrnnnnnnnennnnenennnnnnrnnnnnerennnnssennnnnnrennnnssennnnsseennnn 308 Tetrapol Demodulator Settings nnn0000annnnnnoneannnnnnnorennnrnnnnoernnrrnnronsnnnrrnrressennnrrrrrnsnnnnnnnene 308 ico AAPP nn o A 309 VENN 309 VDEW Demodulator Gettmgs 310 DEN FCE NER T 310 VOL 2 iiec NR Tu 310 VDL 2 Demodulator En ue E 311 MOLE PM 311 VDL EE E 312 VDL 3 Demodulator Settings 0000nnnnnen000ennnnnneoseennninnnnosrrnnrnnnnossrnnrrrrrnosrnnnrrrrenssnnnrrrrreennnnni 313 A A 313 NEON r 6 21 ASUS m 313 ZVEI Demodulator Settings esses nennen nnne nennen nnn nnns 314 VA AN ITUNES mmm 314 List of Table
299. sted before the main section of the program Pre processing Commands Examples Command Functions PPInvert Invert every input bit PPDescramble Execute a descrambling function for any specified polynomial PPBitCodeBIPH Reverse BIPH bit encoding Table 78 DDL Pre Processing Commands Recommendation Use a simple comparable and working decoder as a model and modify this decoder systematically Compile and Operate New Decoders Start Compiler Complete decoder descriptions are compiled via the icon E on the editor toolbar or via the menu item Compile Install on the Edit menu The result is displayed in the pane below the edited text Successful compilation is indicated by the message 0 Errors in the final row In this case the executable decoder code has been created and is available for loading In case of incorrect source text an error message will be shown which also indicates the row number in question mouse click on the error row indicated will automatically position the cursor in this row in the User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Decoder Adaptation and Development e 127 D go2DECODE text box Any error messages at this point merely refer to incorrect syntax and the formal integrity of the program Compiler Test started Compiler exe C Copyright PROCITEC GmbH 2012 Version 2 3 4 1210011518B935RW001500 Use configfile compiler conf config path is emtpy at the moment Use configfile from dir C Users H Hesse go2SIG
300. stics Figure 278 DMR Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Symbol rate Bd SR tolerance Bd Shit Hz Shift tolerance Hz 0 Min burst length s Max burst length s Min pause length s Table 322 DMR Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is 240 Hz below the center peak Status Feature Status Demodulation yes Decoding Binary Data yes Voice Data under development Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 323 DMR Features Vocoder The DVSI AMBE 2 vocoder is based on Multi Band Excitation MBE i e a frequency domain ap proach Main characteristics are Very low bit rate 2450 bps voice 1150 bps FEC 3600 bps very high voice quality at very low bit rate robust to strong background noise and to PMR LMR channel moderate complexity easy to implement on a low cost DSP language independent User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders VHF UHF e 289 S goeDEGODE 20ms voice frame and FEC optimized for PMR LMR applications soft bits based decoding dPMR General Information digital Private Mobile Radio dPMR is a digital radio protocol for voice and data communications dPMR is a narrowband 6 25 kHz channel spacing FDMA based protocol described in the ETSI technical stand ards T5102 490 and T5102 658 Usage Professional and private voice amp data communications Mode Properties Pa
301. sults directory is created in the base directory The file results css required to view the result file with a web browser is copied to this directory Table 19 SDA Extras Parameters A popup menu is opened by activating the right mouse button in the table with the temporary results Var ious functions can be applied to the modem displayed in this table Use modem The active modem bold is replaced by the selected modem Save modem Save the modem previously selected from the modem list to a data medium Open a dialog window for input of a file name for this modem Delete modem The selected modem is deleted from the list of modems Table 20 SDA Modem Parameters You may also use activate modems by double clicking the respective modem row in the table Another popup menu will open by activating the right mouse button in the result text window Copy Copy highlighted result text to clipboard Select All Select complete result text The contents of the result windows can be highlighted using the mouse 42 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2 DECODE APC Control Parameters Modem Baudot 2 Stopbit 50Bd 450Hz Signal search Frequency range MV Nominal frequency O Hz Search range 500 Hz 500 Hz IF recording O Signal Memory Start time 00 01 01 00 00 00 000 End time 00 01 01 00 00 00 000
302. t Hz 200 250 500 Bandwidth Hz 300 550 aud Table 160 CIS 36 50 Characteristics Symbol rate Encryption 212 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 15 05 04 500 15 05 05 000 15 03 05 500 15 05 06 000 15 05 06 500 dBF5 D 50 100 1000 4 m DU 600 400 200 o 200 400 600 DU Ka go2DECODE k 1000 Hz Figure 224 CIS 36 50 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Tuning Parameter Demodulator Symbol rate SH tolerance Shift Hz Shift tolerance Modem type VEH file name Bd B d Hz Default FSK 2 matched Synchronous cis 36_50_50bd_250hz ver Synohronos Table 161 CIS 36 50 Demodulator Settings The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 162 CIS 36 50 Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 213 D go2 DECODE CIS 405 3915 General Information CIS 405 3915 is a synchronous teleprinter system in a CIS 8181 variant but uses the half baud rate This system is used by the Soviet military and railways authorities for point to point connections Despite its simplicity this modem is still in operation today Traffic is always encrypted Sometimes operator chat or station id in Morse telegraphy can be copied Usage Transfer of textual information over HF
303. t menu to start DEMO Mode E Windows Anytime Upgrade CH Windows DVD Maker Fax and Scan Master dows Media Center Media Player ga Documents Update Pictures Music Games Computer Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs amp Uninstall qo2DECODE n Apply for license Help and Support Back Search programs and files Shut down Figure 187 Select Demo Mode SDA in the DEMO Mode On start of go2DECODE DEMO the SDA will appear as in the screenshot below You will see a spec trum sonagram display a result display the menu bar the toolbar two property sheets and the status bar DANA starts at the same time User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 ANNEX 5 Examples e 157 D go2 DECODE DANA Digital Analog Audi Interface SDA Signal Analysis and Control go2DECODE default e RH 2 ere DANA C Program Files x86 g 2SIGNALS go2DECODE 3 3 1 D So File Control Extras Help mo OG File CH NN Output to IF SDA I d i I Lo LEX Modem Baudot 2 Stopbit 50Bd 450Hz Y Control Demod Decod Extras Audio dBFS Decoder name baudot2plus Abbreviation Decoder type Edit description 4000 2000 0 2000 4000 He Predefined frequencies No predefined frequencies z t 1 1000 2000 3
304. t releasing the left mouse button e After releasing the mouse button the desired block has been defined Use the right mouse button to open a popup menu in the bit display The popup menu serves to e Copy the highlighted block to the clipboard of the system e Save all symbols of the bit display to a file e Save the highlighted block to a file The individual items of the highlight option are displayed on the tab lt Mark gt and can be edited Bit display Column Start position Length m Figure 84 Bit Display Highlight Tab Column Defines the start and the end of the column of the highlighted block Row Defines the start and the end of the row of the highlighted block Extras The Extras tab serves to change the font size of the bit display and to include the bit display quality 86 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Figure 85 Bit Display Extras Tab Parameter Function Defines the size of a bit in the display With small font sizes more bits will be visible than with large font sizes Identification of details will be harder with small font sizes the quality of the individual bit Show quality Highlights the quality of the individual bits in shades of gray The lighter the color the better Table 53 Bit Display Extras Parameters User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 87 0 go2 DECODE DANA Digital Analogue Audio In
305. tab lt F recordings gt shows the raw files which are subsequently played by DANA The tab lt Production results gt features the results in txt format These files are displayed in the text editor specified in the PMO configuration file Finally the tab Binary results features the binary output files from certain decoders e g Pactor ll De pending on the individual decoder various file types are produced In general files with the extension bin hold binary data and will be displayed in the HexEditor specified in the PMO configuration file Files with the extension xdat are in XML format and hold information about the content of the binary files This file type is displayed in the text editor specified in the PMO configuration file The desired files are opened immediately in the dialog window Double click the respective folder XXX Emission to view the files available Subsequently to play the file simply double click the respective file or use the popup menu Note that the media player will play all subsequent audio files if any once the first file played is finished User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 PMO Production Memory Observer e 103 ON go2DECODE BEE File Help Production Memory C mem prod 001 Directory Date 2012 07 26 AF recordings IF recordings Production results Binary results E3 000 Emission 15 25 24 15 26 33 69 V 001 Emission fe 20120726 152633 474 0000000000 7F 15 26 33 i 20120726
306. take priority After Zooming the rectangle shown as a white dotted line will disappear Otherwise simply click any position in the display window to delete the rec tangle lt Out gt Each time the button lt Zoom Out gt is activated the display area is enlarged by factor 2 With disabled cursors the zoom is exclusively made in X direction Relative factor Enter the desired relative zoom factor for zooming out and its reciprocal for zooming in The default value in this spin box is 2 Table 37 Spectrum Sonagram Extras Tab Parameters Figure 60 Peak Hold Comparison 64 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SS go2DECODE Spectrum Display The spectrum displays the distribution of the energy with individual values of frequency just as the spec trum sonagram display does The spectrum display is used for separation of signal and noise The frequency and values of level can be measured using cursors In contrast to the spectrum sonagram display the spectrum display allows for the setting of great FFT lengths and the signal can be squared for analysis Spectrum IF input channel 1 ll Es dBFS zm cl e e zm zm zm ss ss ke ze zm e e e zm X Pr Se ee ae tg A je sf ee fe de E E E 10000 sen o D 5000 18000 15000 20000 Hz 20000 45000 Y Axis Level X Axis Frequency Spectrum Fi
307. tandard exchange of for tactical data over radio Single Tone Link Eleven Waveform is a variant with extended data protection by interleaving and convolutional block coding SNR Signal to noise ratio often abbreviated SNR or S N is a measure used in science and engineering that compares the level of a desired signal to the level of background noise It is defined as the ratio of signal power to the noise power ratio higher than 1 1 indicates more signal than noise Normally the values are indicated in dB UHF Ultra High Frequency 0 3 3 GHz This is the frequency band for information transfer with high bandwidth Due to the quasi optical wave propagation the range is limited to about 10 kilometers for omnidirectional antenna systems and to line of sight links in case of directional antennas User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Glossary of Terms e 321 OD go2DECODE VHF Very High Frequency 30 300 MHz This is the frequency range for information transfer with medium bandwidth Due to the more or less qua si optical wave propagation the range is limited to some 10 kilometers for omnidirectional antenna sys tems and to close to line of sight links in case of directional antennas XSLT XSLT Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformations is a language for transforming XML documents into other XML documents or other objects such as HTML for web pages etc The original document is not changed rather a new document is created ba
308. te Bd 10 31 25 50 Table 270 PSK10 AM Characteristics dBFS D 50 100 15 06 29 500 15 06 30 000 15 06 30 500 15 06 31 000 15 06 31 500 H lia H 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 50 100 150 200 50 300 350 400 Hz Figure 261 PSK10 AM Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator DPSK 2 4 8 16 A B Symbol rate B 264 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Parameter Default VER file name psk am 10bd ver Table 271 PSK10 AM Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 272 PSK10 AM Features PSK31 General Information PSK31 is a modem type developed by radio amateurs PSK31 emissions are very narrow band and ro bust against fading effects Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation DBPSK QPSK Bandwidth HZ Symbol rate Bd 31 25 62 5 125 Coding FEC variants Convolutional FEC Table 273 PSK31 Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 265 go2DECODE 15 07 54 000 15 07 54 500 15 07 55 000 15 07 55 500 15 07 56 000 4 4 3 dBFS 0 50 100 200 175 150 125 100 zs 50 25 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 He Figure 262 PSK31 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Paramete
309. terface DANA is an abbreviation for Digital Analogue Audio Interface lt converts analogue signals into complex IF signals and provides these complex signals as a TCP IP server to the APC Two signal sources are avail able Analogue signals from the sound card with a sampling rate of 48 kHz or 96 kHz online e g files gener ated and played using the signal generator SOMO or wave files playing mode Sound played by means of any media player Wave and RAW files can also be read directly using DANA offline playing mode File Make sure that the APC is ready indicated by the green dot on the status bar amp and note that in contrast to other players no audible sound output is available The input signal is converted into a digital intermediate frequency IF To add a filter enter the center fre quency and the bandwidth wave File APC Figure 86 Functional DANA The individual menus and windows of DANA are explained on the following pages The appearance of the DANA screen depends on the selection of the setting Sound or File In the setting File a play list with the corresponding functions and parameters will be displayed in addition Start of DANA Select lt Programs gt lt go2SIGNALS gt lt go2DECODE gt lt DANA gt in the WINDOWS 7 program group of the start menu to start DANA User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 DANA Digital Analogue Audio Interface e 89 go2DECODE E Windows Anytime Upgrade Ej Windows DVD Mak
310. teristics ccccoconcnncconnnncoconcncncnoncnnncnnnnnononnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnonennnnnnnanennss 180 Table 98 ALIS 2 Demodulator Settings ooocccccnccccoooonnncnnnnccnnnononncnnnonononononnnnnnnnnonononannnnnnnonononananennns 181 Table 99 ALIS 2 Features serred ssiseadere reei so srno n EEIN OESE EEEE EEEE OEE Eidir 181 Table 100 ARQ 6 90 Charachersice 182 332 e List of Tables User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Table 101 Table 102 Table 103 Table 104 Table 105 Table 106 Table 107 Table 108 Table 109 Table 110 Table 111 Table 112 Table 113 Table 114 Table 115 Table 116 Table 117 Table 118 Table 119 Table 120 Table 121 Table 122 Table 123 Table 124 Table 125 Table 126 Table 127 Table 128 Table 129 Table 130 Table 131 Table 132 Table 133 Table 134 Table 135 Table 136 Table 137 Table 138 Table 139 Table 140 Table 141 Table 142 Table 143 Table 144 Table 145 Table 146 Table 147 Table 148 Table 149 Table 150 Table 151 Table 152 Table 153 Table 154 Table 155 Table 156 Table 157 Table 158 ARQ 6 90 Demodulator Settings ARQ 6 90 Features ARQ 6 98 Characteristics ARQ 6 98 Demodulator Settings ARQ 6 98 Features ADO EOCharactertsice ARQ E Demodulator Settings ARQ E Features ARQ E3 Characteristics ARQ E3 Demodulator Settings ARQ E3 Features oo
311. th abrupt energy decreases When calculating a spectrum via the signal envelope a peak or an abrupt decrease will occur on the location of the symbol rate depending on the characteristics of the individual signal Signals that are suitable for input for the displays are generated in the demodulators Consequently the signal selection and the signal characteristics bandwidth scanning rate etc will be affected by the pa rameters of the demodulator To use the input signal Diff Magnitude as an input as shown below select the demodulator FSK2 matched Enter the measured shift parameter and make a rough estimation of the symbol rate or select a high value This measuring process also can be carried out using the input signal Magnitude in the demodulator ASK2 Open the Spectrum display via the toolbar The entire frequency spectrum is displayed As in all windows of this type the characteristics of this display are shown on the property sheet Contrary to the sonagram this option serves to select additional views via the drop down list box Input Signal on the lt Parameters gt tab Select Diff Magnitude This display will show a significant and abrupt energy decrease at the position of the Baud rate 112 e Manual Analysis of Unknown Signals User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SS goe DECODE Spectrum 1 Diff magnitude channel 1 E J DJ xl 357 4D 45 504 55 60 65 ER 5 4 0 85 90 95 5 100 15 20 25
312. th or a mul tiple of its magnitude User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Manual Analysis of Unknown Signals e 115 OD go2DECODE 145 149 TDSBAx ZX ZX ZX XX XZX EXEX XX XE X X E EXX XE X XX X TSEUX XXXX XXX XXXX X XX X X XX EXX XX X XXX TSZOIXXXXX EXX XX XXX X XX X XXX XEX EX XXX XXX X TSSOIX XX X XXX XX X XX X X XXXX XX X XXXX X XX X TSMEEX ZEXX EXAX X XEZ E ZXXZ EXEX XXXXXE EXX X X XXXX TSSEXXX XX X XXX XXX X X XXX XX XX X X X X XXX TSBEEX XXXX EX XX X XZXE EXX X X XEX X X XEX X ZEX XXX XX TSWUx X X XX XXX XX X X X XX EXX XX XX X TSEBMEXXX ZX EX EXXX XE EXX X X XXX EXX XE XX XXX 159 EXX X X XXEXX EX XE X X XEXXXE XEX XEX XX XX 100 XX X XXX X X XXXX XXX X XXX XX XX X XX EXX TEBEx XX X XXXX XX X X X X XX X XX XXX X A AAA AA O A L63 X X XX XX XX X XXXX XXX XX X XX X X XXXX XXX AAA E A A XX LoS KEE 166 X XX X X XXXX X X XXXX X XX X XX XX X XXXX OR AAA AM 168 XXX XX X XXX XXX X X XXX XX XX X X X X X XX TBBLIXX XX X XXXX XX X X XXXXX X XXXX XXX XX X X X 170 ix X XX X X XXX XX X X X XX XXX XX X TUEEEX X XX XX XX XX X XXX XEX X XXX EXX XX XXX XX 172 X XXXX XX X X X X X XX XX XXXX XX X XX X X TUSIX XXXX XX XX XX X XXX X X X XXX XX XXX 174 XX XXX X Ax E XXXX XXE XEX EX X XX X X TESX XXX XXXXX X XX XX XX X XXX EXXXX XX XX 176 XXXX X
313. th the start time A zoom thus can be set manually Max magnitude Definition of the magnitude range of the analysis display The maximum magnitude is the upper end of the section Min magnitude Definition of the magnitude range of the analysis display The minimum magnitude is the lower end of the section Max phase Definition of the phase range of the analysis display The maximum phase is the upper end of the section we Definition of the phase range of the analysis display The minimum phase is the lower end of the section Centre frequency The centre frequency is the centre of the section Frequency range The frequency range is the range within the section The zoom can thus be set manually Pause In Pause the display is stopped not the signal processing Modification of the parameters is possible for a more detailed analysis of the current signal range lt Autorange gt Automatic setting of the displayed range to view the total amplitude frequency and phase range The mode Autorange analyzes approx 12 vectors The display is adapted on every change of the range On pressing lt Autorange gt again this process will be deactivated toggle Table 43 Analysis Display Parameter Parameters Cursor Tab The lt Cursor gt tab of the Analysis Display provides separate checkboxes and spin boxes to activate and adjust the Y cursors in the magnitude phase and frequency plots M Y Magnitude M Y Phase and iv Y Frequency
314. the APC DANA features a graphical user interface which provides the option to edit various parameters Among these pa 4 e Introduction to go2DECODE User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SS go2DECODE rameters is the frequency which is used to add an offset to adapt the centre frequency of a signal deliv ered by an external receiver or a signal file to the reference frequency of a demodulator APC The module APC Automatic Production Channel is the core of go2DECODE This software module han dles the complete signal processing operation in a technical sense lts tasks are real time identification demodulation and decoding of signals pre processed by DANA The results are sent to SDA for display The APC controls the following tasks Energetic fine segmenting signal detection and signal selection Detection modem identification Demodulation and decoding modem production Go2DECODE is a knowledge based system e the software is capable of reliable recognition demodu lation and decoding of modems which have been included in the knowledge base of the system using the experience of the analysts The standard version features a selection of demodulators and decoders as well as selected modems combined from them The user can edit the parameters of or combine addi tional modems from the existing demodulators and decoders The decoder description language provides the option to develop new decoders which again can be combined with
315. the various checkboxes Result Production Parameters Detection Nominal frequency Detection quality E Centre frequency Signal quality Burst length SR quality E Voice E Wght decoder E Pitch Decoder E Dash dot ratio Decoder modified modem Start time Symbol rate Duration Measured shift Lack time Channel number 1 e Decoder output Figure 40 SDA Selection of Result Production The table below lists the results in the upper part of the display together with their tasks Result Column Function No Number of modem not selectable Nam Name of modem not selectable Detection Detection status of modem No result No statement on modem status possible Inactive Modem has not been activated Impossible Modem has been excluded during search due to its bandwidth None Modem has not been detected No decoder Only the modulation parameters of a modem have been detected Modulation Modem has been detected on the basis of the modulation parameters Modem Modem has been detected 40 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Result Column Detection Quali Quality Signal SR Quality Wght Decoder Decoder Function Lost Production Modulation tracking Modem tracking goeDECODE Modem was detected but is lost Modem is produced The modulation type has been detected tracking parameters The modem has been detected tracking parameters
316. tion Signal Sources Signal Processing Production Memory Sound Devices Modem Recognition Name Conexant HD Audio output v Sample rate 48000 v Record Demod Output AY Sound Configuration Bits per sample 16 Channel v Apply If your system features various sound cards e g with different numbers of channels use the tab lt Sound configuration gt to select and configure the existing sound output devices When the dialog box is displayed select the desired sound device enter the values for sample rate and bits per sample and edit the number of channels for details see ANNEX 2 Sound Configura tion User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 33 go2DECODE Menu Item Function Decoder Open and Close the Decoder Debugger Subject to the delivered version Debugger DANA Start of DANA SOMO Start of SOMO Subject to the delivered version PMO Start of PMO Subject to the delivered version Table 9 Extra menu items Modem Menu The modem description hereinafter referred to as modem provides the demodulator and decoder pa rameters of the modem All demodulator and decoder parameters are saved in the modem file The vari ous rows in the modem list each represent one specific modem Modem List Windows Help New moden Ctrl Load modern From File Ch br Save modern to file CkrlH 5 3 Delete modem C
317. tirely defined in a source code which can be created in basically any ASCII text editor The source code comprises the command steps and the sequence in which these are to be pro cessed during decoder application A compiler translates this text into a code which can be interpreted easily and quickly during the runtime of the decoder The source code and decoder code are stored in files The code files created this way are used when integrating decoders in completed modems and when pro cessing these modems User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Decoder Adaptation and Development e 117 D go2 DECODE Edit Decoder Load Editor To call the source codes of the decoders use the lt Decod gt tab as shown in the figure below This is only possible if the decoder source code is available in your installation Decoders requiring a special license option are not supplied with their source code Gens Demod Abbreviation Decoder type Local Figure 133 Load Decoder Editor The editor window is displayed as shown below together with a description of the selected decoder The various language elements are automatically displayed in different colors for improved overview The col or assignment is as follows Colors Language Elements Red Designators of program sections Command functions and branch commands System variables Remaining text Table 65 Decoder Editor Color Assignments The editing and adapting functions are the same
318. to activate it Use the cursor keys Up T and Down 4 to quickly move between modems User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 SDA Signal Display and Analysis e 43 D go2DECODE Deactivating the checkbox to the right of the dropdown list box will deselect the modem from the APC modem list Use this feature to exclude modems from the modem list in automatic production Control The control parameters serve to set the following areas of the APC e Automatic identification e Duration of the production process e Supervising of the production process e Saving of signals The parameter settings will take effect not only on all modems but also on all signal displays Activate the lt Control gt tab to edit the parameters Contra Main be Signal search Frequency range NM Nominal frequency OHz Search range 500 Hz 500 Hz IF recording Signal Memory Start time End time 01 01 00 00 00 00 000 i Repeat replay Hd Figure 44 APC Control Parameters Parameter Function Mode Selection of the operating mode of the Automat Signal search Frequency Range The APC searches for signals in the defined search range Nominal Frequency Manual definition of the frequency offset of the signal This is controlled together with the modem specific parameter Offset Nominal Freq on the Ex tras tab Nominal frequency Control of the frequency in which to search the modem Modem types will be searched in the define
319. tomated signal processing This is achieved by detecting the signal and identifying the modem The signal is then demodulated and decoded Each of these steps can be con trolled and modified by using the Automat control and the modem parameters demodulator selection and parameter setting decoder selection extras for modem parameter setting and demodulator parameters and gain control for audio out The results are controlled and displayed in the result display Result Display FAB Result Production No Name Detection QDet Q5ig QSE Decod SE Shift Homir 007 ABQ E3 CYCE 50Bd 400Hz no result E ES En 008 ABQ HM2 2742 4 S3656bd 430Hz no result 009 ABO Hz 342 4 S366Bd 400Hz no result 010 ABQ HM4 747 l1592bd 170Hz no result 011 ARQ M4 342 192bd 400Hz no result E E 012 ARQ N S6Bd B50Hz no result S S Em H a 013 ASCII 7Bit 100Bd 173Hz no result X CH 014 ASCII BBit 300Bd 498Hz no result 2 015 Autospec no result E HI production 200 0 Bd 850 0 Hz e 100 100 98 5 4 AZY DOG 0123456789 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER IHE LAZY DOG 01234560789 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789 THe WT Te BOA FOY MINDS MIEDO THE TL7VY ra n1324525T7209 4 MY k Figure 39 APC Result Display The result display shows the search results and the production results of the A
320. trl Import moden u Export modern Database logout Figure 33 Modem Menu Each modem can be saved either individually in one file or in combination as a modem list The following functions serve to facilitate your work with modems Menu Item Function Add a new modem to the bottom of a modem list Load modem Load modems previously saved to a data medium A dialog window is displayed for selection of from file one or several modem files ver The modems will be added to the bottom of the modem list Save modem Save the modem currently selected in the modem list to a data medium A dialog window is dis to file played to enter a file name for the modem Delete the modem currently selected from the modem list dem Import mo Import modems with decoder files previously exported to a data medium A dialog window is dem displayed for selection of one or several files vea The modems will be added to the bottom of the modem list and the decoder files will be copied to the folder code respectively Export mo Export the modem currently selected in the modem list to a data medium The respective de dem coder files txt bin for this modem will be exported as well Table 10 Modem Menu Items Modem List Menu Windows Help New modern list Load modem list CtrlH R kd Save modern list Ctrl U Save modern list as Import moden list u Export modern list Figure 34 Modem List Menu
321. tus Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 248 PACTOR I FEC Features PACTOR I General Information Pactor ll mode is a proprietary standard developed by SCS GmbH amp Co KG Hanau Germany lt is an advancement of the Pactor mode Usage ARQ and data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation DBPSK DQPSK 8 DPSK 16 DPSK Channel spacing Hz 200 Bandwidth Hz 450 Symbol rate Bd 200 Convolutional FEG code Table 249 PACTOR II Characteristics 254 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE 15 06 21 500 15 06 22 000 15 06 22 500 15 06 23 000 15 06 23 500 4 k dBFS o 50 100 1000 800 600 400 200 B 200 400 600 800 1000 Hz Figure 254 PACTOR II Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Pactor Il Min burst length 0 300 Min pause length 0 035 Min burst SNR dB 0 VER file name Table 250 PACTOR II Demodulator Settings S Max burst length s s B Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Demoduaton yes AN es es es O es Decoding Y Automatic Polarity Adjustment no oo Combination with other modems modem list Table 251 PACTOR II Features y n PACTOR II FEC General Information Pactor Il FEC mode is a proprietary standard developed by SCS GmbH amp Co KG H
322. type Multiple SR Min burst length s 0 120 Max burst length s 1 000 Min pause length s 0 170 Table 244 PACTOR I Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 245 PACTOR I Features 252 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 PACTOR FEC General Information S go2DECODE Pactor l mode is a proprietary standard developed by SCS GmbH amp Co KG Hanau Germany The FEC Unproto variant is used for broadcast transmissions Usage Broadcast data transmissions over HF During call set up Pactor I FEC mode is used Mode Properties Parameter 2 200 Number of tones 12 SM J0 Symbol rate Bd Table 246 PACTOR I FEC Characteristics 15 06 36 000 15 06 36 500 15 06 37 000 15 06 37 500 15 06 36 000 dBF5 0 50 100 1000 DUU 600 400 200 200 400 Figure 253 PACTOR I FEC Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Symbol rate Bd 1 200 20 SA tolerance Gd jas Shift Hz d Shift tolerance Hz Modem type Multiple SR Table 247 PACTOR FEC Demodulator Settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 600 800 1000 Hz Standard Decoders HF e 253 S go2DECODE Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Sta
323. ual go2DECODE 3 4 List of Figures e 325 SS go2DECODE Fig re 44 APG NPA EE Je 44 Figure 45 ee E Let ra IPODUD d UE 45 Figure 46 Tab Demod with Demodulator Drop Down List sese 45 Figure 47 Demodulator Table of Symbols AAA 46 Figure 48 Parameters for Decoder Gelechon 47 Figure 49 List Of Ree 48 Figure 50 Modem Parameter Setting esses nennen nennen nennen nnn nsn nnn nnne 49 Figure 51 Audio Paramete S mesones eee 50 Figure 52 Examples of Signal Analysis with this Applcaton 53 Figure 53 Spectrum Sonagram Display 56 Figure 54 Spectrum Sonagram Popup Men 57 Figure 55 Spectrum Sonagram Parameters Tab 59 Figure 56 Spectrum Sonagram Display Cursor Tab 61 Figure 57 Spectrum Sonagram Display Extras Tab 63 Figure 58 Cursor for Selection of Audio Output Frequency occccccccoccconcccnonccnncnononnnonononancnnnonnnanennnnonennnonnns 63 Figure 59 Loading of a Curve for Gomparson 64 Figure 60 Peak Hold Comparison ccccccccocccncccccnnconcccnonncnnnnnnnnncnnnnononnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnrnnnrnnrnnonanennnns 64 Figure 6i EN 65 Figure 62 Spectrum Display Parameters Tab 66 Figure 63 Spectrum Display Cursor Tab 68 Figure 64 Spectrum Display Extras Tab 69 Figure 65 Curve to Compare with 69 Figure 66 Eye Pattern DISDIGV ssessenxssssdwixs FEE vaxeFGsqubXskGa recu E AAA 70 Figure 67 Eye Pattern Display Parameters Tab 70 Figure 68 Eye Pattern Display Cursor Tab 72 Figure 69
324. ulation FSK Number of tones Shit Hz Bandwidth Hz Symbol rate Bd Table 282 SI FEC Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 269 go2DECODE dBF5 D 50 100 Demodulator Settings Tuning 15 07 00 000 15 07 00 500 15 07 01 000 15 07 01 500 15 07 02 000 j d n 500 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 o 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Hz Figure 265 SI FEC Spectrogram Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd SR tolerance Bd Shift Hz Shift tolerance Hz Table 283 SI FEC Demodulator Settings The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 284 SI FEC Features 270 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Sa go2DECODE SITOR A General Information SImplex Teletype Over Radio SITOR is a mode for maritime communications to exchange teletype data over a radio channel in a robust way SITOR A is the ARQ variant Usage Basic maritime data communication over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation SK Number of tones 2 Shift Hz 170 Bandwidth Hz 350 Symbol rate Bd 100 Error correction ARQ Alphabet ITA 2 Table 285 SITOR A Characteristics 15 08 19 000 15 08 19 500 15 06 20 000 15 08 20 500 15 08 21 000 dBF5 D 50 100
325. ulator MDPSK 2 4 8 16 A B Symbol rate Bd 208 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Parameter Default Channel distance Hz 200 VER file name cis 12 psk4 ver Table 152 CIS 12 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 153 CIS 12 Features CIS 14 General Information CIS 14 is a synchronous duplex teleprinter system with ARQ This modem system is also known as AMOR and AMOR96 Usage Data communication over HF Point to point communication between stations in CIS Commonwealth of Independent States region Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of channels Shift Hz 500 Bandwidth Hz 700 Symbol rate Baud 96 Alphabet M2 cyrillic Table 154 CIS 14 Characteristics User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 209 go2 DECODE 15 06 15 000 15 06 15 500 15 06 16 000 15 06 16 500 15 06 17 000 4 4 t dBFS 0 50 100 1000 DUU 600 400 00 o 200 400 DUU S00 1000 Hz Figure 222 CIS 14 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate B 9 Shift Hz 500 Shift tolerance Hz 10 Table 155 CIS 14 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation
326. uracies in the amplitude attenuation as well as in the bandwidth expansion of a signal due to the finite signal probe These inaccuracies can be reduced using window ing high band width accuracy Rectangle Hanning Hamming Kaiser Blackman low Flat Top band width accuracy low good magnitude accuracy magnitude accuracy Number of spectrums that can be calculated and displayed within one second This pa rameter serves to set the time resolution for the sonagram thus also setting the scroll speed Display mode In mode Line the spectrum is displayed as a closed curve In mode Beam the individual values are displayed as bars Peak hold time MPeak hold pause lt Pause gt lt Autorange gt 60 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 When the time adjusted has elapsed the peak hold the red curve in the spectrum will be reset by setting on the current spectrum O means no reset This checkbox serves to freeze the continuous display after a period specified in the spin box Peak Hold Time button Pause is activated and locked It can only be ticked if the button lt Peak Hold gt has been activated This function will not stop the signal flow between the signal processing modules To reac tivate the continuous update of the display press the button lt Pause gt again toggle switch In Pause the display is stopped not the signal processing Modification of the param
327. ure 189 Figure 190 Figure 191 Figure 192 Figure 193 Figure 194 Figure 195 Figure 196 Figure 197 Figure 198 Figure 199 Figure 200 Figure 201 Figure 202 Figure 203 Figure 204 Figure 205 Figure 206 Figure 207 Figure 208 Figure 209 Figure 210 Figure 211 Figure 212 Figure 213 Figure 214 Figure 215 Figure 216 go2DECODE Frequency Table for Multitone ModemsS a00nnnnannnnnannnnannnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnonnrrnnnrrronnrrnnnnrrrnnrrenene 144 Multichannel e 145 SIMS e SEE EN 145 ME A e PE OPC RO A A 145 DPSK 2 4 8 16 A B Param ele EE 146 Phase to Symbol Conversion Table coooooococononcncccnnnnnnnononnnonononnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrononnnnaannos 146 PSK Channel Filter ParameterS ccccccsceeceecccssesececccsseeceescceeeeceesccseneeesscaseneeessoeseeeesses 146 PSK 2 4 8 16 AB Parameters HENNEN caia 147 PSK data aided Parameters c cccccccccsceeeeccesccceeececscceseeeeesccusneeeesscuseeeeessesseeeeeseoeseesenses 147 MDSPK 2 4 A B barameiers ccc cccceccecceeceeceeceeeneeceeceeeeeceeceeeececeenesaeeneeneeneeseeseeseeseeseeseeness 147 MSPK 2 4 8 AB en 148 PT PTE contaminacion cco m Rd 148 ASK2PSK8 ASK4PSK8 Parameters cccccoooncnncccncocconcconnnncononononnnononononnnnnononannnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnanenss 148 PP 148 UU TUE CUISSON 149 FOM E 149 OFDM Constellation E 149 MEN vr AX 150 Analogue Selcall Parameters rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnvrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsssssnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnn
328. ure Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 188 Coquelet 13 Features 226 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Coquelet 80 General Information The Coquelet modes were designed for the communications of French customs and police authorities They are similar to the British Piccolo modes Coquelet 80 is the extension of Coquelet 8 by FEC Usage Transfer of textual information mostly encrypted over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value 300 Number of tones Shit He Bandwidth Hz 300 Symbol rate Baud Alphabet ITA 2 ATU 80 Table 189 Coquelet 80 Characteristics 15 05 58 500 15 05 59 000 15 05 59 500 15 06 00 000 15 06 00 500 dBFS 0 50 100 DUU 00 600 500 400 300 00 100 o 100 200 300 400 S00 600 00 au Hz Figure 234 Coquelet 80 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator Coquelet Tone duration ms No oftones In coquelet 80 ver Table 190 Coquelet 80 Demodulator Settings User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 227 d go2DECODE Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Automatic Polarity Adjustment yes Combination with other modems modem list yes Table 191 Coquelet 80 Features DGPS General Information DGPS is a radio standard for transmission o
329. vated cursors the zoom via rectangle will take priority After zooming the rectangle shown as a white dotted 76 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Parameter Function line will disappear Otherwise simply click any position in the display window to delete the rectangle Each time the button lt Zoom Out gt is activated the display area is enlarged by factor 2 With disabled cursors the zoom is exclusively made in X direction lt Pause gt In Pause the display is stopped not the signal processing Modification of the parameters is possible for a more detailed analysis of the current signal range lt Autorange gt Automatic setting of the displayed range to view the total amplitude frequency and phase range The mode Autorange analyzes approx 12 vectors The display is adapted on every change of the range On pressing lt Autorange gt again this process will be deactivated tog gle Table 44 Analysis Display Cursor Parameters Extras Analysis display Parameter Cursor Extras Display Standard wi Figure 73 Analysis Display Extras Tab The lt Extras gt tab features additional options with regard to the display type The list box Display serves to select the color schemes for the displays Color Scheme Foreground Color Background Color Table 45 Analysis Display Color Schemes Constellation Display The constellation display shows the
330. vated in X direction They are used to measure values of time Y Cursors The cursors are activated deactivated in Y direction They are used to measure the values on the Y axis which varies from display to display i e phase frequency etc The cursors are activated in Z direction They are used to measure values of time Dropdown Menu 2 Cursor mode 2 independent moveable cursors will be displayed in the window Harmonic Several cursors are activated at equidistant intervals In this mode the first cursor will move all other cursors The intervals are defined by grabbing and moving the second or any follow ing cursor The Harmonic function can only be applied in combination with X cursors Y cursors or Z cursors It serves to measure repeating intervals Mirrored Several cursors are activated at equidistant intervals Cursor 1 will be on one side and in the middle of the even numbered equidistant cursor and the odd numbered equidistant cursor is located on the other side If you move one cursor except cursor 1 all other cursors besides cursor 1 will move symmetrically Centred Several cursors are activated at equidistant intervals In contrast to lt Mirrored gt all cursors except cursor 1 and the cursor which is in the opposite of the first mirrored cursor are mov ing lt Delta gt This button serves to insert a specific number of numbered cursors Number 2 at equidis tant intervals in the area delimited by Cursor1
331. vating lt Alt gt lt gt gt The text string to complete must consist of at least two characters Automatic Indentation On pressing Return this function inserts the same number of blank spaces as in the previous line Ad ditionally it will insert two blanks after an f Case For Switch or While command Activate and deactivate the automatic indentation on the Extras menu The setting remains unchanged on exiting the program and still be active next time you start the decoder editor Show Parameter Information This function shows the list of available parameters for a valid DDL command when entering the bracket character Output parameters are displayed in blue optional parameters are in Italics During the input the current parameter is shown in bold and underlined characters ValPattern CarePattern Repeat Tol Faute Gapim Gap Found Figure 142 Decoder Status Bar The parameter information remains on screen until you enter the character in the current line or when clicking anywhere else on screen or when entering something else which is no valid DDL command or when scrolling the text in the editor pane Activate and deactivate the parameter information on the Extras menu The setting remains unchanged on exiting the program and still be active next time you start the decoder editor Compile Directory This function serves to compile all decoders in a specific directory On activation of this item on the Extras
332. volved from telegraphic codes Its first commercial use was as a seven bit code for teleprinting promoted by Bell data services ASCII includes definitions for 128 characters 33 are non printing control characters many now obsolete for formatting and 95 printable characters both upper and lower case Signals consist of 1 start bit 7 or 8 data bits 1 or 2 stop bit and optionally a parity bit thus each character consists of a total of 9 10 or 11 bits BCH In coding theory the BCH codes form a class of parameterized error correcting codes BCH codes were invented in 1959 by Hocquenghem and independently in 1960 by Bose and Ray Chaudhuri The acro nym BCH comprises the initials of these inventors names User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Glossary of Terms e 319 SS go2DECODE Reed Solomon codes which are BCH codes are used in applications such as satellite communications compact disc players DVDs disk drives and two dimensional bar codes In technical terms a BCH code is a multilevel cyclic variable length digital error correcting code used to correct multiple random error patterns BCH codes may also be used with multilevel phase shift keying whenever the number of levels is a prime number or a power of a prime number A BCH code in 11 levels has been used to represent the 10 decimal digits plus a sign digit Context menu A context menu also called contextual shortcut popup or pop up menu is a menu in a graphical user in terfa
333. windows will be restored if acti vated via the menu Help Menu Help Hep Decoder Description Language About Figure 36 Help Menu This menu provides detailed information about various subjects Menu Item Function Application help Activate this item to display the present Operating Manual Decoder description language Displays the operating manual for the decoder description language About sd Displays a splash screen showing the version and copyright information Table 13 Help Menu ltems Toolbar The toolbar displays the major functions of the menu bar as icons To activate the desired function left click the respective icon 220 ULLI EET we JANA sal Figure 37 SDA Toolbar BETEL The functions are listed in the order as they appear on the toolbar Icon Function 3 Open constellation display Open eye pattern display Open eye time pattern display au o Open spectrum sonagram aB 36 e SDA Signal Display and Analysis User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2 DECODE Function Open analysis display Open Hell display Open bit display Open result display Dropdown list box featuring the menu items D Stop the signal processing of the APC SDA will not receive any further signal data Start the signal processing of the APC SDA will now receive signal data Automat on off Production Record demodulator output Audio out on off Table 14 SDA Toolbar Icons Short
334. x system designed for low error rate ex change of textual data between two stations of governmental authorities Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones Shift Hz 430 Bandwidth Hz 600 800 Symbol rate Bd 96 200 Alphabet ITA 3 Table 112 ARQ M2 242 Characteristics 188 e Standard Decoders HF User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 X go2 DECODE 15 05 49 500 15 05 50 000 15 05 50 500 15 05 51 000 15 05 51 500 y dBFS 50 100 1000 500 600 400 200 200 400 600 500 1000 Hz Figure 208 ARQ M2 242 Spectrogram Demodulator Settings Parameter Default Demodulator FSK 2 matched Symbol rate Bd 96 Shit He VER file name ar m2 242 96bd_430hz ver Table 113 ARQ M2 242 Demodulator Settings Tuning The tuning frequency is the center of the signal Status Feature Status Demodulation Automatic Polarity Adjustment Combination with other modems modem list Table 114 ARQ M2 242 Features User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 Standard Decoders HF e 189 D go2 DECODE ARQ M2 342 General Information ARQ M2 242 is a synchronous full duplex time division multiplex system designed for low error rate ex change of textual data between two stations of governmental authorities Usage Transfer of textual information over HF Mode Properties Parameter Value Modulation FSK Number of tones 2 Shift Hz
335. y as well as the centre frequency in the spin box Frequency To enable the APC to process the signal correctly the frequency of this signal must fit i e the pro cessing result mainly depends on the input in the spin box Frequency The frequency of most of the sig nals will fit when the centre of the signal is in zero position Spectrum Display The spectrum of the input signal and the output signal can be displayed each with adjusted filter range The items to be displayed can be selected in the second dropdown list box on the toolbar input Signal source output Output to IF SDA 26 e Starting go2DECODE User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 go2DECODE SDA Signal Display and Analysis Menu and Shortcuts d ax mu T T S SJ bM aad Figure 28 SDA Menu Bar The following menus and menu items can be activated using the menu bar Menu Function File Load and save settings terminate SDA Edt Copy and paste text Display Start signal displays Extras Controltunctins of APC Modem Functions to maintain modens Windows Functions to control the windows and the propery sheets Hep Documentation and information about SDA Table 7 SDA Menu wile Edit Display Extras Modem Load settings Ckri L Save settings Chlo Save settings automatically Exit Figure 29 File Menu This menu serves to load and save SDA settings The following settings can be saved Window position and window size of
336. ype CCIR 1 PCCIR Min burst length Max burst length Min pause length Clover Il Modulation order Adaptive equaliser Min burst length Max burst length Min pause length Clover 2000 Modulation order Adaptive equaliser Min burst length Max burst length Min pause length Min burst SNR Figure 180 Clover 2000 Parameters 150 ANNEX 3 Demodulator Parameters User Manual go2DECODE 3 4 S go2DECODE Demodulator Additional Settings Clover 2500 Contrd Demod Decod Extras Demodulator Modulation order Adaptive equaliser Min burst length Max burst length Min pause length Min burst SNR Figure 181 Clover 2500 Parameters Coquelet Control Decod i Audio Special filter demodulator for Coquelet Control Demod Gerd Extras Audo Tone duration 37 500 ms Tone duration tolerance 2 000 ms 5 No of tones SL Tone distance 26 670 Hz 3 Min burst length 0 216 s 7 Max burst length 3 520 s Min pause length 0 075 s Pactor II III Demodulator Adaptive equaliser Min burst length Max burst length Min pause length Min burst SNR Figure 183 Pactor Il Ill Parameters Table 87 Demodulator Settings Note A modem plugin mechanism has been added to the APC This decoder interface can be used to in tegrate demodulators which have been developed by the customer and which he will not distribute For more information please c

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

C167CR-16R ES-AA, AA (historic/no update)  F-25-MP-04-05-03 - gicuv  取扱説明書（PDF: 0.1 MB）    Philips AVENT SCF154/40  Biotype ® Template Files for Genotyper  COBOL85 V2.2 Benutzerhandbuch  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file